Home

Nortel Networks 43W7774 Switch User Manual

1. Auto Monitor Menu addtrnk Add trunk to Auto Monitor remtrnk Remove trunk from Auto Monitor addkey Add LACP port adminkey to Auto Monitor remkey Remove LACP port adminkey from Auto Monitor cur Display current Auto Monitor configuration Table 6 49 Auto Monitor Menu Options cfg l2 failovr trigger amon Command Syntax and Usage addtrnk lt Trunk Group number 1 11 gt Adds a trunk group to the Auto Monitor remtrnk lt Trunk Group number 1 11 gt Removes a trunk group from the Auto Monitor addkey lt J 65535 gt Adds a LACP admin key to the Auto Monitor LACP trunks formed with this admin key will be included in the Auto Monitor remkey lt 1 65535 gt Removes a LACP admin key from the Auto Monitor cur Displays the current Auto Monitor settings 242 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 12 vlan lt VLAN number gt VLAN Configuration VLAN 1 Menu pvlan Protocol VLAN Menu privlan Private VLAN Menu name Set VLAN name stg Assign VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group add Add port to VLAN rem Remove port from VLAN def Define VLAN as list of ports ena Enable VLAN dis Disable VLAN del Delete VLA cur Display current VLAN configuration The commands in this menu configure VLAN attributes change the status of each VLAN change the port membership of each VLAN and delete VLANs
2. ccccsssecececeseseeeeeeeees 250 subnet mask subnets n s IP interfaces an saci ihigs teed ded E a 250 switch name and location ccesesesesesseeseeeees 58 70 POSSUM A sacs sensi ccvsercess E 337 syslog system host log configuration 00cc0e 177 system contact SNMP option s eeceeeeeeseeeeees 190 Gate and TIME viccccsssccisiecuorsdlovisssebekestevnenes 58 70 information 2 eee cece eeeeececeeeeeecececesesteeeeeeees 70 location SNMP option cccceeesereeeeeees 190 System Information eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee System Maintenance Menu system options admpw administrator password ee0e0 205 cur current system parameters 181 188 203 AL EN E E ARET T AER Aippromipticsessicccapicicceesteacesteedezseesncdeacuandcnanends login banner T tab completion CLI c ceceessesecececeseeteeeeeeees 54 tactics os eis chines TACACS TCR esccctecssiees TCP Statistics cccsesssssccccceceececeeeeceseeeees 149 162 Telnet configuring switches USING eeseeeeeeeeeeeee 321 telnet radins SEVER sese e nn n sabevavesssivdeoeas 180 Telnet support optional setup for Telnet support 008 42 text CONVENTIONS ccscsesssessecececeececeeesceesecesenens 16 TEIP eoa E 333 PUT and GET commands 0sessseeseeeees 322 Index E 7 Alteon OS Command Reference TPT SCL 60 25 0c5ccecieseebesesia sd steasuonase
3. NoTE The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens displayed by your system Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed Port information includes Port alias Whether the port uses VLAN tagging or not y or n Port VLAN ID PVID Port name VLAN membership Whether the port is configured for Port Fast Fowarding Fast Whether the port is enabled for FDB Learning Lrn 120 The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference info geaport Logical Port to GEA Port Mapping Alias Logical Port GEA Port 0 based GEA Unit INTL 1 15 0 INT2 2 19 0 INT3 3 18 0 INT4 4 17 0 INT5 5 13 0 INT6 6 11 0 INT7 7 10 0 INTS 8 8 0 INTO 9 2 0 INT1O 10 1 0 INT11 11 5 0 INT12 12 4 0 INT13 13 20 0 INT14 14 6 0 GT 15 22 0 EXT1 17 25 0 EXT2 18 26 0 EXT3 19 27 0 EXT4 20 0 0 NoTE The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens displayed by your system Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed This display correlates the port alias to logical port number and shows the GEA unit on which each port resides 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu E 121 Alteon OS Command Reference info s
4. tracking criteria virtual router group VRRP priority tracking eee eeeseeeeeeeeeee 299 virtual router group configuration sees 299 8 m Index virtual router group priority tracking 0 301 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP authentication parameters for IP interfaces 302 group options PLIO se eeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 300 operations level Options esseeeeeseeeeeeeeee 327 password authentication we 302 priority election for the virtual router 297 priority tracking Options eeeeeeees 278 298 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol configuration294 virtual routers increasing priority level Of eeeeseeeeeeeeee 298 master preemption preemM eeeseeeeeeeees 300 master preemption PTiO sseeeeeseeeeeeeees 297 priority increment values vrs for VRRP 303 VLAN ACHVE POFE 5 ie svcdesvennscecedscecovicss sndeveensseesrocesy 301 COMP PUTALOM s5 ssassucesarecssveensvedesversrvaesiveess 243 VLAN tagging port configuration cece eee eeeeeeeeeeee port restrictiONS eeeeeeeeeeeee ee ARP entry information eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee informa OM sesine errena kE RE aiaa Da1 KTO e EEE EEEE NAME s t p sessir seeiis port membership sees setting default number PVID TAQPING neceser nnes VLAN Number ss sscscesivscscuccseascaceccsestestvesiecsas VRID virtual router ID
5. c cece cece eee VRRP interface configuration master advertisements Pe tacking ceeds a n eseiiea Weis noc aecaatoeenineens tracking configuration eeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeee VRRP Information ccccceececseeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeees VRRP master advertisements timeintetval sssrin isn 300 VRRP statistics ecccceceeseseseeessensneneanaceeeeeeeees 158 W watchdog timer eeseecesseeecesseeeceeeeceseeeeenes 340 weights setting virtual router priority values 303 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference write community string SNMP option 190 43W7774 May 2007 Index E 9
6. Group Name Prefix Model Level Match Readv Writev NotifyV viv2grp snmpvl noAuthNoPriv exact iso iso viv2only admingrp usm authPriv exact iso iso iso Table 4 6 SNMPv3 Access Table Information info sys snmpv3 access Field Description Group Name Displays the name of group Prefix Displays the prefix that is configured to match the values Model Displays the security model used for example SNMPv1 or SNMPv 2 or USM Level Displays the minimum level of security required to gain rights of access For example noAuthNoPriv authNoPriv or auth Priv Match Displays the match for the contextName The options are exact and prefix Readv Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the read access Writev Displays the MIB view to which this entry authorizes the write access NotifyV Displays the Notify view to which this entry authorizes the notify access 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu E 63 Alteon OS Command Reference info sys snmpv3 group SNMPv3 Group Table Information A group is a combination of security model and security name that defines the access rights assigned to all the security names belonging to that group The group is identified by a group name Sec Model User Name Group Name snmpv1l viv2only viv2grp usm adminmd5 admingrp usm adminsha admingrp Table 4 7 SNMPv3 Group Table Information Parameters info sys snmpv3 group Fiel
7. cur Displays current Layer 2 parameters 214 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 12 8021x 802 1x Configuration 802 1x Configuration Menu global Global 802 1x configuration menu port Port 802 1x configuration menu ena Enable 802 1x access control dis Disable 802 1x access control cur Show 802 1x configuration This feature allows you to configure the GbESM as an IEEE 802 1x Authenticator to provide port based network access control Table 6 29 802 1x Configuration Menu cfg l2 8021 x Command Syntax and Usage global Displays the global 802 1x Configuration Menu To view menu options see page 216 port lt port alias or number gt Displays the 802 1x Port Menu To view menu options see page 219 ena Globally enables 802 1x dis Globally disables 802 1x cur Displays current 802 1x parameters 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 215 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 12 8021x global 802 1x Global Configuration 802 1x Global Configuration Menu gvlan 802 1x Guest VLAN configuration menu mod Set access control mode qtperiod Set EAP Request Identity quiet time interval txperiod Set EAP Request Identity retransmission timeout suptmout Set EAP Request retransmission timeout svrtmout Set server authentication request timeout maxreq Set max number of EAP Request retransmissio
8. NOTE If you forget your administrator password call your technical support representative for help using the password fix up mode Changing the Default Administrator Password The administrator has complete access to all menus information and configuration com mands including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords The default password for the administrator account is admin To change the default password follow this procedure 1 Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password 2 From the Main Menu use the following command to access the Configuration Menu Maint cfg The Configuration Menu is displayed Configuration Menu sys System wide Parameter Menu port Port Menu 12 Layer 2 Menu 13 Layer 3 Menu qos QOS Menu acl Access Control List Menu pmirr Port Mirroring Menu setup Step by step configuration set up dump Dump current configuration to script file ptcfg Backup current configuration to FTP TFTP server gtcfg Restore current configuration from FTP TFTP server cur Display current configuration 3 From the Configuration Menu use the following command to select the System Menu gt gt Configuration sys 43W7774 May 2007 First Time Configuration 43 Alteon OS Command Reference The System Menu is displayed System Menu syslog Syslog Menu sshd SSH Server Men
9. NoTE Resetting the switch causes the date and time to revert to default values Use cfg sys date and cfg sys time to reenter the current date and time To reset the switch at the Boot Opt ions prompt enter gt gt Boot Options reset You are prompted to confirm your request Accessing the ISCLI The default command line interface for the GbESM is the Alteon OS CLI To access the ISCLI enter the following command and reset the GbESM Main boot mode iscli To access the Alteon OS CLI enter the following command from the ISCLI and reload the GbESM Router config boot cli mode aos Users can select the CLI mode upon login if the boot prompt command is enabled Only an administrator connected through the console port can view and enable boot prompt When boot prompt is enabled the first user to log in can select the CLI mode Subse quent users must use the selected CLI mode until all users have logged out 43W7774 May 2007 The Boot Options Menu E 337 Alteon OS Command Reference 338 m The Boot Options Menu 43W7774 May 2007 CHAPTER 9 The Maintenance Menu The Maintenance Menu is used to manage dump information and forward database informa tion It also includes a debugging menu to help with troubleshooting 43W7774 May 2007 339 Alteon OS Command Reference maint Maintenance Menu NoTE To use the Maintenance Menu you must be logged in to the switch as the admi
10. Note The interface number 1 to 127 represents the IP interface on which authentication parameters must be configured VRRP Interface 1 Menu auth Set authentication types passw Set plain text password del Delete interfac cur Display current VRRP interface configuration This menu is used for configuring VRRP authentication parameters for the IP interfaces used with the virtual routers Table 6 96 VRRP Interface Menu Options cfg I3 vrrp if Command Syntax and Usage auth none password Defines the type of authentication that will be used none no authentication or password password authentication passw lt password gt Defines a plain text password up to eight characters long This password will be added to each VRRP packet transmitted by this interface when password authentication is chosen see auth above del Clears the authentication configuration parameters for this IP interface The IP interface itself is not deleted cur Displays the current configuration for this IP interface s authentication parameters 302 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 vrrp track VRRP Tracking Configuration VRRP Tracking Menu vrs Set priority increment for virtual router tracking ifs Set priority increment for IP interface tracking ports Set priority increment for VLAN switch port tracking cur Display current V
11. ipReasmFails ipFragOKs The number of failures detected by the IP re assembly algorithm for whatever reason timed out errors and so forth Note that this is not nec essarily a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms notably the algorithm in RFC 815 can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received The number of IP datagrams that have been successfully fragmented at this entity the switch ipFragFails The number of IP datagrams that have been discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this entity the switch but could not be for example because their Don t Fragment flag was set ipFragCreates The number of IP datagram fragments that have been generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity the switch ipRoutingDiscards The number of routing entries which were chosen to be discarded even though they are valid One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to free up buffer space for other routing entries ipDefaultTTL The default value inserted into the Time To Live TTL field of the IP header of datagrams originated at this entity the switch whenever a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol ipReasmTimeout The maximum number of seconds which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity the switch 144 m The Statistics Menu 43W7774 May 2007 stats 13 rou
12. 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu 207 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg sys access https HTTPS Access Configuration https Menu access Enable Disable HTTPS Web access port HTTPS WebServer port number generat Generate self signed HTTPS server certificate certSave save HTTPS certificate cur Display current SSL Web Access configuration Table 6 24 HTTPS Access Configuration Menu Options cfg sys access https Command Syntax and Usage access Enables or disables BBI access Web access using HTTPS port lt TCP port number gt Defines the HTTPS Web server port number generate Allows you to generate a certificate to connect to the SSL to be used during the key exchange A default certificate is created when HTTPS is enabled for the first time The user can create a new certificate defining the information that they want to be used in the various fields For example Country Name 2 letter code CA State or Province Name full name Ontario Locality Name for example city Ottawa Organization Name for example company Blade Organizational Unit Name for example section Alteon Common Name for example user s name Mr Smith Email for example email address info bladenetwork net You will be asked to confirm if you want to generate the certificate It will take approximately 30 seconds to generate the certificate Then the switch will restart SSL
13. Multicast router 2 Menu addr Set IP address of multicast router intr Set interval between ping attempts retry Set number of failed attempts to declare router DOWN restr Set number of successful attempts to declare router UP version Set IGMP version ena Enable multicast router dis Disable multicast router del Delete multicast router cur Display current multicast router configuration Table 6 85 describes the commands used to configure the IGMP Relay multicast router Table 6 83 IGMP Relay Mrouter Menu Options cfg l3 igmp relay mrtr Command Syntax and Usage addr lt P address such as 224 0 1 0 gt Configures the IP address of the IGMP multicast router used for IGMP Relay intr lt J 60 gt Configures the time interval between ping attempts to the upstream Mrouters in seconds The default value is 2 retry lt 120 gt Configures the number of failed ping attempts required before the switch declares this Mrouter is down The default value is 4 restr lt 28 gt Configures the number of successful ping attempts required before the switch declares this Mrouter is up The default value is 5 version lt 2 gt Configures the IGMP version 1 or 2 of the multicast router 286 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 83 IGMP Relay Mrouter Menu Options cfg l3 igmp relay mrtr Command Syntax and Usage ena En
14. 43W7774 May 2007 The Statistics Menu E 153 Alteon OS Command Reference stats 13 ospf general OSPF Global Statistics The OSPF General Statistics contain the sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces OSPF stats Rx Tx Stats Rx Tx Pkts hello 2 database ls requests ls acks ls updates wont w a Wo Nbr change stats Intf change Stats hello hello start down n2way loop adjoint ok unloop negotiation done wait timer exchange done backup bad requests nbr change bad sequence loading done nlway rst_ad down OAoNnroon b FPOONODOGAOAONNNN ON Timers kickoff hello 514 retransmit 1028 lsa lock 0 lsa ack dbage summary ase export O OOG 154 The Statistics Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 5 24 OSPF General Statistics stats I3 ospf general Statistics Description Rx Tx Stats Rx Pkts The sum total of all OSPF packets received on all OSPF areas and inter faces Tx Pkts The sum total of all OSPF packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces Rx Hello The sum total of all Hello packets received on all OSPF areas and inter faces Tx Hello The sum total of all Hello packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces Rx Database The sum total of all Database Description packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces Tx Database The sum total of all Database Description
15. cfg 12 thash set IP Trunk Hash set IP Trunk Hash Settings Menu smac Enable disable smac hash dmac Enable disable dmac hash sip Enable disable sip hash dip Enable disable dip hash cur Display current trunk hash setting Trunk hash parameters are set globally for the GbE Switch Module You can enable one or two parameters to configure any of the following valid combinations 236 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 SMAC source MAC only DMAC destination MAC only SIP source IP only DIP destination IP only SIP DIP source IP and destination IP SMAC DMAC source MAC and destination MAC Alteon OS Command Reference Use the following commands to configure IP trunk hash parameters for the GbDESM Table 6 44 IP Trunk Hash Menu Options cfg l2 thash set Command Syntax and Usage smac enable disable Enable or disable trunk hashing on the source MAC dmac enable disable Enable or disable trunk hashing on the destination MAC sip enable disable Enable or disable trunk hashing on the source IP dip enable disable Enable or disable trunk hashing on the destination IP cur Display current layer 2 trunk hash setting 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 237 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 12 lacp LACP Configuration LACP Menu sysprio Set LACP system priority timeout Set LACP system timeout scale for timing out partner info port
16. cfg acl Access Control List Configuration ACL Menu acl Access Control List Item Config Menu group Access Control List Group Config Menu cur Display current ACL configuration Use this menu to create Access Control Lists and ACL Groups ACLs define matching criteria used for IP filtering and Quality of Service functions Table 6 101 ACL Menu Options cfg acl Command Syntax and Usage acl lt I 896 gt Displays Access Control List configuration menu To view menu options see page 308 group lt 896 gt Displays ACL Group configuration menu To view menu options see page 318 cur Displays the current ACL parameters 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 307 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg acl acl lt ACL number gt ACL Configuration ACL 1 Menu thernet Ethernet Header Options Menu ipv4 IP Header Options Menu tcpudp TCP UDP Header Options Menu meter ACL tering Configuration Menu re mark ACL Re mark Configuration Menu pkt fmt Set to filter specific packet format types egrport Set to filter for packets egressing this port action Set filter action stats Enable disable statistics for this acl reset Reset filtering parameters cur Display current filter configuration These menus allow you to define filtering criteria for each Access Control List ACL Table 6 102 ACL Menu Options cfg acl acl x Command Syntax
17. preem disable enable Enables or disables master preemption When enabled if this virtual router is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master this virtual router will preempt the lower priority mas ter and assume control Note that even when preem is disabled this virtual router will always pre empt any other master if this switch is the owner the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same By default this option is enabled ena Enables this virtual router dis Disables this virtual router del Deletes this virtual router from the switch configuration cur Displays the current configuration information for this virtual router 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 297 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 vrrp vr lt router number gt track Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration VRRP Virtual Router 1 Priority Tracking Menu vrs Enable disable tracking master virtual routers ifs Enable disable tracking other interfaces ports Enable disable tracking VLAN switch ports cur Display current VRRP virtual router configuration This menu is used for modifying the priority system used when electing the master router from a pool of virtual routers Various tracking criteria can be used to bias the election results Each time one of the tracking criteria is met the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined th
18. ssssssesssssereeseseee 181 188 203 43W7774 May 2007 D date SOLU o ET A system option daylight savings time EDWG ging fe ccccssay ca scestaviaks ond EE S E SiE default gateway IMFOPMALON sieca eci a e na a E E E 96 interval for health checks csceeeeeeeees 251 default password ccsccessssecesecceesseeeceesteeeseeeens 27 delete FDB entry designated port s ssssesessesssresssrterrrrerrererresrreesre 101 diff global command viewing changes 173 direct IP route type oo eesecesseeeeesseeceeseeeeneeeees 98 directed broadcasts eesseecessseeesseeeeeseeeeeteeers 257 DISABLED port state ccccssceceeeeeseeteeeeeeeees 87 disconnect idle timeout 0 0 eeeeeeeesseeeeeneeeeeeeees 29 DNS statistics anioe a eE E ES 146 downloading software ssseessseeerreeerreeerresreeesee 331 dump configuration command sseeeeseeeeeeeesereree 321 MA NTENANCE sssini rein raske sirenek 339 state information eeeeseeeesseesrererrererrreeree 352 duplex mode link Status cccccceeeeseseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 56 119 dynamis Outs 0 0 ee eeeeesseeceeeceeenseeeeseeeeceseeers 346 E EtherChannel as used with port trunking 0 0 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeee 235 F factory configuration DIOCK ccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeee factory default configuration failover COMPIQUTAION 3 0sscsnnncncsscdovocechectsnoedeteceene 240 FDB statistics ivicissss
19. cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 access View based Access Control Model Configuration The view based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user Access control is needed when the user has to process SNMP retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity SNMPv3 vacmAccess 1 Menu name Set group name prefix Set content prefix model Set security model level Set minimum level of security match Set prefix only or exact match rview Set read view index wview Set write view index nview Set notify view index del Delete vacmAccess entry cur Display current vacmAccess configuration Table 6 13 View based Access Control Model Menu Options cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 access Command Syntax and Usage name lt 32 character name gt Defines the name of the group prefix lt 32 character name gt Defines the name of the context An SNMP context is a collection of management information that an SNMP entity can access An SNMP entity has access to many contexts For more information on naming the management information see RFC2571 the SNMP Architecture document The view based Access Control Model defines a table that lists the locally available contexts by con textName model usm snmpv1 snmpv2 Allows you to select the security model to be used level noAuthNoPriv authNoPriv authPriv Defines the minimum level of security require
20. ena Enables this IGMP filter dis Disables this IGMP filter del Deletes this filter s parameter definitions cur Displays the current IGMP filter 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 289 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 igmp igmpflt port lt port alias or number gt IGMP Filtering Port Configuration IGMP Port filt add EXT1 Menu Enable disable IGMP filtering on port Add IGMP filter to port rem cur Remove IGMP filter from port Display current IGMP filtering Port configuration Table 6 87 describes the commands used to configure a port for IGMP filtering Table 6 87 IGMP Filter Port Menu Options cfg l3 igmp igmpflt port Command Syntax and Usage filt enable disable Enables or disables IGMP filtering on this port add lt filter number 1 16 gt Adds an IGMP filter to this port rem lt filter number 1 16 gt Removes an IGMP filter from this port cur Displays the current IGMP filter parameters for this port 290 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 igmp adv IGMP Advanced Configuration IGMP Advanced Menu gqintrval Set IGMP query interval robust Set expected packet loss on subnet timeout Set report timeout fastlv Enable disable Fastleave processing in VLAN flood Flood unregistered IPMC cur Display current IGMP Advanced configuration Table
21. Alteon os Command Reference Nortel 10Gb Uplink Ethernet Switch Module for IBM BladeCenter Version 1 1 Part Number 43W7774 May 2007 Solutions by BLADE NORTEL RNE 2350 Mission College Blvd Suite 600 Santa Clara CA 95054 www bladenetwork net Alteon OS Command Reference Copyright 2007 Blade Network Technologies Inc 2350 Mission College Blvd Suite 600 Santa Clara California 95054 USA All rights reserved Part Number 43W7774 This document is protected by copyright and distributed under licenses restricting its use copying distribution and decompilation No part of this document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Blade Network Technologies Inc Documentation is provided as is without warranty of any kind either express or implied including any kind of implied or express warranty of non infringement or the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose U S Government End Users This document is provided with a commercial item as defined by FAR 2 101 Oct 1995 and contains commercial technical data and commercial software documentation as those terms are used in FAR 12 211 12 212 Oct 1995 Government End Users are authorized to use this documentation only in accordance with those rights and restrictions set forth herein consistent with FAR 12 211 12 212 Oct 1995 DFARS 227 7202 JUN 1995 and DFAR
22. LACP port Menu cur Display current LACP configuration Use the following commands to configure Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP for the GbESM Table 6 45 LACP Menu Options cfg I2 lacp Command Syntax and Usage sysprio lt 1 65535 gt Defines the priority value 1 through 65535 for the GDESM Lower numbers provide higher prior ity The default value is 32768 timeout short long Defines the timeout period before invalidating LACP data from a remote partner Choose short 3 seconds or Long 90 seconds The default value is Long Note It is recommended that you use a timeout value of Long to reduce LACPDU processing If your GbESM s CPU utilization rate remains at 100 for periods of 90 seconds or more consider using static trunks instead of LACP port lt port alias or number gt Displays the LACP Port menu To view menu options see page 239 cur Display current LACP configuration 238 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 12 lacp port lt port alias or number gt LACP Port Configuration LACP Port EXT1 Menu mode Set LACP mode prio Set LACP port priority adminkey Set LACP port admin key cur Display current LACP port configuration Use the following commands to configure Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP for the selected port Table 6 46 LACP Port Menu Options cfg l2 lacp port Command Syntax and U
23. Show VLAN information gen Show general information dump Dump all layer 2 information The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 4 12 with point ers to where detailed information can be found Table 4 12 Layer 2 Menu Options info I2 Command Syntax and Usage fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Information Menu For details see page 76 lacp Displays the Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu For details see page 78 gvrp Displays the GVRP Menu For details see page 79 8021x Displays the 802 1x Information Menu For details see page 83 74 m The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 4 12 Layer 2 Menu Options info I2 Command Syntax and Usage stg In addition to seeing if STG is enabled or disabled you can view the following STG bridge infor mation m Priority m Hello interval m Maximum age value m Forwarding delay m Aging time You can also see the following port specific STG information Port alias and priority E Cost E State For details see page 85 cist Displays Common internal Spanning Tree CIST bridge information including the following m Priority m Hello interval m Maximum age value m Forwarding delay You can also view port specific CIST information including the following m Port number and priority m Cost E State For details see page 91 trunk When trunk groups are configured
24. lt link_state_id A B C D gt lt self gt Displays the network summary type 3 LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum all Displays all the LSAs 108 The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference info 13 ospf routes OSPF Information Route Codes Codes IA OSPF inter area N1 OSPF NSSA external type 1 N2 OSPF NSSA external type 2 El OSPF external type 1 E2 OSPF external type 2 TA 10 10 0 0 16 via 200 1 1 2 IA 40 1 1 0 28 via 20 1 1 2 TA 80 1 1 0 24 via 200 1 1 2 TA 100 1 1 0 24 via 20 1 1 2 TA 140 1 1 0 27 via 20 1 1 2 IA 150 1 1 0 28 via 200 1 1 2 E2 172 18 1 1 32 via 30 1 1 2 E2 172 18 1 2 32 via 30 1 1 2 E2 172 18 1 3 32 via 30 1 1 2 E2 172 18 1 4 32 via 30 1 1 2 E2 172 18 1 5 32 via 30 1 1 2 E2 172 18 1 6 32 via 30 1 1 2 E2 172 18 1 7 32 via 30 1 1 2 E2 172 18 1 8 32 via 30 1 1 2 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu 109 Alteon OS Command Reference info 13 rip Routing Information Protocol Information RIP Information Menu routes Show RIP routes dump Show RIP user s configuration Use this menu to view information about the Routing Information Protocol RIP configuration and statistics Table 4 31 RIP Information Menu Options info l3 rip Command Syntax and Usage routes Displays RIP routes For more information
25. Displays a single IGMP multicast group by its IP address vlan lt VLAN number gt Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single VLAN port lt Port number or alias gt Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single port trunk lt Trunk Group number gt Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single trunk group detail lt I P address gt Displays details about IGMP multicast groups including source and timer information dump Displays information for all multicast groups 112 The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference info 13 igmp dump IGMP Group Information Note Local groups 224 0 0 x are not snooped relayed and will not appear Source Group VLAN Port Version Mode Expires Fwd LG Lee 232i 2 EXT4 V3 INC 4 16 Yes iO ea rae apes 232 sielt 2 EXT4 v3 INC 4 16 Yes 232 1 1 1 2 EXT4 v3 INC No 10 10 10 43 2355 0 0 1 9 EXT1 v3 INC 2 26 Yes 236 0 0 1 9 EXT1 v3 EXC Yes IGMP Group information includes E IGMP source address E IGMP Group address E VLAN and port E IGMP version E IGMPV3 filter mode E Expiration timer value E IGMP multicast forwarding state info 13 igmp mrouter IGMP Multicast Router Port Information IGMP Multicast Router Menu vian Show all multicast router ports on a single vlan dump Show all learned multicast router ports Table 4 33 describes the commands used to display information about multicast routers Mrouters learned th
26. If you want to capture dump data to a file set your communication software on your worksta tion to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands 170 The Statistics Menu 43W7774 May 2007 CHAPTER 6 The Configuration Menu This chapter discusses how to use the Command Line Interface CLI for making viewing and saving switch configuration changes Many of the commands although not new display more or different information than in the previous version Important differences are called out in the text 43W7774 May 2007 171 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg Configuration Menu Configuration Menu sys System wide Parameter Menu port Port Menu 12 Layer 2 Menu 13 Layer 3 Menu qos QOS Menu acl Access Control List Menu pmirr Port Mirroring Menu setup Step by step configuration set up dump Dump current configuration to script file ptcfg Backup current configuration to FTP TFTP server gtcfg Restore current configuration from FTP TFTP server cur Display current configuration Each configuration option is briefly described in Table 6 1 with pointers to detailed menu commands Table 6 1 Configuration Menu Options cfg Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays the System Configuration Menu To view menu options see page 175 port lt port alias or number gt Displays the Port Configuration Menu To view menu options see page 209 12 Displays the Layer 2
27. Menu To view menu options see page 233 trunk lt trunk group number 1 11 gt Displays the Trunk Group Configuration Menu To view menu options see page 235 thash Displays the IP Trunk Hash Menu To view menu options see page 236 lacp Displays the Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu To view menu options see page 238 failovr Displays the Failover Configuration Menu To view menu options see page 240 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 213 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 28 Layer 2 Configuration Menu cfg l2 Command Syntax and Usage vlan lt VLAN number 1 4095 gt Displays the VLAN Configuration Menu To view menu options see page 243 upfast enable disable Enables or disables Fast Uplink Convergence which provides rapid Spanning Tree convergence to an upstream switch during failover Note When enabled this feature increases bridge priorities to 65500 for all STGs and path cost by 3000 for all external STP ports update lt 0 200 gt Configures the station update rate The default value is 40 bpdugrd enable disable Enables or disables BPDU guard to avoid spanning tree loops on ports with Port Fast Forwarding enabled cfg port x fastfwd ena macnotif enable disable Enables or disables MAC Address Notification With MAC Address Notification enabled the switch generates a syslog message when a MAC address is added or removed from the MAC address table
28. Secure Shell protocol enables you to securely log into another computer over a network to execute commands remotely As a secure alternative to using Telnet to manage switch configuration SSH ensures that all data sent over the network is encrypted and secure The switch can do only one session of key cipher generation at a time Thus a SSH SCP client will not be able to login if the switch is doing key generation at that time or if another client has just logged in before this client Similarly the system will fail to do the key generation if a SSH SCP client is logging in at that time The supported SSH encryption and authentication methods are listed below E Server Host Authentication Client RSA authenticates the switch in the beginning of every connection E Key Exchange RSA E Encryption 3DES CBC DES E User Authentication Local password authentication Radius The following SSH clients have been tested E SSH 1 2 23 and SSH 1 2 27 for Linux freeware E SecureCRT 3 0 2 and SecureCRT 3 0 3 Van Dyke Technologies Inc E F Secure SSH 1 1 for Windows Data Fellows NoTE The Alteon OS implementation of SSH is based on SSH version 1 5 and supports SSH 1 5 1 X XX SSH clients of other versions especially Version 2 are not supported 24 m The Command Line Interface 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Running SSH Once the IP parameters are configured and the SSH service is turned on the GbE Switch Modul
29. Switch model name and number Switch name and location Time of last boot MAC address of the switch management processor IP address of the management interface Hardware version and part number Software image file and version number Configuration name Log in banner if one is configured For details see page 70 log Displays most recent syslog messages For details see page 72 user Displays configured user names and their status For details see page 73 dump Dumps all switch information available from the Information Menu 10K or more depending on your configuration 58 m The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference info sys snmpv3 SNMPv3 System Information Menu SNMP version 3 SNMPvV3 is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2 Framework by supporting the following E anew SNMP message format E security for messages E access control E remote configuration of SNMP parameters For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC2271 to RFC2276 SNMPv3 Information Menu usm Show usmUser table information view Show vacmViewTreeFamily table information access Show vacmAccess table information group Show vacmSecurityToGroup table information comm Show community table information taddr Show targetAddr table information tparam Show targetParams table information notify Show notify table information dump Sh
30. The Statistics Menu 123 Statistics Menu 123 Port Statistics 125 802 1x Authenticator Statistics 126 802 1x Authenticator Diagnostics 127 Bridging Statistics 129 Ethernet Statistics 131 Interface Statistics 134 Interface Protocol Statistics 136 Link Statistics 136 Layer 2 Statistics 137 FDB Statistics 137 LACP Statistics 138 GVRP Statistics 139 Layer 3 Statistics 141 IP Statistics 143 Route Statistics 145 ARP statistics 145 DNS Statistics 146 ICMP Statistics 146 TCP Statistics 149 UDP Statistics 151 IGMP Statistics 152 OSPF Statistics 153 OSPF Global Statistics 154 VRRP Statistics 158 Routing Information Protocol Statistics 159 Management Processor Statistics 160 MP Packet Statistics 161 TCP Statistics 162 UCB Statistics 163 CPU Statistics 163 ACL Statistics 164 ACL Statistics 164 6 Contents 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference SNMP Statistics 165 NTP Statistics 169 Statistics Dump 170 The Configuration Menu 171 Configuration Menu 172 Viewing Applying and Saving Changes 173 Viewing Pending Changes 173 Applying Pending Changes 174 Saving the Configuration 174 System Configuration 175 System Host Log Configuration 177 SSH Server Configuration 178 RADIUS Server Configuration 180 TACACS Server Configuration 182 LDAP Server Configuration 185 NTP Server Configuration 187 System SNMP Configuration 189 SNMPv3 Configuration 191 User Security Model Configuration 193 SNMPv3 View Configuration 194 View based
31. This Command Reference is intended for network installers and system administrators engaged in configuring and maintaining a network The administrator should be familiar with Ethernet concepts IP addressing the IEEE 802 1d Spanning Tree Protocol and SNMP configuration parameters 14 Preface 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference How This Book Is Organized Chapter 1 The Command Line Interface describes how to connect to the switch and access the information and configuration menus Chapter 2 First Time Configuration describes how to use the Setup utility for initial switch configuration and how to change the system passwords Chapter 3 Menu Basics provides an overview of the menu system including a menu map global commands and menu shortcuts Chapter 4 The Information Menu shows how to view switch configuration parameters Chapter 5 The Statistics Menu shows how to view switch performance statistics Chapter 6 The Configuration Menu shows how to configure switch system parameters ports VLANs Spanning Tree Protocol SNMP Port Mirroring IP Routing Port Trunking and more Chapter 7 The Operations Menu shows how to use commands which affect switch per formance immediately but do not alter permanent switch configurations such as temporarily disabling ports The menu describes how to activate or deactivate optional software features Chapter 8 The Boot Option
32. Total number of IGMP groups ipmcgrps Total number of IPMC groups clrigmp Clear IGMP stats ipclear Clear IP stats dump Dump layer 3 stats The Layer 3 statistics provided by each menu option are briefly described in Table 5 14 with pointers to detailed information Table 5 14 Layer 3 Statistics Menu Options stats I3 Command Syntax and Usage geal3 Displays the Gigabit Ethernet Aggregators GEA statistics menu GEA statistics are used by ser vice and support personnel ip Displays IP statistics See page 143 for sample output route Displays route statistics See page 145 for sample output arp Displays Address Resolution Protocol ARP statistics See page 145 for sample output dns Displays Domain Name System DNS statistics See page 146 for sample output 43W7774 May 2007 The Statistics Menu 141 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 5 14 Layer 3 Statistics Menu Options stats I3 Command Syntax and Usage icmp Displays ICMP statistics See page 146 for sample output tcp Displays TCP statistics See page 149 for sample output udp Displays UDP statistics See page 151 for sample output igmp Displays IGMP statistics See page 152 for sample output ospf Displays OSPF statistics See page 153 for sample output vrrp When virtual routers are configured you can display protocol statistics for VRRP See page 158 for sample output clrvrr
33. Turn port s Spanning Tree OFF cur Display current port Spanning Tree parameters By default for STP PVST Spanning Tree is turned Off for internal ports and management ports and turned On for external ports By default for RSTP MSTP Spanning Tree is turned Off for internal ports and management ports and turned On for external ports with internal ports configured as Edge ports STG port parameters include E Port priority E Port path cost The port option of STG is turned on by default Table 6 39 Spanning Tree Port Menu Options cfg l2 stg port Command Syntax and Usage prior lt new port Priority 0 255 gt Configures the port priority The port priority helps determine which bridge port becomes the des ignated port In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected to a single segment the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment The default value is 128 RSTP MSTP The range is 0 to 240 in steps of 16 0 16 32 and the default is 128 cost lt new port Path Cost 1 65535 0 for default gt Configures the port path cost The port path cost is used to help determine the designated port for a segment Generally speaking the faster the port the lower the path cost The default is 19 for 100Mbps ports 4 for 1Gb ports and 2000 for 10 Gb ports A value of 0 zero indicates that the default cost will be computed for an auto negotiated link speed link
34. are on the same subnet Unapplied changes reverted Unsaved changes reverted SNMP source trap interface lt IF gt is not enabled Password already taken Radius is already turned ON Cannot ena dis primary admin user Cannot change primary admin COS Cannot change primary admin username Cannot delete primary admin Error Enabled user lt user gt has no username Error Enabled user lt user gt has no password New combination of Bridge Timers for STG lt group gt is invalid Need maxage lt 2 frwd 1 and maxage gt 2 hello 1 Multiple VLAN members in non default STG lt group gt Duplicate VLAN members in STGs lt gr1 gt and lt gr2 gt VRRP hot standby port lt port gt is part of a STG lt group gt with STP turned on Error writing active config to FLASH Another save is in progress OR Configuration is too large OR Unknown error Alteon OS Syslog Messages 357 Alteon OS Command Reference LOG_ERROR continued CLI CLI CLI CLI CLI CLI VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP 358 m Alteon OS Syslog Messages A previous apply is being executed Try later RADIUS secret must be 1 lt len gt characters long Please configure primary RADIUS server address TACACS secret must be 1 lt len gt characters long Please configure primary TACACS server address Port Mirroring changes are not applied cfg_sync_tx_putsn ABORTED Synchronization RX connect
35. directed broadcasts sesssessseseseseseeereeseeeese IP forwarding information IP Information sesssessssssssreiossreseriissresssssssioss IP Information Menu IP interface inns cccscecisccccucnewstacescasusceausexsusevensectetes ACUIV EA AN E E A setae configuring address eeen 250 configuring VLANS ceesseesseeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 250 IP INtrfaGeS si s cswenescercsceessoeasdecessoeesbenseoensodsnses information IP ronte taS cocer nuen reari ii priority increment value ifs for VRRP 303 IP network filter configuration eeeeeeeeeeeee 258 IP Route Manipulation Menu eseeeesseeeeeees 346 PP FOULING psoe aep aR 39 tag parameters IP Static Route Menu c0cecesesesessseeeee 253 254 IP statistics eee Layer 2 Meni viviccecises sovevssaan saeattinacacentueeneveessoaemens Layer 3 Menu LEARNING port state link speed configuring ceeceeessseeeeeteeeeseeeees 211 Link Aggregation Control Protocol eee 238 4 E Index link Status cccccccceeeseseeecececceceeceeeesseseeeceeeeeeeees 56 duplex mode pisna ss pott speed ansen na EEEa Link Status Information linkt SNMP option eseeeeeeeee LISTENING port state Imask routing option seseseseseseee Inet routing Option eeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees local IP route type eeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeees log syslog M
36. fwd lt 4 30 seconds gt Configures the CIST bridge forward delay parameter The forward delay parameter specifies the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the listening state to the learn ing state and from the learning state to the forwarding state The range is 4 to 30 seconds and the default is 15 seconds cur Displays the current CIST bridge configuration 224 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 12 mrst cist port lt port alias or number gt CIST Port Configuration CIST Port 1 Menu prior Set port Priority 0 240 cost Set port Path Cost 1 200000000 O for auto hello Set CIST port Hello Time 1 10 secs link Set MSTP link type auto p2p or shared default auto dg Enable disable edge port on Turn port s Spanning Tree ON off Turn port s Spanning Tree OFF cur Display current port Spanning Tree parameters CIST port parameters are used to modify MRST operation on an individual port basis CIST parameters do not affect operation of STP PVST For each port RSTP MSTP is turned on by default Table 6 36 CIST Port Configuration Menu Options cfg l2 mrst cist port Command Syntax and Usage prior lt 0 240 gt Configures the CIST port priority The port priority helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports connected
37. gt Configures a stub area to send a numeric metric value All routes received via that stub area carry the configured metric to potentially influencing routing decisions Metric value assigns the priority for choosing the switch for default route Metric type determines the method for influencing routing decisions for external routes auth none password md5 None No authentication required Password Authenticates simple passwords so that only trusted routing devices can participate MDS This parameter is used when MDS cryptographic authentication is required spf lt interval 0 255 gt Sets time interval between two successive SPF shortest path first calculations of the shortest path tree using the Dijkstra s algorithm 268 The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 68 Area Index Configuration Menu Options cfg l3 ospf aindex Command Syntax and Usage enable Enables the OSPF area disable Disables the OSPF area delete Deletes the OSPF area cur Displays the current OSPF configuration cfg 13 ospf range lt range number gt OSPF Summary Range Configuration OSPF Summary Range 1 Menu addr Set IP address mask Set IP mask aindex Set area index hide Enable disable hide range nabl Enable rang disable Disable range delet Delete rang cur Display current OSPF summary range configuration Table 6 69 OSPF Sum
38. gt Displays the ARP entries on a single VLAN dump Displays all ARP entries including m IP address and MAC address of each entry m Address status flag see below m The VLAN and port to which the address belongs m The ports which have referenced the address empty if no port has routed traffic to the IP address shown For more information see page 101 addr Displays the ARP address list IP address IP mask MAC address and VLAN flags 100 The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference info 13 arp dump Show All ARP Entry Information IP address Flags MAC address VLAN Port 47 80 22 1 00 e0 16 7c 28 86 1 INT6 47 80 23 243 P 00 03 42 fa 3b 30 I 47 80 23 245 00 c0 4f 60 3e cl 1 INT6 190 10 10 1 P 00 03 42 fa 3b 30 10 Note If you have VMA turned on the referenced port will be the designated port If you have VMA turned off the designated port will be the normal ingress port The Flag field is interpreted as follows Table 4 27 ARP Dump Flag Parameters Flag Description P Permanent entry created for switch IP interface R Indirect route entry U Unresolved ARP entry The MAC address has not been learned 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu 101 Alteon OS Command Reference info 13 arp addr ARP Address List Information IP address IP mask MAC address VLAN Flags 205 178 18 66 255 255 255 255 00 70 cf 03 20 04 P 205 178 50 1 255 29
39. including the number of new entries finds and unsuccessful searches FDB statistics are described in the following table Table 5 11 Forwarding Database Statistics stats fdb Statistic Description current Current number of entries in the Forwarding Database hiwat Highest number of entries recorded at any given time in the Forwarding Database 43W7774 May 2007 The Statistics Menu 137 Alteon OS Command Reference stats 12 lacp lt port alias or number gt LACP Statistics Port EXTI1 Valid LACPDUs received 870 Valid Marker PDUs received 0 Valid Marker Rsp PDUs received 0 Unknown version TLV type 0 Illegal subtype received 10 LACPDUs transmitted 6031 Marker PDUs transmitted 10 Marker Rsp PDUs transmitted 0 Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP statistics are described in the following table Table 5 12 LACP Statistics stats lacp Statistic Description Valid LACPDUs Total number of valid LACP data units received received Valid Marker PDUs Total number of valid LACP marker data units received received Valid Marker Rsp Total number of valid LACP marker response data units received PDUs received Unknown version TLV Total number of LACP data units with an unknown version or type type length and value TLV received Illegal subtype Total number of LACP data units with an illegal subtype received received LACPDUs transm
40. lt ip_address gt was blocked BGP Notification lt reason gt received from lt BGP peer ip_address gt BGP Session with lt BGP peer ip_address gt failed lt reason gt SFP Inserted at port EXT lt num gt is UNAPPROVED Port is DISABLED SFP Removed at port EXT lt num gt SFP Inserted at port EXT lt num gt 354 m Alteon OS Syslog Messages 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference LOG_CRITICAL SSH Can t allocate memory in load_MP_INT SSH Currently not enough resource for loading RSA private key SSH Currently not enough resource for loading RSA public key SYSTEM Temperature exceeds threshold SFP Failed to Read SFP ID for port EXT lt num gt SFP Failed to Select SFP for port EXT lt num gt ID SFP Voltage lt volt gt is UNDER Range on port EXT lt num gt Port is DISABLED SFP Voltage lt volt gt is OVER Range on port EXT lt num gt SFP Failed to Read SFP VoltagelTemperature for port EXT lt num gt SFP Failed to Select SFP for port EXT lt num gt voltageltemperature SFP Temperature lt temp gt is UNDERIOVER Range on port EXT lt num gt SFP Poll SFP Failed to get SFP Status SFP Inserted at port EXT lt num gt has I2C FAILURE Port is DISABLED SFP TX Fault on port EXT lt num gt Port is DISABLED 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Syslog Messages 355 Alteon OS Command Reference LOG_ERROR MGMT PANIC at lt file gt lt line gt in thread lt thread id gt MGMT VERIFY at lt file gt lt line gt in thread lt
41. pkt fmt Packet Format Filtering Configuration Filtering Packet Format Menu ethfmt Set to filter on ethernet format tagfmt Set to filter on ethernet tagging format ipfmt Set to filter on IP format reset Reset all fields cur Display current parameters This menu allows you to define Packet Format matching criteria for an ACL Table 6 111 ACL Packet Format Filtering Menu Options cfg acl acl x pktfmt Command Syntax and Usage ethfmt eth2 SNAP LLC Defines the Ethernet format for the ACL tagfmt none tagged Defines the tagging format for the ACL ipfmt none v4 v6 Defines the IP format for the ACL 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 317 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 111 ACL Packet Format Filtering Menu Options cfg acl acl x pktfmt Command Syntax and Usage reset Resets Packet Format parameters for the ACL to their default values cur Displays the current Packet Format parameters for the ACL cfg acl group lt ACL Group number gt ACL Group Configuration ACL Group 1 Menu add Add ACL to group rem Remove ACL from group cur Display current ACL items in group This menu allows you to compile one or more ACLs into an ACL Group Once you create an ACL Group you can assign the ACL Group to one or more ports Table 6 112 ACL Group Menu Options cfg acl group x Command Syntax and Usage add acl lt 896 gt Adds
42. switch but has only been seen as a destination address When an address is in the unknown state no outbound port is indicated although ports which reference the address as a destination will be listed under Reference ports If the state for the port is listed as an interface IF the MAC address is for a standard VRRP virtual router Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database To delete a MAC address from the forwarding database FDB or to clear the entire FDB refer to Forwarding Database Maintenance on page 343 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu E 77 Alteon OS Command Reference info 12 lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information LACP Menu aggr Show LACP aggregator information for the port port Show LACP port information dump Show all LACP ports information Use these commands to display Link Aggregation Protocol LACP status information about each port on the GbE Switch Module Table 4 14 LACP Menu Options info I2 lacp Command Syntax and Usage aggr Displays detailed information of the LACP aggregator used by the selected port port Displays LACP information about the selected port dump Displays a summary of LACP information For details see page 78 info 12 lacp dump Show all LACP Information port lacp adminkey operkey selected prio attached trunk aggr INT1 active 30 30 y 32768 17 19 INT2 active 30 30 y 32768 Ly 19 INT3 of
43. 0 1 gt lt 0 7 gt lt 0 15 gt Configures the weight of the selected Class of Service queue COSq Enter the queue number followed by the scheduling weight 0 15 numcos 2 8 Sets the number of Class of Service queues for switch ports The default value is 2 cur Displays the current 802 1p parameters 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 305 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg qos dscp DSCP Configuration dscp Menu dscp Remark DSCP value to a new DSCP value prio Remark DSCP value to a 802 1p priority on Globally turn DSCP remarking ON off Globally turn DSCP remarking OFF cur Display current DSCP remarking configuration Use this menu map the DiffServ Code Point DSCP value of incoming packets to a new value or to an 802 1p priority value Table 6 100 DSCP Menu Options cfg qos dscp Command Syntax and Usage dscp lt 0 63 gt lt 0 63 gt Maps the initial DiffServ Code Point DSCP value to a new value Enter the DSCP value 0 63 of incoming packets followed by the new value prio lt dscp 0 63 gt lt priority 0 7 gt Maps the DiffServ Code point value to an 802 1p priority value Enter the DSCP value followed by the corresponding 802 1p value on Turns on DSCP re marking globally off Turns off DSCP re marking globally cur Displays the current DSCP parameters 306 The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference
44. 168 10 10 2 Set the area where the new image will be loaded Set agTftpImage 0 image2 3 Set the name of the image Set agTftpImageFileName 0 MyNewImage 1 img 4 Initiate the transfer To transfer a switch image enter 2 gtimg Set agTftpAction 0 2 5 If you are using an FTP server enter a username Set agTftpUserName 0 MyName 6 If you are using an FTP server enter a password Set agTftpPassword 0 MyPassword 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS SNMP Agent m 369 Alteon OS Command Reference Loading a saved switch configuration To load a saved switch configuration with the name MyRunningConfig cfg into the switch follow the steps below This example assumes you have a TFTP server at 192 168 10 10 1 Set the FTP TFTP server address where the switch Configuration File resides Set agTftpServer 0 192 168 10 10 2 Set the name of the configuration file Set agTftpCfgFileName 0 MyRunningConfig cfg 3 Initiate the transfer To restore a running configuration enter 3 Set agTftpAction 0 3 4 If you are using an FTP server enter a username Set agTftpUserName 0 MyName 5 Ifyou are using an FTP server enter a password Set agTftpPassword 0 MyPassword Saving the switch configuration To save the switch configuration to a FTP TFTP server follow the steps below This example assumes you have a FTP TFTP server at 192 168 10 10 1 Set the FTP TFTP
45. 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 257 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 nwf Network Filter Configuration IP Network Filter 1 Menu addr IP Address mask IP Subnet mask nabl Enable Network Filter disable Disable Network Filter delet Delete Network Filter cur Display current Network Filter configuration Table 6 61 IP Network Filter Menu Options cfg I3 nwf Command Syntax and Usage addr lt IP address such as 192 4 17 44 gt Sets the starting IP address for this filter The default address is 0 0 0 0 mask lt subnet mask such as 255 255 255 0 gt Sets the IP subnet mask that is used with cfg 13 nwf addr to define the range of IP addresses that will be accepted by the peer when the filter is enabled The default value is 0 0 0 0 For Border Gateway Protocol BGP assign the network filter to a route map then assign the route map to the peer enable Enables the Network Filter configuration disable Disables the Network Filter configuration delete Deletes the Network Filter configuration cur Displays the current the Network Filter configuration 258 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 rmap lt route map number gt Routing Map Configuration NoTE The map number 1 32 represents the routing map you wish to configure IP Route Map 1 Menu alist Access Lis
46. 6 85 describes the commands used to configure advanced IGMP parameters Table 6 88 IGMP Advanced Menu Options cfg l3 igmp adv Command Syntax and Usage qinterval lt 600 gt Configures the interval for IGMP Query Reports The default value is 125 seconds robust lt 2 0 gt Configures the IGMP Robustness variable which allows you to tune the switch for expected packet loss on the subnet If the subnet is expected to be lossy high rate of packet loss increase the value The default value is 2 timeout lt 255 seconds gt Configures the timeout value for IGMP Membership Reports host Once the timeout value is reached the switch removes the host from its IGMP table if the conditions are met The range is from 1 to 255 seconds The default is 10 seconds fastlv lt VLAN number gt disable enable Enables or disables Fastleave processing Fastleave allows the switch to immediately remove a port from the IGMP port list if the host sends a Leave message and the proper conditions are met This command is disabled by default flood enable disable Configures the switch to flood unregistered IP multicast reports to all ports The default setting is enabled cur Displays the current IGMP Advanced parameters 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 291 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 dns Domain Name System Configuration Domain Name System Menu prima Set IP address of primary DNS server
47. 8014 STP turned off for this port Automatic path cost NoTE The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens displayed by your system Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu E 85 Alteon OS Command Reference The switch software uses the IEEE 802 1d Spanning Tree Protocol STP In addition to seeing if STG is enabled or disabled you can view the following STG bridge information E Priority H Hello interval E Maximum age value E Forwarding delay E Aging time You can also see the following port specific STG information E Slot number E Port alias and priority E Cost E State The following table describes the STG parameters Table 4 19 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Priority bridge The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the STG root bridge Hello The hello time parameter specifies in seconds how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit BPDU Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value MaxAge The maximum age parameter specifies in seconds the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigure the ST
48. Alteon OS enterprise MIB document GbESM 10U 2223 mib Users may specify up to two trap hosts for receiving SNMP Traps The agent will send the SNMP Trap to the specified hosts when appropriate Traps are not sent if there is no host spec ified Alteon OS SNMP agent supports the following standard MIBs rfc1213 mib rfcl1215 mib rfc1493 mib rfc1573 mib rfcl1643 mib rfc1757 mib rfc1907 mib rfc2037 mib rfc2571 mib rfc2572 mib rfc2573 mib rfc2574 mib rfc2575 mib rfc2576 mib 43W7774 May 2007 365 Alteon OS Command Reference Alteon OS SNMP agent supports the following generic traps as defined in RFC 1215 ColdStart WarmStart LinkDown LinkUp AuthenticationFailure The SNMP agent also supports two Spanning Tree traps as defined in RFC 1493 E NewRoot E TopologyChange The following are the enterprise SNMP traps supported in Alteon OS Table 9 10 Alteon OS Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps Trap Name Description altSwPrimaryPowerSupplyFailure altSwFanFailure altSswDefGwUp altSswDefGwDown altSwDefGwiInService altSwDefGwNotInService altSw VrrpNewMaster altSwVrrpNewBackup altSwVrrpAuthFailure altSwLoginFailure Signifies that the primary power supply failed Signifies that the fan has failed Signifies that the default gateway is alive Signifies that the default gateway is down Signifies that the default gateway is up and in service Signifies that the default gateway is ali
49. Command Reference LOG_INFO continued MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT SSH SSH SSH SSH SSH VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP 364 m Alteon OS Syslog Messages Unsupported GBIC refused Flash Write Error Failed to allocate buffer Quitting Flash Write Error Trying again Flash Write Error Failed to allocate buffer Quitting Flash Write Error FLASH ERROR invalid address used scp lt login_level gt login mn scp lt login_level gt lt connection closed idle time out logout gt Server key autogen starts Server key autogen completes Server key autogen timer timeouts Synchronizing to lt host gt Config Synchronization Transmit Successful New configuration validated New configuration applied New configuration did not save rc lt code gt New configuration saved Restoring Current Config Synchronizing from lt host gt Config Synchronization Receive Successful 43W7774 May 2007 Appendix B Alteon OS SNMP Agent The Alteon OS SNMP agent supports SNMP version 3 Security is provided through SNMP community strings The default community strings are public for SNMP GET operation and private for SNMP SET operation The community string can be modified only through the Command Line Interface CLI Alteon WebSystems is registered as Vendor 1872 Detailed SNMP MIBs and trap definitions of the Alteon OS SNMP agent are contained in the following
50. Deletes the notify table entry cur Displays the current notify table configuration 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu 201 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg sys access System Access Configuration System Access Menu mgmt anagement Network Definition Menu user User Access Control Menu passwords http Enable disable HTTP Web access https HTTPS Web Access Menu wport Set HTTP Web server port number snmp Set SNMP access control userbbi Enable disable user configuration from BBI tnet Enable disable Telnet access tnport Set Telnet server port number tport Set the TFTP port for the system cur Display current system access configuration Table 6 19 System Access Menu Options cfg sys access Command Syntax and Usage mgmt Displays the Management Configuration Menu To view menu options see page 204 user Displays the User Access Control Menu To view menu options see page 205 http disable enable Enables or disables HTTP Web access to the Browser Based Interface It is enabled by default https Displays the HTTPS Menu To view menu options see page 208 wport lt TCP port number 1 65535 gt Sets the switch port used for serving switch Web content The default is HTTP port 80 If Global Server Load Balancing is to be used set this to a different port such as 8080 snmp disable read only read write Disables or provides read only writ
51. Designated Bridge Designated Port The identifier of the port on the Designated Bridge to which this port is con nected 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu E 87 Alteon OS Command Reference info 12 stg RSTP MSTP Information Spanning Tree Group 1 On RSTP VLANs 1 Current Root Path Cost Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel 8000 00 11 58 ae 39 00 0 EXT4 2 20 15 Parameters Priority Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging 32768 2 20 15 300 Port Prio Cost State Role Designated Bridge Des Port Type NT1 0 0 DSB NT2 0 QO DSB NT3 0 0 FWD NT4 0 0 DSB NT5 0 0 DSB NT6 0 0 DSB NT7 0 0 DSB NT8 0 0 DSB NT9 0 0 DSB NT10 0 0 DSB NT11 0 0 DSB NT12 0 0 DSB NT13 0 0 DSB NT14 0 QO DSB EXT1 128 2000 FWD DESG 8000 00 11 58 ae 39 00 8011 P2P EXT2 128 2000 DISC BKUP 8000 00 11 58 ae 39 00 8011 P2P EXT3 128 2000 FWD DESG 8000 00 11 58 ae 39 00 8013 P2P EXT4 128 20000 DISC BKUP 8000 00 11 58 ae 39 00 8013 Shared STP turned off for this port NoTE The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens displayed by your system Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed The switch software can be set to use the IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP or the IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP If RSTP MSTP is turned on see page 221 y
52. Enables or disables the BOOTP relay on this interface It is enabled by default ena Enables this IP interface dis Disables this IP interface 250 The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 54 IP Interface Menu Options cfg I3 if Command Syntax and Usage del Removes this IP interface cur Displays the current interface settings cfg 13 gw lt gateway number gt Default Gateway Configuration Default gateway 1 Menu addr Set IP address intr Set interval between ping attempts retry Set number of failed attempts to declare gateway DOWN arp Enable disable ARP only health checks ena Enable default gateway dis Disable default gateway del Delete default gateway cur Display current default gateway configuration NoTE The switch can be configured with up to 5 gateways Gateway 5 is reserved for the management VLAN 4095 This option is disabled by default Table 6 55 Default Gateway Menu Options cfg I3 gw Command Syntax and Usage addr lt default gateway address such as 192 4 17 44 gt Configures the IP address of the default IP gateway using dotted decimal notation intr lt 0 60 seconds gt The switch pings the default gateway to verify that it s up The int r option sets the time between health checks The range is from 0 to 60 seconds The default is 2 seconds retry lt number of attempt
53. Enter the name of the switch software to be replaced Enter name of switch software image to be replaced imagel image2 boot lt image gt 3 Enter the hostname or IP address of the FTP or TFTP server Enter hostname or IP address of FIP TFIP server lt name or IP address gt 4 Enter the name of the new software file on the server Enter name of file on FTP TFTP server lt filename gt The exact form of the name will vary by server However the file location is normally relative to the FTP or TFTP directory usually t ftpboot 5 Enter your username for the server if applicable Enter username for FTP server or hit return for TFTP server lt username gt or lt Enter gt 43W7774 May 2007 The Boot Options Menu E 333 Alteon OS Command Reference 6 The system prompts you to confirm your request You should next select a software image to run as described below Selecting a Software Image to Run You can select which software image image1 or image2 you want to run in switch mem ory for the next reboot 1 Atthe Boot Options prompt enter Boot Options image 2 Enter the name of the image you want the switch to use upon the next boot The system informs you of which image is currently set to be loaded at the next reset and prompts you to enter a new choice Currently set to use switch software imagel on next reset Speci
54. For more information on con figuring VLANs see Setup Part 3 VLANs on page 38 By default the VLAN menu option is disabled except VLAN 1 which is enabled all the time Internal server ports INTx and external ports EXTx are in VLAN 1 by default Up to 1024 VLANs can be configured on the GbESM Table 6 50 VLAN Configuration Menu Options cfg l2 vlan Command Syntax and Usage pvlan lt S gt Displays the Protocol based VLAN menu To view menu options see page 245 privlan Displays the Private VLAN menu To view menu options see page 247 name Assigns a name to the VLAN or changes the existing name The default VLAN name is the first one stg lt Spanning Tree Group index 1 128 gt Assigns a VLAN to a Spanning Tree Group add lt port alias or number gt Adds port s to the VLAN membership rem lt port alias or number gt Removes port s from this VLAN 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 243 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 50 VLAN Configuration Menu Options cfg l2 vlan Command Syntax and Usage def lt list of port numbers gt Defines which ports are members of this VLAN Every port must be a member of at least one VLAN By default internal server ports INTx and external ports EXTx are in VLAN 1 ena Enables this VLAN dis Disables this VLAN without removing it from the configuration del Deletes this VLAN cur Displays the
55. I3 bgp peer Command Syntax and Usage redist Displays BGP Redistribution Menu To view the menu options see page 280 addr lt P address such as 192 4 17 101 gt Defines the IP address for the specified peer border router using dotted decimal notation The default address is 0 0 0 0 ras lt AS number 0 65535 gt Sets the remote autonomous system number for the specified peer hold lt hold time 0 3 65535 gt Sets the period of time in seconds that will elapse before the peer session is torn down because the switch hasn t received a keep alive message from the peer The default value is 180 seconds alive lt keepalive time 0 1 21845 gt Sets the keep alive time for the specified peer in seconds The default value is 60 seconds 278 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 76 BGP Peer Configuration Menu Options cfg l3 bgp peer Command Syntax and Usage advert lt min adv time 1 65535 gt Sets time in seconds between advertisements retry lt connect retry interval 1 65535 gt Sets connection retry interval in seconds orig lt min orig time 1 65535 gt Sets the minimum time between route originations in seconds ttl lt number of router hops 1 255 gt Time to live TTL is a value in an IP packet that tells a network router whether or not the packet has been in the network too long and should be discarded TTL s
56. LOG_INFO and LOG_DEBUG E lt Thread ID gt This is the software thread that reports the log message The following thread IDs are recorded stg ip console telnet vrrp system web server ssh and bgp E lt Message gt The log message Following is a list of potential syslog messages To keep this list as short as possible only lt Thread ID gt and lt Message gt are shown The messages are sorted by lt Log Label gt Where the lt Thread ID gt is listed as mgmt one of the following may be shown console telnet web server or ssh LOG_WARNING FILTER filter lt filter number gt fired on port lt port number gt lt source IP address gt gt lt desti nation IP address gt lt ICMP type gt lt IP protocol gt lt TCP flags gt 43W7774 May 2007 353 Alteon OS Command Reference LOG_ALERT STP Own BPDU received from port lt port_id gt STP STG lt stg gt topology change detected STP CIST topology change detected STP STG lt stg gt new root bridge STP CIST new root bridge IP Cannot contact default gateway lt ip_address gt VRRP Received errored advertisement from lt ip_address gt VRRP Received incorrect password from lt ip_address gt VRRP Received incorrect addresses from lt ip_address gt VRRP Received incorrect advertisement interval lt seconds gt from lt ip_address gt VRRP Synchronization from non configured peer lt ip_address gt VRRP Synchronization from non configured peer
57. Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of the user You need access control when you have to process retrieval or modification request from an SNMP entity To view menu options see page 195 group lt vacmSecurityToGroup number 1 16 gt A group maps the user name to the access group names and their access rights needed to access SNMP management objects A group defines the access rights assigned to all names that belong to a particular group To view menu options see page 197 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu 191 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 10 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu Options cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 comm lt snmpCommunity number 1 16 gt The community table contains objects for mapping community strings and version independent SNMP message parameters To view menu options see page 198 taddr lt snmpTargetAddr number 1 16 gt This command allows you to configure destination information consisting of a transport domain and a transport address This is also termed as transport endpoint The SNMP MIB provides a mechanism for performing source address validation on incoming requests and for selecting com munity strings based on target addresses for outgoing notifications To view menu options see page 199 tparam lt target params index 1 16 gt This command allows you to configure SNMP parameters consisting of message processing model securi
58. NULL at end Enter each port by port number or port alias and confirm placement of the port into this VLAN When you are finished adding ports to this VLAN press lt Enter gt without specifying any port 4 Configure Spanning Tree Group membership for the VLAN Spanning Tree Group membership Current Spanning Tree Group index 1 Enter new Spanning Tree Group index 1 127 5 The system prompts you to configure the next VLAN VLAN Config Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4094 NULL at end 38 First Time Configuration 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Repeat the steps in this section until all VLANs have been configured When all VLANs have been configured press lt Enter gt without specifying any VLAN Setup Part 4 IP Configuration The system prompts for IP parameters IP Interfaces IP interfaces are used for defining subnets to which the switch belongs Up to 128 IP interfaces can be configured on the GbE Switch Module The IP address assigned to each IP interface provide the switch with an IP presence on your network No two IP interfaces can be on the same IP subnet The interfaces can be used for connecting to the switch for remote configuration and for routing between subnets and VLANs if used 1 Select the IP interface to configure or skip interface configuration at the prompt IP Config IP interfaces Enter interface number 1 128 If
59. RSA server key scpadm Set the administration password for SCP access hkeygen Generate the RSA host key skeygen Generate the RSA server key sshport lt TCP port number gt Sets the SSH server port number ena Enables the SCP apply and save dis Disables the SCP apply and save on Enables the SSH server 178 The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 4 System Configuration Menu Options cfg sys sshd Command Syntax and Usage off Disables the SSH server cur Displays the current SSH server configuration 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 179 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg sys radius RADIUS Server Configuration RADIUS Server Menu prisrv Set primary RADIUS server address secsrv Set secondary RADIUS server address secret Set RADIUS secret secret2 Set secondary RADIUS server secret port Set RADIUS port retries Set RADIUS server retries timeout Set RADIUS server timeout telnet Enable or disable RADIUS backdoor for telnet on Turn RADIUS authentication ON off Turn RADIUS authentication OFF cur Display current RADIUS configuration Table 6 5 System Configuration Menu Options cfg sys radius Command Syntax and Usage prisrv lt P address gt Sets the primary RADIUS server address secsrv lt P address gt Sets the secondary RADIUS server addres
60. Usage dbsumm Displays the following information about the LS database in a table format a the number of LSAs of each type in each area b the total number of LSAs for each area c the total number of LSAs for each LSA type for all areas combined d the total number of LSAs for all LSA types for all areas combined No parameters are required ext lt adv rtr A B C D gt lt link_state_id A B C D gt lt self gt Displays the AS external type 5 LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum nw lt adv rtr A B C D gt lt link_state_id A B C D gt lt self gt Displays the network type 2 LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSA network LS database The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum nssa lt adv rtr A B C D gt lt link_state_id A B C D gt lt self gt Displays the NSSA type 7 LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum rtr lt adv rtr A B C D gt lt link_state_id A B C D gt lt self gt Displays the router type 1 LSAs with detailed information of each field of the LSAs The usage of this command is the same as the usage of the command asbrsum self Displays all the self advertised LSAs No parameters are required summ lt advy rtr A B C D gt
61. VRRP Virtual Router Menu Options cfg l3 vrrp vr Command Syntax and Usage if lt interface number 1 127 gt Selects a switch IP interface If the IP interface has the same IP address as the addr option above this switch is considered the owner of the defined virtual router An owner has a special priority of 255 highest and will always assume the role of master router even if it must preempt another virtual router which has assumed master routing authority This preemption occurs even if the preem option below is disabled The default value is 1 prio lt priority 1 254 gt Defines the election priority bias for this virtual server This can be any integer between 1 and 254 The default value is 100 During the master router election process the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins If there is a tie the device with the highest IP interface address wins If this virtual router s IP address addr is the same as the one used by the IP interface the priority for this vir tual router will automatically be set to 255 highest When priority tracking is used cf g 13 vrrp track or cfg 13 vrrp vr track this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational cri teria adver lt seconds 1 255 gt Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds The default value is 1
62. WIA ING sacecentoes cn ececaisecuacscssecencuevsteexsentesenine 301 active switch configuration PEATE AE E A E PICS asis restoring active switch saving and loading configuration 322 addr P route tap oncore i riena 99 administrator ACCOUNL ccccccssececeececeeeeeeeeees 27 32 admpw system Option eeesseeesseeeeseeeeeeeeers 205 aging STP bridge Option eeeeseeeseeeeesseeeeenees 230 STP information ccccssesssessseeeeeeeeees 86 89 apply global command esseeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeees 174 applying configuration Changes ceseeeeeeees 174 autoconfiguration Tink EE E E EEEE E ee eevee 37 auto negotiation enable disable on Port eeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 211 setup 43W7774 May 2007 autonomous system filter path action AS vee aspath B backup configuration block seeeeeeeeees 174 336 banner system option essceessseeeseeeeeeseeeeees 176 IP address border router cccceeeeeeeseeeee 278 IP ro te tagiin ree An keep alive time remote autOnOMOUS SySteM ssessseseeseresee e 278 TOUtEr HOPS sesissevessssdssdss sossdecdasssssasecasessvstns BLOCKING port state esesesesenneeenrerrrsesrssssseee boot Options MENU cesses eeeeeeeeeees bootstrap protocol Border Gateway Protocol configurato espresioen nensi ots kessieri Border Gateway Protocol BGP operations level options c
63. Weight Displays the scheduling weight 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu E 117 Alteon OS Command Reference info acl Access Control List Information Current ACL information Filter 2 profile Ethernet VID 2 0xffft eter Set to disabled Set committed rate 64 Set max burst size 32 Re Mark Set use of TOS precedence to disabled Actions Permit No ACL groups configured Access Control List ACL information includes configuration settings for each ACL and ACL Group Table 4 37 ACL Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Filter x profile Indicates the ACL number Meter Displays the ACL meter parameters Re Mark Displays the ACL re mark parameters Actions Displays the configured action for the ACL 118 The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 info link Link Status Information Alteon OS Command Reference Alias Port Speed Duplex Flow Ctrl Link TX RX INTL 1 1000 ful yes yes up INT2 2 1000 ful yes yes up INT3 3 1000 ful yes yes up INT4 4 1000 ful yes yes up INT5 5 1000 ful yes yes down INT6 6 1000 ful yes yes up INT7 7 1000 ful yes yes up INT8 8 1000 ful yes yes up INT9 9 1000 ful yes yes up INT10 10 1000 ful yes yes up INT11 11 1000 ful yes yes up INT12 12 1000 f l yes yes up INT13 13 1000 ful yes yes up INT14 14 1000 ful yes yes up GT 15 100 full yes yes up EXT1 17 10000 any yes yes up EXT2
64. and automatically reboot To select panic at the Maintenance prompt enter gt gt Maintenance panic A FLASH dump already exists Confirm replacing existing dump and reboot y n Enter y to confirm the command Confirm dump and reboot y n y The following messages are displayed Starting system dump done Rebooted because of PANIC command Booting complete 0 01 01 Tue Mar 14 2007 Version 1 1 0 from FLASH imagel active config block No POST errors Oxff Production Mode Unscheduled System Dumps If there is an unscheduled system dump to flash memory the following message is displayed when you log on to the switch Note A system dump exists in FLASH The dump was saved at 13 43 22 Tuesday March 14 2007 Use maint uudmp to extract the dump for analysis and maint cldmp to clear the FLASH region The region must be cleared before another dump can be saved 352 m The Maintenance Menu 43W7774 May 2007 APPENDIX A Alteon OS Syslog Messages The following syntax is used when outputting syslog messages lt Time stamp gt lt Log Label gt Web OS lt Thread ID gt lt Message gt where E lt Timestamp gt The time of the message event is displayed in month day hour minute second format For example Aug 19 14 20 30 E lt Log Label gt The following types of log messages are recorded LOG_EMERG LOG_ALERT LOG_CRIT LOG_ERR LOG_WARNING LOG_NOTICE
65. anias 26 PING APE E A teenie E T poisoned reverse as used with split horizon port configuration seseseeeeesessesesesesesesesrseresees port flow control See flow control Index 5 Alteon OS Command Reference Port Menu configuration Options ceeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeee 209 configuring Gigabit Ethernet gig 209 port mirroring CONFIPUTALION ceessecesvecnsctessteessncessouestecersoess 319 Port number port speed port states UNK unknown cc cececeececeeeesesesesessersneees 71 port trunking d scripthO sier irinen a Ansin e i Es 235 port trunking configuration eeseeeeeeeeseeeereeeeeee 235 ports ConfigUr tiON iseeirssiresiinerrirees ioter stet ere essence disabling temporarily WAFOTMAWON oense seseo irris a E IP Status a E membership of the VLAN ssseseeeeceeseeene 75 94 Somo ni a AE E E 86 92 STP port priority eeeeeeeseeeeeeeerrrerrerereeerree 231 NEAN UD Ss creena eneee o e Ee RE EIEE 57 120 preemption assuming VRRP master routing authority 298 virtual router ssssesssososoeseoeoree re reseee 297 300 priority Virtual TOUET osseedid 300 priority STP port option eseeesseeeeeeeeereesrreerreee 231 prisrv primary radius Server e eeeeseeerreeerrereeeere 180 P ivate VLAN seteiare esineen roie i sarien Eei 247 ptcfg TFTP save command esseeeeseeeereerreeeeree 322 PVID port VLAN ID ccsssescsseeesssecesseess
66. as User Operator and Administrator with User being the most restricted level name lt 1 8 characters gt Defines the user name of maximum eight characters pswd lt J 15 characters gt Sets the user password of up to 15 characters maximum ena Enables the user ID dis Disables the user ID del Deletes the user ID cur Displays the current user ID configuration 206 The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg sys access user strongpw Strong Password Configuration Strong Pwd Menu ena Enable usage of strong passwords dis Disable usage of strong passwords expiry Set password validity warning Set warning days before pswd expiry faillog Set number of failed logins for security notification cur Display current strong password configuration Table 6 23 Strong Password Menu Options cfg sys access user strongpw Command Syntax and Usage ena Enables Strong Password requirement dis Disables Strong Password requirement expiry lt 1 365 gt Configures the number of days allowed before the password must be changed warning lt 1 365 gt Configures the number of days before password expiration that a warning is issued to users faillog lt 1 255 gt Configures the number of failed login attempts allowed before a security notification is logged cur Displays the current Strong Password configuration
67. be sent without authen tication and without using a privacy protocol The level aut hNoPriv means that the SNMP mes sage will be sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol The authPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent both with authentication and using a privacy protocol del Deletes the target ParamsTable entry cur Displays the current targetParamsTab1le configuration 200 The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 notify SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration SNMPv3 uses Notification Originator to send out traps A notification typically monitors a system for particular events or conditions and generates Notification Class messages based on these events or con ditions SNMPv3 snmpNotifyTable 1 Menu name Set notify name tag Set notify tag del Delete notifyTable entry cur Display current notifyTable configuration Table 6 18 Notify Table Menu Options cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 notify Command Syntax and Usage name lt 32 character name gt Defines a locally arbitrary but unique identifier associated with this SNMP notify entry tag lt list of tag string max 255 characters gt Allows you to configure a tag of 255 characters maximum that contains a tag value which is used to select entries in the Target Address Table Any entry in the snmpTargetAddrTab1le that matches the value of this tag is selected del
68. contains parameters that are used to generate a message The param eters include the message processing model for example SNMPv3 SNMPv2c SNMPv1 the security model for example USM the security name and the security level noAuthno Priv authNoPriv or authPriv SNMPv3 snmpTargetParamsTable 1 Menu nam Set target params name mpmodel Set message processing model model Set security model uname Set USM user name level Set minimum level of security del Delete targetParamsTable entry cur Display current targetParamsTable configuration Table 6 17 Target Parameters Table Configuration Menu Options cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 tparam Command Syntax and Usage name lt 32 character name gt Allows you to configure the locally arbitrary but unique identifier that is associated with this entry mpmodel snmpv1 snmpv2c snmpv3 Allows you to configure the message processing model that is used to generate SNMP messages model usm snmpv1 snmpv2 Allows you to select the security model to be used when generating the SNMP messages uname lt 32 character name gt Defines the name that identifies the user in the USM table page 193 on whose behalf the SNMP messages are generated using this entry level noAuthNoPriv authNoPriv authPriv Allows you to select the level of security to be used when generating the SNMP messages using this entry The level noAut hNoPriv means that the SNMP message will
69. host Command Syntax and Usage delete Deletes OSPF host entry cur Displays the current OSPF host entries cfg 13 ospf redist fixed static rip lebgp ibgp OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration OSPF Redistribute Fixed Menu add Add rmap into route redistribution list rem Remove rmap from route redistribution list export Export all routes of this protocol cur Display current route maps added Table 6 73 OSPF Route Redistribution Menu Options cfg l3 ospf redist Command Syntax and Usage add lt route map 1 32 gt lt route map 1 32 gt lall Adds selected routing maps to the rmap list To add all the 32 route maps enter a11 To add spe cific route maps enter routing map numbers one per line NULL at the end This option adds a route map to the route redistribution list The routes of the redistribution proto col matched by the route maps in the route redistribution list will be redistributed rem lt route map 1 32 gt lt route map 1 32 gt la11 Removes the route map from the route redistribution list Removes routing maps from the rmap list To remove all 32 route maps enter al 1 To remove specific route maps enter routing map numbers one per line NULL at end export lt metric 1 16777214 gt lt metric type 1 2 gt none Exports the routes of this protocol as external OSPF AS external LSAs in which the metric and metric type are specified To remove a
70. it should be placed either into imagel image2 or boot For example if your active image is currently loaded into image1 you would probably load the new image software into image2 This lets you test the new software and reload the origi nal active image stored in image1 if needed Using the BBI You can use the Browser Based Interface to load software onto the GbESM The software image to load can reside in one of the following locations E FTP server E TFTP server E Local computer After you log onto the BBI perform the following steps to load a software image 1 Click the Configure context button in the toolbar 2 In the Navigation Window select System gt Config Image Control 43W7774 May 2007 The Boot Options Menu E 331 Alteon OS Command Reference The Switch Image and Configuration Management page appears Switch Image and Configuration Management Image 1 Version version 1 1 0 downloaded 0 07 04 Thu Jan 1 2005 Image 2 Version version 1 1 2 downloaded 0 07 45 Thu Jan 1 2005 Boot Version version 1 1 0 Active Image Version 1O Next Boot Image Selection image 2 Active Configuration Block active config Next Boot Configuration Block Selection active config FIP TFTP Settings Hostname or IP Address of FTP TFTP server foot 0 20 1 Username for FTP Server or Blank for TFTP Server Password for FTP Server Image Settings Image for Transfer image 2 Image Filename on
71. level pvid lt VLAN number 1 4095 gt Sets the default VLAN number which will be used to forward frames which are not VLAN tagged The default number is 1 for non management ports name lt 64 character string gt none Sets a name for the port The assigned port name appears next to the port number on some infor mation and statistics screens The default is set to None dscpmark Enables or disables DSCP re marking on a port 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 209 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 25 Port Configuration Menu cfg port Command Syntax and Usage learn disable enable Enables or disables FDB learning on the port tag disable enable Disables or enables VLAN tagging for this port It is disabled by default tagpvid disable enable Disables or enables VLAN tag persistence When disabled the VLAN tag is removed from pack ets whose VLAN tag matches the port PVID The default value is disabled for INT and EXT ports and enabled for MGT ports fastfwd disable enable Disables or enables Port Fast Forwarding which permits a port that participates in Spanning Tree to bypass the Listening and Learning states and enter directly into the Forwarding state While in the Forwarding state the port listens to the BPDUs to learn if there is a loop and if dictated by normal STG behavior following priorities etc the port transitions into the Blocking state This feature permits the GbES
72. on the I O Module Tasks menu on the left side of the BladeCenter Management Module window See Figure 1 1 43W7774 May 2007 The Command Line Interface E 21 Alteon OS Command Reference Bay 2 WMN315633849 User USERID Monitors A System Status Event Log LEDs Fuel Gauge Hardware VPD Firmware VPD Blade Tasks Power Restart On Demand Remote Control Firmware Update Configuration Serial Ov Firm MM Control General Settings Login Profiles Alerts Port Assignments Network Interfaces Network Protocols Security e Update a ik ZZ BladeCenter Management Module server b A I O Module Configuration Use the following links to jump down to different sections on this page Bay 1 Bay 2 Bay 3 Bay 4 Bay 1 Ethernet SM Current IP Configuration Configuration method Static IP address 192 168 70 127 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway address 0 0 0 0 New Static IP Configuration Status Enabled To change the IP configuration for this switch module fill in the following fields and click Save This will save and enable the new IP configuration IP address 192 168 70 127 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 o Gateway address 0 0 0 0 E Advanced Configuration g Figure 1 1 Switch management on the BladeCenter management module You can use the default IP addresses provided by the management module or you can assign a new IP address to the switch module through the management module You can assign this IP addr
73. override the settings in the Configuration menu Therefore set tings you view in the Configuration menu for example port status might differ from run time information that you view in the Information menu or on the management module The Infor mation menu displays current run time information of switch parameters While configuration changes are in the pending state you can do the following E View the pending changes m Apply the pending changes E Save the changes to flash memory Viewing Pending Changes You can view all pending configuration changes by entering diff at the menu prompt NoTE The diff command is a global command Therefore you can enter diff at any prompt in the CLI 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 173 Alteon OS Command Reference Applying Pending Changes To make your configuration changes active you must apply them To apply configuration changes enter apply at any prompt in the CLI apply NoTE The apply command is a global command Therefore you can enter apply at any prompt in the administrative interface Saving the Configuration In addition to applying the configuration changes you can save them to flash memory on the GbE Switch Module Norte If you do not save the changes they will be lost the next time the system is rebooted To save the new configuration enter the following command at any CLI prompt save When you s
74. port cur Display current GVRP port parameters Use the following commands to configure GVRP settings for the port Table 6 41 GVRP Port Menu Options cfg l2 gvrp port x Command Syntax and Usage setreg normal block Configures GPDU learning for the port s GVRP registrar as follows m Normal The registrar listens for GPDUs and learns GVRP attributes from other devices on the network m Block The registrar does not listen for GPDUs from other devices setapp normal block Configures GPDU sending for the port s GVRP applicant as follows m Normal The applicant sends GPDUs to other devices on the network m Block The applicant does not send GPDUs to other devices ena Enables GVRP on the port dis Disables GVRP on the port cur Display current GVRP port configuration 234 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 12 trunk lt trunk group number gt Trunk Configuration Trunk group 1 Menu add Add port to trunk group rem Remove port from trunk group ena Enable trunk group dis Disable trunk group del Delete trunk group c r Display current Trunk Group configuration Trunk groups can provide super bandwidth connections between GbE Switch Modules or other trunk capable devices A trunk is a group of ports that act together combining their bandwidth to create a single larger port Up to 11 trunk groups can be
75. prevent their continued processing but which were discarded for example for lack of buffer space Note that this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re assembly stats port lt port alias or number gt link Link Statistics This menu enables you to display the link statistics of the selected port Link statistics for port INTL linkStateChange 1 Table 5 9 Link Statistics stats port link Statistics Description linkStateChange The total number of link state changes 136 The Statistics Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference stats 12 Layer 2 Statistics Layer 2 Statistics Menu fdb Show FDB stats lacp Show LACP stats gvrp GVRP statistics The Layer 2 statistics provided by each menu option are briefly described in Table 5 10 with pointers to detailed information Table 5 10 Layer 2 Statistics Menu Options stats I2 Command Syntax and Usage fdb Displays FDB statistics See page 137 for sample output lacp lt port alias or number gt Displays Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP statistics See page 138 for sample output gvrp Displays Generic VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP statistics See page 139 for sample output stats 12 db FDB Statistics FDB statistics current 83 hiwat 855 This menu option enables you to display statistics regarding the use of the forwarding data base
76. secon Set IP address of secondary DNS server dname Set default domain name cur Display current DNS configuration The Domain Name System DNS Menu is used for defining the primary and secondary DNS servers on your local network and for setting the default domain name served by the switch services DNS parameters must be configured prior to using hostname parameters with the ping traceroute and tftp commands Table 6 89 Domain Name Service Menu Options cfg l3 dns Command Syntax and Usage prima lt JP address such as 192 4 17 101 gt You will be prompted to set the IP address for your primary DNS server Use dotted decimal nota tion secon lt P address such as 192 4 17 101 gt You will be prompted to set the IP address for your secondary DNS server If the primary DNS server fails the configured secondary will be used instead Enter the IP address using dotted deci mal notation dname lt dotted DNS notation gt none Sets the default domain name used by the switch For example mycompany com cur Displays the current Domain Name System settings 292 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 cfg 13 bootp Alteon OS Command Reference Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration addr addr2 on off cur Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu Set IP address of BOOTP server Set IP address of second BOOTP server Globally turn BOOTP relay ON Globally turn BOOTP re
77. see page 110 dump lt interface number or zero for all IFs gt Displays RIP user s configuration For more information see page 110 info 13 rip routes RIP Routes Information gt gt IP Routing info 13 rip routes 3 0 0 0 8 via 30 1 1 11 metric 4 4 0 0 0 16 via 30 1 1 11 metric 16 10 0 0 0 8 via 30 1 1 2 metric 3 20 0 0 0 8 via 30 1 1 2 metric 2 This table contains all dynamic routes learnt through RIP including the routes that are under going garbage collection with metric 16 This table does not contain directly connected routes and locally configured static routes info 13 rip dump lt interface number gt Show RIP User Configuration RIP USER CONFIGURATION RIP on updat 30 RIP Interface 2 102 1 1 1 enabled version 2 listen enabled supply enabled default none poison disabled trigg enabled mcast enabled metric 1 auth none key none RIP Interface 3 103 1 1 1 enabled version 2 listen enabled supply enabled default none poison disabled trigg enabled mcast enabled metric 1 110 The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference info 13 ip IP Information 1 10 128 10 Default 13 10 Current 0 0 0 Current abled Current none Current IP information AS number 0 Interface information 200 30 3 255 255 00 10 200 255 255 vlan 1 up 90 90 97 255 255 295 0 10 90 90 255 vlan 4095 up gateway information metric s
78. the RST flag 150 The Statistics Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference stats 13 udp UDP Statistics UDP statistics udpInDatagrams 54 udpOutDatagrams 43 udpiInErrors 0 udpNoPorts 1578077 Table 5 21 UDP Statistics stats I3 udp Statistics Description udpInDatagrams The total number of UDP datagrams delivered to the switch udpOutDatagrams The total number of UDP datagrams sent from this entity the switch udpInErrors The number of received UDP datagrams that could not be delivered for reasons other than the lack of an application at the destination port udpNoPorts The total number of received UDP datagrams for which there was no application at the destination port 43W7774 May 2007 The Statistics Menu E 151 Alteon OS Command Reference stats 13 igmp lt VLAN number gt IGMP Statistics IGMP Snoop vlan 2 statistics rxIgmpValidPkts 0 rxIgmpInvalidPkts 0 rxIgmpGenQueries 0 rxIgmpGrpSpecificQueries 0 rxIgmpGroupSrcSpecificQueries 0 rxIgmpLeaves 0 rxIgmpReports 0 txIgmpReports 0 txIgmpGrpSpecificQueries 0 txIgmpLeaves 0 rxIgmpV3CurrentStateRecords 0 rxIgmpV3SourceListChangeRecords 0 rxIgmpV3FilterChangeRecords 0 This menu option displays statistics about the use of the IGMP Multicast Groups IGMP statistics are described in the following table Table 5 22 IGMP Statistics stats I3 igmp Statistic Description rxIgmpValidPkt
79. the packet buffer pool by the TCP IP protocol stack frees Total number of times the packet buffers are freed released to the packet buffer pool by the TCP IP protocol stack mediums Total number of packet allocations with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP IP protocol stack mediums hi water mark The highest number of packet allocation with size between 128 to 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP IP protocol stack jumbos Total number of packet allocations with more than 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP IP protocol stack jumbos hi watermark The highest number of packet allocation with more than 1536 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP IP protocol stack smalls Total number of packet allocations with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP IP protocol stack smalls hi watermark The highest number of packet allocation with size less than 128 bytes from the packet buffer pool by the TCP IP protocol stack failures Total number of packet allocation failures from the packet buffer pool by the TCP IP protocol stack 43W7774 May 2007 The Statistics Menu E 161 Alteon OS Command Reference stats mp tcb TCP Statistics All TCP allocated control blocks 10ad4le8 0 0 0 0 0 lt gt 0 0 0 0 80 listen 10ad5790 47 81 27 5 1171 lt gt 47 80 23 243 23 established Table 5 28 MP Speci
80. their physical addresses ARP also maintains IP to physical address pairs in its cache memory In any IP communication the ARP cache is consulted to see if the IP address of the computer or the router is present in the ARP cache Then the corresponding physical address is used to send a packet ARP Menu static Static ARP Menu rearp Set re ARP period in minutes cur Display current ARP configuration Table 6 58 ARP Configuration Menu Options cfg I3 arp Command Syntax and Usage static Displays Static ARP menu To view options see page 256 rearp lt 2 120 minutes gt Defines re ARP period in minutes You can set this duration between two and 120 minutes cur Displays the current ARP configurations 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 255 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 arp static ARP Static Configuration Static ARP entries are permanent in the ARP cache and do not age out like the ARP entries that are learnt dynamically Static ARP entries enable the switch to reach the hosts without sending an ARP broadcast request to the network Static ARPs are also useful to communicate with devices that do not respond to ARP requests Static ARPs can also be configured on some gate ways as a protection against malicious ARP Cache corruption and possible DOS attacks Static ARP Menu add Add a permanent ARP entry del Delete an ARP entry clear Clear static ARP entries cur Di
81. this counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re assembly 43W7774 May 2007 The Statistics Menu 143 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 5 15 IP Statistics stats l3 ip Statistics Description ipInDelivers The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user protocols including ICMP ipOutRequests The total number of IP datagrams which local IP user protocols includ ing ICMP supplied to IP in requests for transmission Note that this counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams ipOutDiscards The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination but which were discarded for example for lack of buffer space Note that this counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this discretionary discard criterion ipOutNoRoutes The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination Note that this counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagrams which meet this no route crite rion Note that this includes any datagrams which a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down ipReasmReqds The number of IP fragments received which needed to be reassembled at this entity the switch ipReasmOKs The number of IP datagrams successfully re assembled
82. thread id gt MGMT ASSERT at lt file gt lt line gt in thread lt thread id gt NTP Cannot contact lt primarylsecondary gt NTP server lt ip_address gt NTP Unable to listen to NTP port STP Error Error writing STG config to FLASH STP Error Error writing config to FLASH MGMT Apply not done MGMT Save not done MGMT lt applylsaveldiff gt is issued by another user Try later CLI Error Error writing s config to FLASH CLI New Path Cost for Port lt port_id gt is invalid CLI PVID lt vlan_id gt for port lt port_id gt is not created CLI RADIUS secret must be 1 32 characters long CLI Please configure primary RADIUS server address CLI STP changes can t be applied since STP is OFF CLI Trunk group lt trunk_id gt contains ports with different PVIDs CLI Trunk group lt trunk_id gt has more than lt max_trunk_ports gt ports CLI Trunk group lt trunk_id gt contains no ports but is enabled CLI Not all ports in trunk group lt trunk_id gt are in VLAN lt vlan_id gt CLI Trunk groups lt trunk_id gt and lt trunk_id gt can not share the same port 356 m Alteon OS Syslog Messages 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference LOG_ERROR continued PORT_MIRR CLI CLI MGMT MGMT CLI CLI CLI CLI CLI CLI CLI CLI CLI CLI CLI CLI CLI CLI CLI 43W7774 May 2007 Port Mirroring changes are not applied Broadcast address for IP interface lt interface_id gt is invalid IP Interfaces lt interface_id gt and lt interface_id gt
83. two GbE Switch Mod ules in a hot standby failover configuration where only one switch is active at any time Table 6 94 Virtual Router Group Menu Options cfg I3 vrrp group Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for the virtual router group Tracking is an Alteon OS proprietary extension to VRRP used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router To view menu options see page 301 vrid lt virtual router ID 1 1024 gt Defines the virtual router ID The vrid for standard virtual routers where the virtual router IP address is not the same as any virtual server can be any integer between 1 and 1024 All vrid values must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router s IP interface see i f below belongs The default virtual router ID is 1 if lt interface number 1 127 gt Selects a switch IP interface The default switch IP interface number is 1 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 299 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 94 Virtual Router Group Menu Options cfg I3 vrrp group Command Syntax and Usage prio lt priority 1 254 gt Defines the election priority bias for this virtual router group This can be any integer between 1 and 254 The default value is 100 During the master router election process the routing device with the highest virtual router priority number wins If there is a tie the device
84. update on off current Routing Information Protocol Menu RIP Interface Menu Set update period in seconds Globally turn RIP ON Globally turn RIP OFF Display current RIP configuration The RIP Menu is used for configuring Routing Information Protocol RIP parameters This option is turned off by default Table 6 65 RIP Menu Options cfg l3 rip Command Syntax and Usage if lt J 127 gt Displays the RIP Interface menu For more information see page 264 update lt 20 gt Configures the time interval for sending for RIP table updates in seconds The default value is 30 seconds on Globally turns RIP on off Globally turns RIP off cur Displays the current RIP configuration 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 263 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 rip if lt interface number gt Routing Information Protocol Interface Configuration RIP Interface 1 Menu version Set RIP version supply Enable disable supplying route updates listen Enable disable listening to route updates poison Enable disable poisoned reverse split Enable disable split horizon trigg Enable disable triggered updates mcast Enable disable multicast updates default Set default route action metric Set metric auth Set authentication type key Set authentication key nabl Enable interfac disable Disable interface current Display current RIP int
85. with the highest IP interface address wins If this virtual router s IP address addr is the same as the one used by the IP interface the priority for this vir tual router will automatically be set to 255 highest When priority tracking is used cf g 13 vrrp track or cfg 13 vrrp vr track this base priority value can be modified according to a number of performance and operational cri teria adver lt seconds 1 255 gt Defines the time interval between VRRP master advertisements This can be any integer between 1 and 255 seconds The default is 1 preem disable enable Enables or disables master preemption When enabled if the virtual router group is in backup mode but has a higher priority than the current master this virtual router will preempt the lower priority master and assume control Note that even when preem is disabled this virtual router will always preempt any other master if this switch is the owner the IP interface address and virtual router addr are the same By default this option is enabled ena Enables the virtual router group dis Disables the virtual router group del Deletes the virtual router group from the switch configuration cur Displays the current configuration information for the virtual router group 300 The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 vrrp group track Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configura
86. you to define IPv4 matching criteria for an ACL Table 6 104 IP version 4 Filtering Menu Options cfg acl acl x ipv4 Command Syntax and Usage sip lt IP address gt lt mask such as 255 255 255 0 gt Defines a source IP address for the ACL If defined traffic with this source IP address will match this ACL Specify an IP address in dotted decimal notation dip lt I P address gt lt mask such as 255 255 255 0 gt Defines a destination IP address for the ACL If defined traffic with this destination IP address will match this ACL proto lt 0 255 gt Defines an IP protocol for the ACL If defined traffic from the specified protocol matches this fil ter Specify the protocol number Listed below are some of the well known protocols Number Name 1 icmp 2 igmp 6 tcp 17 udp 89 ospf 112 vrrp 310 The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 104 IP version 4 Filtering Menu Options cfg acl acl x ipv4 Command Syntax and Usage tos lt 0 255 gt Defines a Type of Service value for the ACL For more information on ToS refer to RFC 1340 and 1349 reset Resets the IPv4 parameters for the ACL to their default values cur Displays the current IPV4 parameters 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 311 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg acl acl lt ACL number gt tcpudp TCP UDP Filtering Configuration Filtering TCP UDP M
87. 0 o o INTIL o o INTI2 INTI3 o o INTIA oo OEXTI o o BxT2 EXT3 O EXTA QA Tma o For each GVRP registered VLAN the GID State Machine table indicates the GVRP participa tion of switch ports It also displays the ports current Applicant and Registrar states Table 4 16 lists the possible GVRP applicant states for the port The GVRP port s Applicant transitions from one state to another as it processes GPDUs Table 4 16 GVRP Port Applicant States State Description VA Very anxious Active member AA Anxious Active member OA Quiet Active member LA Leaving Active member VP Very anxious Passive member AP Anxious Passive member QP Quiet Passive member VO Very anxious Observer AO Anxious Observer QO Quiet Observer LO Leaving Observer 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu m 81 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 4 17 lists the possible GVRP registrar states for the port The registrar receives GVRP messages from other GVRP participants on the network Registrar states are further defined as follows Normal registration The registrar responds normally to incoming GPDUs Corresponding states are displayed as INn LV and MT E Fixed registration The registrar ignores all GPDUs and remains in the IN state Corresponding states are displayed as INr LVr and MTr Forbidden registration The registrar ignores all GPDUs and remains in th
88. 1 OO ed 255025572557255 110 001 local addr 211 11 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 11 255 255 255 broadcast broadcast 211 12 0 0 4 0 255 000 lt 0 12 0 0 1 direct fixed 12 2 0 Oe 255 255 255 255 12 00 22 local addr 12 12 255 255 255 255 255 255 255 12 255 255 255 broadcast broadcast 12 Posesi 255 0 0 0 eGo Oaa indirect ospf 2 211 47 0 0 0 255 0 0 0 47 133 88 1 indirect static 24 47 133 88 0 255 255 255 0 47 133 88 46 direct fixed 24 172 30 52 223 2099 29932090 290 172 30 52 223 broadcast broadcast 2 224 0 0 0 224 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 martian martian 224 0 0 5 295 255 255 259 0 0 0 0 multicast addr The following table describes the Type parameters Table 4 24 IP Routing Type Parameters Parameter Description indirect The next hop to the host or subnet destination will be forwarded through a router at the Gateway address direct Packets will be delivered to a destination host or subnet attached to the switch local Indicates a route to one of the switch s IP interfaces broadcast Indicates a broadcast route martian The destination belongs to a host or subnet which is filtered out Packets to this destination are discarded multicast Indicates a multicast route 98 m The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference The following table describes the Tag parameters Table 4 25 IP Routing Tag Parameters Parameter Descripti
89. 17 44 gt Shows routes to a default gateway type indirectldirectllocallbroadcastimartianimulticast Shows routes of a single type For a description of IP routing types see Table 4 24 on page 98 tag fixed static addr rip ospf bgp broadcast martian multicast Shows routes of a single tag For a description of IP routing tags see Table 4 25 on page 99 if lt interface number 1 128 gt Shows routes on a single interface dump Shows all routes clear Clears the route table from switch memory NoTE To display all routes you can also refer to IP Routing Information on page 97 346 m The Maintenance Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference maint igmp IGMP Maintenance IGMP Multicast Group Menu group Multicast Group Menu mrouter IGMP Multicast Router Port Menu clear Clear group and mrouter tables Table 9 7 describes the IGMP Maintenance commands Table 9 7 IGMP Maintenance Menu Options maint igmp Command Syntax and Usage group Displays the Multicast Group menu To view menu options see page 348 mrouter Displays the Multicast Router Port menu To view menu options see page 347 clear Clears the IGMP group table and Mrouter tables 43W7774 May 2007 The Maintenance Menu E 347 Alteon OS Command Reference maint igmp group IGMP Group Maintenance IGMP Multicast Group Menu find Show a single group by IP group add
90. 18 10000 any yes yes up EXT3 19 10000 any yes yes up EXT4 20 1000 any yes yes up NoTE The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens displayed by your system Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed Use this command to display link status information about each port on an GbE Switch Module slot including 43W7774 May 2007 Port alias Duplex mode half full any or auto Link status up down or disabled Port speed 10 100 10 100 1000 or 10000 Flow control for transmit and receive no yes or auto The Information Menu E 119 Alteon OS Command Reference info port Port Information Alias Port Tag Fast Lrn PVID NAME VLAN s INT1 1 y n e L INT1 1 10 4095 INT2 2 y n e INT2 1 4095 INT3 3 y n e L INT3 1 4095 INT4 4 y n e L INT4 1 4095 INT5 5 y n e L INTS 1 4095 INT6 6 y n e L INT6 1 4095 INT7 op y n e L INT 1 4095 INT8 8 y n e INT8 1 4095 INT9 9 y n e L INT9 1 4095 INT10 10 y n e L INT10 1 4095 INT11 11 y n e L INT11 1 4095 INT12 12 y n e L INT12 1 4095 INT13 13 y n e L INT13 1 4095 INT14 14 y n e 1 INT14 1 4095 GT 15 y n e 4095 MGT 4095 EXT1 17 n n e EXT1 al EXT2 18 n n e EXT2 1 EXT3 19 y n e EXT3 1 10 EXT4 20 y n e EXT4 1 30 Dynamic port in this VLAN x PVID is tagged
91. 2 1x Guest VLAN Configuration Menu vian Set 8021 x Guest VLAN number ena Enable 8021 xGuest VLAN dis Disable 8021 x Guest VLAN cur Display current Guest VLAN configuration The 802 1x Guest VLAN menu allows you to configure a Guest VLAN for unauthenticated ports The Guest VLAN provides limited access to switch functions Table 6 31 802 1x Guest VLAN Configuration Menu cfg l2 8021 x global gvlan Command Syntax and Usage vlan lt 1 4094 gt Configures the Guest VLAN number ena Enables the 802 1x Guest VLAN dis Disables the 802 1x Guest VLAN cur Displays current 802 1x Guest VLAN parameters 218 The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 12 8021x port lt alias or number gt 802 1x Port Configuration 802 1x Port Configuration Menu mod Set access control mode qtperiod Set EAP Request Identity quiet time interval txperiod Set EAP Request Identity retransmission timeout suptmout Set EAP Request retransmission timeout svrtmout Set server authentication request timeout maxreq Set max number of EAP Request retransmissions raperiod Set reauthentication time interval reauth Set reauthentication status to on or off default Restore default 802 1x configuration global Apply current global 802 1x configuration to this port cur Display current 802 1x configuration The 802 1x port menu allows you to configu
92. 2 1x Operation Menu reset Reinitialize 802 1x access control on this port reauth Initiate reauthentication on this port now Operations level port 802 1x options are used to temporarily set 802 1x parameters for a port Table 7 3 Operations Level Port 802 1x Menu Options oper port x 8021 x Command Syntax and Usage reset Re initializes the 802 1x access control parameters for the port The following actions take place depending on the 802 1x port configuration m force unauth the port is placed in unauthorized state and traffic is blocked m auto the port is placed in unauthorized state then authentication is initiated m force auth the port is placed in authorized state and authentication is not required reauth Re authenticates the supplicant client attached to the port This command only applies if the port s 802 1x mode is configured as auto 326 m The Operations Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference oper vrrp Operations Level VRRP Options VRRP Operations Menu back Set virtual router to backup Table 7 4 Operations Level VRRP Menu Options oper vrrp Command Syntax and Usage back lt virtual router number 1 1024 gt Forces the specified master virtual router on this switch into backup mode This is generally used for passing master control back to a preferred switch once the preferred switch has been returned to service after a failure When this com
93. 5 days 2 hours 16 minutes and 42 seconds Last boot 0 00 47 Wed Jan 3 2007 power cycle MAC address 00 11 58 ad a3 00 Management IP Address if 128 TOs 90 90a 97 Software Version 1 1 0 FLASH imagel factory default configura tion PCBA Part Number 317857 A FAB Number EL4512011 Serial Number YJIWDW47N277 Manufacturing Date Hardware Revision 0 Board Revision 0 5 PLD Firmware Version 0 Temperature Sensor 1 Warning 42 5 C Warn at 85 0 C Recover at 79 0 C Temperature Sensor 2 Shutdown 44 0 C Warn at 93 0 C Recover at 86 0 C Temperature Sensor 3 Exhaust 42 5 6 Temperature Sensor 4 Inlet 4735 Switch is in I O Module Bay 0 NoTE The display of temperature will come up only if the temperature of any of the sensors exceeds the temperature threshold There will be a warning from the software if any of the sen sors exceeds this temperature threshold The switch will shut down if the power supply over heats System information includes E System date and time Switch model Switch name and location Time of last boot MAC address of the switch management processor 70 m The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 43W7774 May 2007 IP address of IP interface 1 Hardware version and part number Software image file and version number Configuration name Log in banner if one is configured Alteon OS Command Reference The Information Menu E 71 Alteon OS Co
94. 6 Show All FDB Information 77 Clearing Entries from the Forwarding Database 77 Link Aggregation Control Protocol Information 78 Show all LACP Information 78 GVRP Information 79 Show GVRP VLAN Database Information 80 Show GID State Machine Information 81 Show GID Port Ring Information 82 802 1x Information 83 Spanning Tree Information 85 RSTP MSTP Information 88 Common Internal Spanning Tree Information 91 Trunk Group Information 93 VLAN Information 94 Layer 3 Information 95 43W7774 May 2007 IP Routing Information 97 Show All IP Route Information 98 ARP Information 100 Show All ARP Entry Information 101 ARP Address List Information 102 BGP Information 102 BGP Peer information 103 BGP Summary information 103 Show all BGP Information 104 OSPF Information 105 OSPF General Information 106 OSPF Interface Information 107 OSPF Database Information 107 OSPF Information Route Codes 109 Routing Information Protocol Information 110 RIP Routes Information 110 Show RIP User Configuration 110 IP Information 111 IGMP Multicast Group Information 112 IGMP Group Information 113 IGMP Multicast Router Port Information 113 IGMP Mrouter Information 114 VRRP Information 115 Quality of Service Information 116 802 1p Information 116 Contents E 5 Alteon OS Command Reference Access Control List Information 118 Link Status Information 119 Port Information 120 Logical Port to GEA Port Mapping 121 Fiber Port SFP Status 122 Information Dump 122
95. 60 hops The default is 20 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 221 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 33 MSTP RSTP Configuration Menu Options cfg I2 mrst Command Syntax and Usage mode rstp mstp Selects either Rapid Spanning Tree mode rstp or Multiple Spanning Tree mode mst The default mode is RSTP on Globally turns RSTP MSTP ON Note When RSTP is turned on the configuration parameters for STG 1 apply to RSTP off Globally turns RSTP MSTP OFF cur Displays the current RSTP MSTP configuration 222 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 12 mrst cist Common Internal Spanning Tree Configuration Common Internal Spanning Tree Menu brg CIST Bridge parameter menu port CIST Port parameter menu add Add VLAN s to CIST default Default Common Internal Spanning Tree and Member parameters cur Display current CIST parameters Table 6 34 describes the commands used to configure Common Internal Spanning Tree CIST parameters The CIST provides compatibility with different MSTP regions and with devices running different Spanning Tree instances It is equivalent to Spanning Tree Group 0 Table 6 34 CIST Menu Options cfg l2 mrst cist Command Syntax and Usage brg Displays the CIST Bridge Menu To view menu options see page 224 port lt port alias or number gt Displays the CIST Port Menu To view menu options se
96. 9 25942595 O02 703eF 203722006 1 205 178 18 64 255 2995259 255 007 702c 10382005 1 info 13 bgp BGP Information BGP Menu peer Show all BGP peers summary Show all BGP peers in summary dump Show BGP routing table Table 4 28 BGP Peer Information Menu Options info l3 bgp Command Syntax and Usage peer Displays BGP peer information See page 103 for a sample output summary Displays peer summary information such as AS message received message sent up down state See page 103 for a sample output dump Displays the BGP routing table See page 104 for a sample output 102 m The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference info 13 bgp peer BGP Peer information Following is an example of the information that info 13 bgp peer provides BGP Peer Information SY Zed de E version 0 TTL 1 Remote AS 0 Local AS 0 Link type IBGP Remote router ID 0 0 0 0 Local router ID 1 1 201 5 BGP status idle Old status idle Total received packets 0 Total sent packets 0 Received updates 0 Sent updates 0 Keepalive 0 Holdtime 0 MinAdvTime 60 wastErrorCode unknown 0 LastErrorSubcode unspecified 0 Established state transitions 0 4 2 1 1 4 version 0 TTL 1 Remote AS 0 Local AS 0 Link type IBGP Remote router ID 0 0 0 0 Local router ID 1 1 201 5 BGP status idle Old status idle Total received
97. 9 to view menu options if lt interface number 1 128 gt Displays the OSPF interface configuration menu See page 270 to view menu options virt lt virtual link 1 3 gt Displays the Virtual Links menu used to configure OSPF for a Virtual Link See page 272 to view menu options md5key lt key ID 1 255 gt Assigns a string to MDS authentication key host lt host entry number 1 128 gt Displays the menu for configuring OSPF for the host routes Up to 128 host routes can be config ured Host routes are used for advertising network device IP addresses to external networks to per form server load balancing within OSPF It also makes Area Border Route ABR load sharing and ABR failover possible See page 273 to view menu options redist fixed static rip lebgp ibgp Displays Route Distribution Menu See page 274 to view menu options lsdb lt LSDB limit 0 2000 0 for no limit gt Sets the link state database limit 266 The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 67 OSPF Configuration Menu cfg I3 ospf Command Syntax and Usage default lt metric 1 16777215 gt lt metric type 1 2 gt none Sets one default route among multiple choices in an area Use none for no default on Enables OSPF on the GbE Switch Module off Disables OSPF on the GbE Switch Module cur Displays the current OSPF configuration settings 43W7774 May 2007 The Configura
98. 94 gt none Sets the metric value in the AS External ASE LSA action permit deny Permits or denies action for the access list enable Enables the access list disable Disables the access list delete Deletes the access list cur Displays the current Access List configuration 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 261 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 rmap lt route map number gt aspath lt autonomous system path gt Autonomous System Filter Path NoTE The rmap number 1 32 and the path number 1 8 represent the AS path you wish to configure AS Filter 1 Menu as AS number action Set AS Filter action nabl Enable AS Filter disable Disable AS Filter delet Delete AS Filter cur Display current AS Filter configuration Table 6 64 AS Filter Menu Options cfg I3 rmap aspath Command Syntax and Usage as lt AS number 1 65535 gt Sets the Autonomous System filter s path number action lt permitideny p d gt Permits or denies Autonomous System filter action enable Enables the Autonomous System filter disable Disables the Autonomous System filter delete Deletes the Autonomous System filter current Displays the current Autonomous System filter configuration 262 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 cfg 13 rip Alteon OS Command Reference Routing Information Protocol Configuration if
99. A protocol that acts very similarly to Cisco s proprietary HSRP address sharing protocol The reason for both of these protocols is so devices have a next hop or default gateway that is always available Two or more devices sharing an IP interface are either advertising or listening for advertisements These advertisements are sent via a broadcast message to an address such as 224 0 0 18 With VRRP one switch is considered the master and the other the backup The master is always advertising via the broadcasts The backup switch is always listening for the broad casts Should the master stop advertising the backup will take over ownership of the VRRP IP and MAC addresses as defined by the specification The switch announces this change in ownership to the devices around it by way of a Gratuitous ARP and advertise ments If the backup switch didn t do the Gratuitous ARP the Layer 2 devices attached to the switch would not know that the MAC address had moved in the network For a more detailed description refer to RFC 2338 43W7774 May 2007 Index Symbols l COMMANG s fey cxdis cists EY 50 A abbreviating commands CLD csseseeeeeeees 54 access control UISOR EAEE E E EEE EENT EN 205 ACL Port eni sicie 212 ACE statisticS sicciiescsiscesastasocesasavneciogecssueciaatelays 164 active configuration block esseeeeseeeseeeee 174 336 active IP interface ceeesecececesesseceeeeseseneeeeeees 301 active port
100. AC address of the Designated Bridge Designated Port The port ID of the port on the Designated Bridge to which this port is con nected Type Type of link connected to the port and whether the port is an edge port Link type values are AUTO P2P or SHARED info 12 trunk Trunk Group Information S S Trunk group 1 EXT1 EXT2 G G port state 1 forwarding 1 forwarding When trunk groups are configured you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups Note If Spanning Tree Protocol on any port in the trunk group is set to forwarding the remaining ports in the trunk group will also be set to forwarding 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu E 93 Alteon OS Command Reference info 12 vlan VLAN Information VLAN Name Status Ports 1 Default VLAN ena INT1 INT14 EXT1 EXT4 10 VLAN 10 ena INTL 10 VLAN 10 ena EXT3 30 VLAN 30 ena EXT4 4095 Mgmt VLAN ena INT1 INT14 MGT Dynamically created VLAN Private VLAN Type Mapped To Status Ports 1000 primary 1001 1014 ena EXT1 EXT2 1001 isolated 1000 ena INT1 1002 community 1000 ena INT2 1003 community 1000 ena INT3 NoTE The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens displayed by your system Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you are using and the firmware versions a
101. AN number gt Shows all IGMP multicast router ports on a single VLAN dump Shows all multicast router ports clear Clears the IGMP Multicast Router port table 43W7774 May 2007 The Maintenance Menu E 349 Alteon OS Command Reference maint uudmp Uuencode Flash Dump Using this command dump information is presented in uuencoded format This format makes it easy to capture the dump information as a file or a string of characters If you want to capture dump information to a file set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the uudmp command This will ensure that you do not lose any information Once entered the uudmp command will cause approximately 23 300 lines of data to be displayed on your screen and copied into the file Using the uudmp command dump information can be read multiple times The command does not cause the information to be updated or cleared from flash memory Note Dump information is not cleared automatically In order for any subsequent dump information to be written to flash memory you must manually clear the dump region For more information on clearing the dump region see page 351 To access dump information at the Maintenance prompt enter Maintenance uudmp The dump information is displayed on your screen and if you have configured your communi cation software to do so captured to a file If the dump region is emp
102. APTER 8 The Boot Options Menu To use the Boot Options Menu you must be logged in to the switch as the administrator The Boot Options Menu provides options for E Selecting a switch software image to be used when the switch is next reset E Selecting a configuration block to be used when the switch is next reset E Downloading or uploading a new software image to the switch via FTP TFTP In addition to the Boot Menu you can use a Web browser or SNMP to work with switch image and configuration files To use SNMP refer to Working with Switch Images and Configura tion Files on page 368 43W7774 May 2007 329 Alteon OS Command Reference boot Boot Menu Boot Options Menu sched Scheduled Switch Reset Menu image Select software image to use on next boot conf Select config block to use on next boot mode Select CLI mode to use on next boot prompt Prompt for selectable boot mode gtimg Download new software image via TFTP ptimg Upload selected software image via TFTP reset Reset switch WARNING Restarts Spanning Tree cur Display current boot options Each of these options is discussed in greater detail in the following sections Scheduled Reboot of the Switch This feature allows the switch administrator to schedule a reboot to occur at a particular time in future This feature is particularly helpful if the user needs to perform switch upgrades during off peak hours
103. Access Control Model Configuration 195 SNMPv3 Group Configuration 197 SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration 198 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Configuration 199 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration 200 SNMPv3 Notify Table Configuration 201 System Access Configuration 202 Management Networks Configuration 204 User Access Control Configuration 205 System User ID Configuration 206 Strong Password Configuration 207 HTTPS Access Configuration 208 Port Configuration 209 Port Link Configuration 211 Temporarily Disabling a Port 212 Port ACL Configuration 212 Layer 2 Configuration 213 43W7774 May 2007 Contents E 7 Alteon OS Command Reference 8 m Contents 802 1x Configuration 215 802 1x Global Configuration 216 802 1x Guest VLAN Configuration 218 802 1x Port Configuration 219 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Configuration 221 Common Internal Spanning Tree Configuration 223 CIST Bridge Configuration 224 CIST Port Configuration 225 Spanning Tree Configuration 227 Spanning Tree Bridge Configuration 229 Spanning Tree Port Configuration 231 GVRP Configuration 233 GVRP Port Configuration 234 Trunk Configuration 235 IP Trunk Hash Configuration 236 IP Trunk Hash 236 LACP Configuration 238 LACP Port Configuration 239 Layer 2 Failover Configuration 240 Failover Trigger Configuration 241 Auto Monitor Configuration 242 VLAN Configuration 243 Protocol based VLAN Configuration 245 Private VLAN Configuration 247
104. Auto for auto negotiation mode full half any Sets the operating mode The choices include m Any for auto negotiation default m Full duplex m Half duplex fctl rx tx both none Sets the flow control The choices include m Receive flow control m Transmit flow control m Both receive and transmit flow control default m No flow control auto on off Enables or disables auto negotiation for the port 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 211 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 26 Port Link Configuration Menu Options cfg port gig Command Syntax and Usage cur Displays current port parameters Temporarily Disabling a Port To temporarily disable a port without changing its stored configuration attributes enter the fol lowing command at any prompt Main oper port lt port alias or number gt dis Because this configuration sets a temporary state for the port you do not need to use apply or save The port state will revert to its original configuration when the GbE Switch Module is reset See the Operations Menu on page 324 for other operations level commands cfg port lt port alias or number gt aclqos Port ACL Configuration Port INT2 ACL Menu add Add ACL or ACL group to this port rem Remove ACL or ACL group from this port cur Display current ACLs for this port Table 6 27 Port ACL Menu Options cfg port aclqos Command Syntax and Usag
105. BadVersion vrrpBadAddress vrrpBadPassword VRRP statistics 0 vrrpBadAdvers 0 0 0 vrrpBadVrid 0 0 vrrpBadData 0 0 vrrpBadInterval 0 Table 5 25 VRRP Statistics stats I3 vrrp Statistics Description vrrpiInAdvers The total number of valid VRRP advertisements that have been received vrrpBadAdvers The total number of VRRP advertisements received that were dropped vrrpOutAdvers The total number of VRRP advertisements that have been sent vrrpBadVersion The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad version number vrrpBadVrid The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad virtual router ID vrrpBadAddress The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad address vrrpBadData The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had bad data vrrpBadPassword The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad password vrrpBadInterval The total number of VRRP advertisements received that had a bad interval 158 The Statistics Menu 43W7774 May 2007 stats 13 rip Routing Information Protocol Statistics Alteon OS Command Reference RIP ALL STATS INFORMATION RIP RIP RIP RIP RIP RIP RIP RIP RIP RIP RIP RIP RIP packets received 12 packets sent 75 request received 0 response recevied 12 request sent 3 reponse sent 72 route timeout 0 bad size packet received bad v
106. Bay 4 10 90 90 97 192 168 70 130 NoTE Switch Modules installed in Bay 1 and Bay 2 connect to server NICs 1 and 2 respec tively However Windows operating systems show that Switch Modules installed in Bay 3 and Bay 4 connect to server NICs 4 and 3 respectively Default Gateway The default Gateway IP address determines where packets with a destination address outside the current subnet should be sent Usually the default Gateway is a router or host acting as an IP gateway to handle connections to other subnets of other TCP IP networks If you want to access the GbE Switch Module from outside your local network use the management module to assign a default Gateway address to the GbE Switch Module Choose I O Module Tasks gt Configuration from the navigation pane on the left and enter the default Gateway IP address for example 192 168 70 125 Click Save Configuring management module for switch access Complete the following initial configuration steps 1 Connect the Ethernet port of the management module to a 10 100 Mbps network with access to a management station or directly to a management station 2 Access and log on to the management module as described in the BladeCenter Manage ment Module User s Guide The management module provides the appropriate IP addresses for network access see the applicable BladeCenter Installation and User s Guide publications for more information 3 Select Configuration
107. CS Server Configuration TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control system is an authentication protocol that allows a remote access server to forward a user s logon password to an authentication server to determine whether access can be allowed to a given system TACACS is an encryption protocol and therefore less secure than TACACS and Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS protocols Both TACACS and TACACS are described in RFC 1492 TACACS protocol is more reliable than RADIUS as TACACS uses the Transmission Con trol Protocol TCP whereas RADIUS uses the User Datagram Protocol UDP Also RADIUS combines authentication and authorization in a user profile whereas TACACS separates the two operations TACACS offers the following advantages over RADIUS as the authentication device E TACACS is TCP based so it facilitates connection oriented traffic E It supports full packet encryption as opposed to password only in authentication requests E It supports de coupled authentication authorization and accounting TACACS Server Menu prisrv Set IP address of primary TACACS server secsrv Set IP address of secondary TACACS server secret Set secret for primary TACACS server secret2 Set secret for secondary TACACS server port Set TACACS port number retries Set number of TACACS server retries timeout Set timeout value of TACACS server retries telnet Enable disable TACAC
108. Configuration BGP Aggr 1 Menu addr Set aggregation IP address mask Set aggregation network mask nabl Enable aggregation disable Disable aggregation delet Delete aggregation cur Display current aggregation configuration This menu enables you to configure BGP aggregation to specify the routes range of IP destina tions a peer router accepts from other peers All matched routes are aggregated to one route to reduce the size of the routing table By default the first aggregation number is enabled and the rest are disabled Table 6 78 BGP Aggregation Configuration Menu Options cfg l3 bgp aggr Command Syntax and Usage addr lt P address such as 192 4 17 101 gt Defines the starting subnet IP address for this aggregation using dotted decimal notation The default address is 0 0 0 0 mask lt P subnet mask such as 255 255 255 0 gt This IP address mask is used with addr to define the range of IP addresses that will be aggregated to one route when the aggregation is enabled The default address is 0 0 0 0 ena Enables this BGP aggregation dis Disables this BGP aggregation del Deletes this BGP aggregation cur Displays the current BGP aggregation configuration 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 281 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 igmp IGMP Configuration IGMP Menu snoop IGMP Snoop Menu relay IGMP Relay Menu mrouter Static Multi
109. Configuration Menu To view menu options see page 213 13 Displays the Layer 3 Configuration Menu To view menu options see page 248 qos Displays the Quality of Service Configuration Menu To view menu options see page 304 acl Displays the ACL Configuration Menu To view menu options see page 307 pmirr Displays the Mirroring Configuration Menu To view menu options see page 319 setup Step by step configuration set up of the switch For details see page 321 172 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 1 Configuration Menu Options cfg Command Syntax and Usage dump Dumps current configuration to a script file For details see page 321 ptcfg lt host name or IP address of TFTP server gt lt filename on host gt Backs up current configuration to TFTP server For details see page 322 gtcfg lt host name or IP address of TFTP server gt lt filename on host gt Restores current configuration from TFTP server For details see page 322 cur Displays current configuration parameters Viewing Applying and Saving Changes As you use the configuration menus to set switch parameters the changes you make do not take effect immediately All changes are considered pending until you explicitly apply them Also any changes are lost the next time the switch boots unless the changes are explicitly saved NOTE Some operations can
110. ESSAGES ceseeceeseceessteceseeeesseeeeees 177 M MAC media access control address 58 70 76 100 343 Main Meni renne ae E E E as 48 Command Line Interface CLD 0000000 28 SUMMAT ee eai E 49 Maintenance IGMP eerren nee IGMP Groups ee IGMP Multicast Routers csceeceeeeeeeeeee 349 Maintenance Menu cccssssceeceseeeneeceeeeesenees 339 Management module 0 0 ee eeeeeeseeeeeneeeceneeeeeeneees 20 Management Processor MP esseeeceeeeeeeees 344 display MAC address manual style CONVENTIONS eeseeeeeeeecenteeeeeeeees 16 martian IP route tag filtered cceeeeesececeeeseeeeeeees 99 IP route type filtered Out eee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 98 mask IP interface subnet address cseseeeseeeee NAGLOMN MAAE EEE EEEE EE E E MaxAge STP information s ssese eeaeee MDS cryptographic authentication MDS KEY cc5stocdstceecsdedssenetesssevdesgntseees media access control See MAC address meter 7G E EEA E E E rere 313 Miscellaneous Debug Menu eeeeeeesseeeeeees 344 MONILOE POLE 5 fesvianstecascoeesvasvevinyevespocscesuevcessesevenss 319 mp PACKOt E 161 MP See Management Processor multicast EP Toute type i scissciicces irrin r 98 43W7774 May 2007 Multiple Spanning Tree CONFIQUIALION ccceceecessececeseecesseeeessteeeeees 221 mxage STP bridge option eeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeees 229 N nbr Change Statis
111. G network FwdDel The forward delay parameter specifies in seconds the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding state Aging The aging time parameter specifies in seconds the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the Forwarding Database priority port The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports con nected to a single segment the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment 86 The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 4 19 Spanning Tree Parameter Descriptions Continued Parameter Description Cost The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a segment Generally speaking the faster the port the lower the path cost A setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link speed has been auto negotiated State The state field shows the current state of the port The state field can be either BLOCKING LISTENING LEARNING FORWARDING or DISABLED Designated The Designated Bridge shows information about the bridge connected to Bridge each port if applicable Information includes the priority hex and MAC address of the
112. IP interface that the route uses For details see page 97 arp Displays the Address Resolution Protocol ARP Information Menu For details see page 100 bgp Displays BGP Information Menu To view menu options see page 102 ospf Displays OSPF routing Information Menu For details see page 105 rip Displays Routing Information Protocol Menu For details see page 110 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu E 95 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 4 22 Layer 3 Menu Options info I3 Command Syntax and Usage ip Displays IP Information For details see page 111 IP information includes m IP interface information Interface number IP address subnet mask VLAN number and opera tional status m Default gateway information Metric for selecting which configured gateway to use gateway number IP address and health status m IP forwarding information Enable status Lnet and lmask E Port status igmp Displays IGMP Information Menu For details see page 112 vrrp Displays the VRRP Information Menu For details see page 115 dump Dumps all switch information available from the Layer 3 Menu 10K or more depending on your configuration If you want to capture dump data to a file set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands 96 m The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference info 13 rout
113. Layer 3 Configuration 248 IP Interface Configuration 250 Default Gateway Configuration 251 IP Static Route Configuration 253 IP Multicast Route Configuration 254 ARP Configuration 255 ARP Static Configuration 256 IP Forwarding Configuration 257 Network Filter Configuration 258 Routing Map Configuration 259 IP Access List Configuration 261 Autonomous System Filter Path 262 Routing Information Protocol Configuration 263 Routing Information Protocol Interface Configuration 264 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Open Shortest Path First Configuration 266 Area Index Configuration 268 OSPF Summary Range Configuration 269 OSPF Interface Configuration 270 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration 272 OSPF Host Entry Configuration 273 OSPF Route Redistribution Configuration 274 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration 275 Border Gateway Protocol Configuration 276 BGP Peer Configuration 278 BGP Redistribution Configuration 280 BGP Aggregation Configuration 281 IGMP Configuration 282 IGMP Snooping Configuration 283 IGMP Version 3 Configuration 284 IGMP Relay Configuration 285 IGMP Relay Multicast Router Configuration 286 IGMP Static Multicast Router Configuration 287 IGMP Filtering Configuration 288 IGMP Filter Definition 289 IGMP Filtering Port Configuration 290 IGMP Advanced Configuration 291 Domain Name System Configuration 292 Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration 293 VRRP Configuration 294 Virtual Router Configura
114. M to interoperate well within Rapid Spanning Tree networks floodblk disable enable Enables or disables port Flood Blocking When enabled unicast and multicast packets with unknown destination MAC addresses are blocked from the port ena Enables the port dis Disables the port To temporarily disable a port without changing its configuration attributes refer to Temporarily Disabling a Port on page 212 cur Displays current port parameters 210 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg port lt port alias or number gt gig Port Link Configuration Gigabit Link Menu speed Set link speed mode Set full or half duplex mode EGEL Set flow control auto Set auto negotiation cur Display current gig link configuration Use these menu options to set port parameters for the port link NoTE The speed and mode parameters are fixed for Gigabit Ethernet ports and cannot be configured Link menu options are described in Table 6 26 and appear on the gig port configuration menu for the GbE Switch Module Use this menu to set port parameters such as speed flow control and negotiation mode for the port link Table 6 26 Port Link Configuration Menu Options cfg port gig Command Syntax and Usage speed 10 100 1000 any Sets the link speed Some options are not valid on all ports The choices include m 10 Mbps m 100 Mbps m 1000 Mbps m
115. MP Snooping cur Displays the current IGMP Snooping parameters cfg 13 igmp snoop igmpv3 IGMP Version 3 Configuration IGMP V3 Snoop Menu sources Set the number of sources to snoop in group record viv2 Enable disable snooping IGMPv1 v2 reports xclud Enable disable snooping EXCLUDE mode reports ena Enable IGMPv3 Snooping dis Disable IGMPv3 Snooping cur Display current IGMP Snooping V3 configuration Table 6 83 describes the commands used to configure IGMP version 3 Table 6 81 IGMP V3 Menu Options cfg I3 igmp snoop igmpv3 Command Syntax and Usage sources lt 64 gt Configures the maximum number of IGMP multicast sources to snoop from within the group record Use this command to limit the number of IGMP sources to provide more refined control vlv2 enable disable Enables or disables snooping on IGMP version 1 and version 2 reports When disabled the switch drops IGMPv1 and IGMPv2 reports The default value is enabled exclude enable disable Enables or disables snooping on IGMPv3 Exclude Reports When disabled the switch ignores Exclude Reports The default value is enabled ena Enables IGMP version 3 The default value is disabled 284 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 81 IGMP V3 Menu Options cfg I3 igmp snoop igmpv3 Command Syntax and Usage dis Disables IGMP version 3 cur Dis
116. N This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP capable routing device One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master based on a number of priority criteria and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address If the master fails one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address By default VRRP is disabled Alteon OS has extended VRRP to include virtual servers as well allowing for full active active redundancy between switches For more information on VRRP see the High Availability chapter in the Alteon OS 21 0 Application Guide Table 6 91 VRRP Menu Options cfg l3 vrrp Command Syntax and Usage vr lt virtual router number 1 1024 gt Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Menu This menu is used for configuring virtual routers on this switch To view menu options see page 296 group Displays the VRRP virtual router group menu used to combine all virtual routers together as one logical entity Group options must be configured when using two or more Alteon switches in a hot standby failover configuration where only one switch is active at any given time To view menu options see page 299 if lt interface number 1 127 gt Displays the VRRP Virtual Router Interface Menu To view menu options see page 302 track Displays the VRRP Tracking Menu This menu is us
117. RRP Priority Tracking configuration This menu is used for setting weights for the various criteria used to modify priority levels dur ing the master router election process Each time one of the tracking criteria is met see VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu on page 298 the priority level for the virtual router is increased by an amount defined through this menu Table 6 97 VRRP Tracking Menu Options cfg l3 vrrp track Command Syntax and Usage vrs lt 0 254 gt Defines the priority increment value 0 through 254 for virtual routers in master mode detected on this switch The default value is 2 ifs lt 0 254 gt Defines the priority increment value 0 through 254 for active IP interfaces detected on this switch The default value is 2 ports lt 0 254 gt Defines the priority increment value 0 through 254 for active ports on the virtual router s VLAN The default value is 2 cur Displays the current configuration of priority tracking increment values Note These priority tracking options only define increment values These options do not affect the VRRP master router election process until options under the VRRP Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu see page 298 are enabled 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 303 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg qos Quality of Service Configuration QOS Menu 8021p 802 1p Menu dscp Dscp Menu Use the Qual
118. S backdoor for telnet ssh http secbd Enable disable TACACS secure backdoor for telnet ssh http cmap Enable disable TACACS new privilege level mapping passch Enable disable TACACS password change chpass_p Set new password for primary server chpass_s Set new password for secondary server cauth Enable disable TACACS command authorization clog Enable disable TACACS command logging on Enable TACACS authentication off Disable TACACS authentication cur Display current TACACS settings 182 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 6 TACACS Server Menu Options cfg sys tacacs Command Syntax and Usage prisrv lt lP address gt Defines the primary TACACS server address secsrv lt IP address gt Defines the secondary TACACS server address secret lt 32 character secret gt This is the shared secret between the switch and the TACACS server s secret2 lt 32 character secret gt This is the secondary shared secret between the switch and the TACACS server s port lt TACACS port configure default 49 gt Enter the number of the TCP port to be configured between 1 65000 The default is 49 retries lt TACACS server retries 1 3 gt Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different TACACS server The default is 3 requests timeout lt ZACACS server timeout seconds 4 15 gt Sets the amount of time in seconds b
119. S 252 227 7015 Nov 1995 Blade Network Technologies Inc reserves the right to change any products described herein at any time and without notice Blade Network Technologies Inc assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the use of products described herein except as expressly agreed to in writing by Blade Network Technologies Inc The use and purchase of this product does not convey a license under any patent rights trademark rights or any other intellectual property rights of Blade Network Technologies Inc Originated in the USA Alteon OS and Alteon are trademarks of Nortel Networks Inc in the United States and certain other countries Cisco and EtherChannel are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems Inc in the United States and certain other countries Any other trademarks appearing in this manual are owned by their respective companies 2 43W7774 May 2007 Contents Preface 13 Who Should Use This Book 14 How This Book Is Organized 15 Typographic Conventions 16 How to Get Help 17 The Command Line Interface 19 Connecting to the Switch 20 Management Module Setup 20 Factory Default vs MM assigned IP Addresses 20 Default Gateway 21 Configuring management module for switch access 21 Connecting to the Switch via Telnet 23 Running Telnet 23 Establishing an SSH Connection 24 Running SSH 25 Accessing the Switch 26 Setup Versus CLI 28 Command Line History and Editing 29 Idle Timeout 29 First Time Config
120. User Security Model Configuration Menu Options cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 usm Command Syntax and Usage name lt 32 character name gt This command allows you to configure a string up to 32 characters long that represents the name of the user This is the login name that you need in order to access the switch auth md5 sha none This command allows you to configure the authentication protocol between HMAC MD5 96 or HMAC SHA 96 The default algorithm is none authpw If you selected an authentication algorithm using the above command you need to provide a pass word otherwise you will get an error message during validation This command allows you to cre ate or change your password for authentication priv des none This command allows you to configure the type of privacy protocol on your switch The privacy protocol protects messages from disclosure The options are des CBC DES Symmetric Encryp tion Protocol or none If you specify des as the privacy protocol then make sure that you have selected one of the authentication protocols MD5 or HMAC SHA 96 If you select none as the authentication protocol you will get an error message privpw This command allows you to create or change the privacy password 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 193 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 11 User Security Model Configuration Menu Options cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 usm Command Syntax and Usage del Delet
121. You can set the reboot time cancel a previously scheduled reboot and check the time of the currently set reboot schedule with the help of the following sub menu boot sched Scheduled Reboot Menu Boot Schedule Menu set Set switch reset time cancel Cancel pending switch reset cur Display current switch reset schedule 330 m The Boot Options Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Updating the Switch Software Image The switch software image is the executable code running on the GbE Switch Module A version of the image ships with the switch and comes pre installed on the device As new versions of the image are released you can upgrade the software running on your switch To get the latest version of software available for your GbE Switch Module go to http www ibm com pc support Click on software updates Use the boot cur command to determine the current software version The typical upgrade process for the software image consists of the following steps E Place the new image onto a FTP or TFTP server on your network or on a local computer E Transfer the new image to your switch E Select the new software image to be loaded into switch memory the next time the switch is reset Loading New Software to Your Switch The switch can store up to two different software images called image1 and image2 as well as boot software called boot When you load new software you must specify where
122. a Enable IGMP Filtering dis Disable IGMP Filtering cur Display current IGMP Filtering configuration Table 6 85 describes the commands used to configure an IGMP filter Table 6 85 IGMP Filtering Menu Options cfg l3 igmp igmpfit Command Syntax and Usage filter lt filter number 1 16 gt Displays the IGMP Filter Definition Menu To view menu options see page 289 port lt port number gt Displays the IGMP Filtering Port Menu To view menu options see page 290 ena Enables IGMP filtering globally dis Disables IGMP filtering globally cur Displays the current IGMP Filtering parameters 288 m m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 igmp igmpflt filter lt filter number gt IGMP Filter Definition IGMP Filter 1 Definition Menu range Set IP Multicast address range action Set filter action ena Enable filter dis Disable filter del Delete filter cur Display current IGMP filter configuration Table 6 86 describes the commands used to define an IGMP filter Table 6 86 IGMP Filter Definition Menu Options cfg I3 igmp igmpflt filter Command Syntax and Usage range lt IJP multicast address such as 224 0 0 10 gt lt IP multicast address gt Configures the range of IP multicast addresses for this filter action allow deny Allows or denies multicast traffic for the IP multicast addresses specified
123. ables the multicast router dis Disables the multicast router del Deletes the multicast router from IGMP Relay cur Displays the current IGMP Relay multicast router parameters cfg 13 igmp mrouter IGMP Static Multicast Router Configuration Static Multicast Router Menu add Add port as Multicast Router Port rem Remove port as Multicast Router Port cur Display current Multicast Router configuration Table 6 84 describes the commands used to configure a static multicast router NoTE When you configure a static multicast router on a VLAN the process of learning mul ticast routers is disabled for that VLAN Table 6 84 IGMP Static Multicast Router Menu Options cfg l3 igmp mrouter Command Syntax and Usage add lt port number gt lt VLAN number gt lt IGMP version number gt Selects a port VLAN combination on which the static multicast router is connected and configures the IGMP version 1 2 or 3 of the multicast router remove lt port number gt lt VLAN number gt lt IGMP version number gt Removes a static multicast router from the selected port VLAN combination cur Displays the current IGMP Static Multicast Router parameters 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 287 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 igmp igmpflt IGMP Filtering Configuration IGMP Filter Menu filter IGMP Filter Definition Menu port IGMP Filtering Port Menu en
124. agent certSave Allows the client or the Web browser to accept the certificate and save the certificate to Flash to be used when the switch is rebooted cur Displays the current SSL Web Access configuration 208 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg port lt port alias or number gt e e Port Configuration Port INT1 Menu gig Gig Phy Menu aclgqos Acl Qos Configuration Menu 8021lppri Set default 802 1p priority pvid Set default port VLAN id name Set port name dscpmrk Enable disable DSCP remarking for port learn Enable Disable FDB Learning for port tag Enable disable VLAN tagging for port tagpvid Enable disable tagging on pvid fastfwd Enable disable Port Fast Forwarding mode floodblk Enable disable Port flood blocking ena Enable port dis Disable port cur Display current port configuration Use the Port Configuration menu to configure settings for individual switch ports except the management port MGT This command is enabled by default Table 6 25 Port Configuration Menu cfg port Command Syntax and Usage gig If a port is configured to support Gigabit Ethernet this option displays the Gigabit Ethernet Physi cal Link Menu To view menu options see page 211 aclqos Displays the ACL Quality of Service Menu To view menu options see page 212 8021ppri lt 0 7 gt Configures the port s 802 1p priority
125. ailed The default is 5 seconds domain lt domain name 1 128 characters gt none Sets the domain name for the LDAP server Enter the full path for your organization For example ou people dc mydomain dc com 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 185 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 7 LDAP Server Menu Options cfg sys Idap Command Syntax and Usage telnet disable enable Enables or disables the LDAP back door for telnet The telnet command also applies to SSH SCP connections and the Browser Based Interface BBI The default is disabled To obtain the LDAP backdoor password for your GbESM contact your IBM Service and Support line on Enables the LDAP server off Disables the LDAP server This is the default setting cur Displays current LDAP configuration parameters 186 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg sys ntp NTP Server Configuration NTP Server Menu prisrv Set primary NIP server address secsrv Set secondary NTP server address intrval Set NTP server resync interval tzone Set NTP timezone offset from GMT dlight Enable or disable NTP daylight savings time on Turn NTP service ON off Turn NTP service OFF eur Display current NTP configuration This menu enables you to synchronize the switch clock to a Network Time Protocol NTP server By default this option is disabled Table 6 8 Syst
126. ame Set SNMP sysName locn Set SNMP sysLocation cont Set SNMP sysContact rcomm Set SNMP read community string wcomm Set SNMP write community string Crsre Set SNMP trap source interface timeout Set timeout for the SNMP state machine auth Enable disable SNMP sysAuthenTrap linkt Enable disable SNMP link up down trap cur Display current SNMP configuration Alteon OS supports SNMP based network management In SNMP model of network manage ment a management station client manager accesses a set of variables known as MIBs Man agement Information Base provided by the managed device agent If you are running an SNMP network management station on your network you can manage the switch using the following standard SNMP MIBs E MIB II RFC 1213 E Ethernet MIB RFC 1643 E Bridge MIB RFC 1493 An SNMP agent is a software process on the managed device that listens on UDP port 161 for SNMP messages Each SNMP message sent to the agent contains a list of management objects to retrieve or to modify SNMP parameters that can be modified include System name System location System contact Use of the SNMP system authentication trap function Read community string Write community string Trap community strings 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 189 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 9 System SNMP Menu Options cfg sys ssnmp Command Syntax and Usage snmpv3 Disp
127. ameCheckError status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC or other MAC user Received frames for which multiple error con ditions obtained are according to the conventions of IEEE 802 3 Layer Management counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC dot 3StatsSingle CollisionFrames A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts ifOutMul ticastPkts or ifOutBroadcastPkts and is not counted by the corresponding instance of the dot 3StatsMultipleCollision Frame object 43W7774 May 2007 The Statistics Menu E 131 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 5 6 Ethernet Statistics for Port stats port ether Statistics Description dot 3StatsMultiple A count of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for CollisionFrames which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision A frame that is counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts ifOutMul ticastPkts or ifOutBroadcastPkts and is not counted by the corresponding instance of the dot 3StatsSingleCollision Frames object dot 3StatsLate The number of times that a collision is detected on a particular interface Collisions
128. and Usage ethernet Displays the ACL Ethernet Header menu To view menu options see page 309 ipv4 Displays the ACL IP Header menu To view menu options see page 310 tcpudp Displays the ACL TCP UDP Header menu To view menu options see page 312 meter Displays the ACL Metering menu To view menu options see page 313 re mark Displays the ACL Re mark menu To view menu options see page 314 pktfmt lt packet format gt Displays the ACL Packet Format menu To view menu options see page 317 egrport lt port alias or number gt Configures the ACL to function on egress packets action permit deny setprio lt 0 7 gt Configures a filter action for packets that match the ACL definitions You can choose to permit pass or deny drop packets or set the 802 1p priority level 0 7 308 The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 102 ACL Menu Options cfg acl acl x Command Syntax and Usage stats eid Enables or disables the statistics collection for the Access Control List reset Resets the ACL parameters to their default values cur Displays the current ACL parameters cfg acl acl lt ACL number gt ethernet Ethernet Filtering Configuration smac Set to filter on source MAC dmac Set to filter on destination MAC vian Set to filter on VLAN ID etype Set to filter on ethernet typ pri Set to filter on prio
129. and is used to telnet out of the switch The format is as follows telnet lt hostname gt lt IP address gt port m mgmt d data Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the device By default the d or data option for network ports is in effect If the management port is used specify the m or mgmt option history This command displays the most recent commands 43W7774 May 2007 Menu Basics 51 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 3 1 Description of Global Commands Command Action pushd Save the current menu path so you can jump back to it using popd popd Go to the menu path and position previously saved by using pushd who Displays a list of users that are logged on to the switch chpass_p Configures the password for the primary TACACS server chpass_s Configures the password for the secondary TACACS server 52 m Menu Basics 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Command Line History and Editing Using the command line interface you can retrieve and modify previously entered commands with just a few keystrokes The following options are available globally at the command line Table 3 2 Command Line History and Editing Options Option Description history Display a numbered list of the last 64 previously entered commands Repeat the last entered command In Repeat the n command shown on the history l
130. ary but unique identifier associated with this snmpTargetAddrEntry Transport Addr Displays the transport addresses Port Displays the SNMP UDP port number Taglist This column contains a list of tag values which are used to select tar get addresses for a particular SNMP message Params The value of this object identifies an entry in the snmpTargetParam sTable The identified entry contains SNMP parameters to be used when generating messages to be sent to this transport address 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu E 65 Alteon OS Command Reference info sys snmpv3 tparam SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information Name MP Model User Nam Sec Model Sec Level viv2param snmpv2c viv2only snmpvl noAuthNoPriv Table 4 10 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information info sys snmpv3 tparam Field Description Name Displays the locally arbitrary but unique identifier associated with this snmpTargeParamsEntry MP Model Displays the Message Processing Model used when generating SNMP messages using this entry User Name Displays the securityName which identifies the entry on whose behalf SNMP messages will be generated using this entry Sec Model Displays the security model used when generating SNMP messages using this entry The system may choose to return an inconsis tentValue error if an attempt is made to set this variable to a value for a security model which the system does not
131. as soon as the link is up Configure server ports as edge ports enabled This command is disabled by default on Enables MRST on the port off Disables MRST on the port cur Displays the current CIST port configuration 226 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 12 stg lt STP group number gt Spanning Tree Configuration Spanning Tree Group 1 Menu brg Bridge parameter menu port Port parameter menu add Add VLAN s to Spanning Tree Group remov Remove VLAN s from Spanning Tree Group clear Remove all VLANs from Spanning Tree Group on Globally turn Spanning Tree ON off Globally turn Spanning Tree OFF default Default Spanning Tree and Member parameters cur Display current bridge parameters Alteon OS supports the IEEE 802 1d Spanning Tree Protocol STP STP is used to prevent loops in the network topology Up to 128 Spanning Tree Groups can be configured on the switch STG 128 is reserved for management NoTE When VRRP is used for active active redundancy STG must be enabled Table 6 37 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu cfg l2 stg Command Syntax and Usage brg Displays the Bridge Spanning Tree Menu To view menu options see page 229 port lt port alias or number gt Displays the Spanning Tree Port Menu To view menu options see page 231 add lt VLAN number 1 4094 gt Associates a VLAN with a spanning tr
132. at lt time gt Switch reset at lt time gt has been cancelled Scheduled switch reboot Alteon OS Syslog Messages 361 Alteon OS Command Reference LOG_NOTICE continued MGMT MGMT MGMT VLAN IP IP SSH SSH PORT_MIRR PORT_MIRR SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM 362 m Alteon OS Syslog Messages lt mins gt minutes until scheduled reboot Password for lt user gt changed by lt user gt notifying admin to save Temperature OK Default VLAN can not be deleted default gateway lt ip_address gt lt enabled disabled gt Default gateway lt ip_address gt operational scp lt login_level gt login mn scp lt login_level gt lt connection closed idle time out logout gt Port mirroring is enabled Port mirroring is disabled Management Port enabled disabled state can only be controlled by Man agement Module Management Port can only be enabled disabled by the Management Module Cannot change the Management IP Interface VLAN Cannot enable disable the Management IP Interface Cannot enable disable forwarding on Management IP Interface Cannot delete the Management IP Interface Management VLAN can not be disabled Default VLAN can not be deleted Management VLAN can not be deleted Management Port enabled disabled state can only be controlled by Management Module 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference LOG_NOTICE cont
133. atiSth CS vcensscciesctecsbesesederoneessacbrouasnseeserenst S save global command cccseceessceeeeseeeeseeees 174 NODACK OPtiON ecceessseecssecessseeessseeeeseeees 174 SAVE command ginsir ee nine e E 336 secret radius Server snoi nienie ocene en AESSR 180 secsrv secondary radius Server eeeeeeeeeeeereeeeee 180 Secure Shell setup configuration ccceccecesseceecessessaeeeeeeessaees 321 setup command configuration eseeeeeeeeeeeeeee 321 43W7774 May 2007 setup facility ccccccccesssccececesssseececessseeeecs 28 31 TP configuration eeeeeeeeeseeecsneeeeeneeeeenees 39 IP subnet mask 5 c csesciesseeeoseisssensosensesoes 39 port auto negotiation mode 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeee 37 port Configuration eeeeeeesseeeseseeeeseeeeeees 36 port flow CONE eee eeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 36 restarting ositos inenen iiri aE Ee 34 Spanning Tree Protocol s sssseeeseeseeeereeeeeeee SCAT Se ceed eheccens ci E E E SHOPPING v5 is ssscecccdectececesseeseausorsecdoatoouesssateses system dat apisaon oo a ckecebcodeseees System M r cicirenna inini snie VLAN name VLAN tagging VLANS oseese Shortcuts CLI wvcsicsccsceesssvescceeseececececcescesevseressbonas snap traces UPPER aE E E AT SNMP wisn cs cassectvadscusenthesedasds soe aea ERNER menu options set and get access SNMP Agent SNMP statistics s cccssccccsesss
134. atistics clracl Clears all ACL statistics stats acl acl lt ACL number gt ACL Statistics This option displays ACL statistics Hits for ACL 1 port EXTI1 26057515 Hits for ACL 2 port EXT1 26057497 164 The Statistics Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference stats snmp SNMP Statistics NoTE You can reset the SNMP counter to zero by using clear command as follows gt gt Statistics snmp clear SNMP statistics snmpInPkts 150097 snmpInBadVersions 0 snmpInBadC tyNames 0 snmpInBadC tyUses 0 snmpInASNParseErrs 0 snmpEnableAuthTraps 0 snmpOutPkts 150097 snmpInBadTypes 0 snmpInTooBigs 0 snmpInNoSuchNames 0 snmpInBadValues 0 snmpInReadOnlys 0 snmpInGenErrs 0 snmpInTotalReqVars 798464 snmpInTotalSetVars 2731 snmpInGetRequests 17593 snmpInGetNexts 131389 snmpInSetRequests 615 snmpInGetResponses 0 snmpiInTraps 0 snmpOutTooBigs 0 snmpOutNoSuchNames 1 snmpOutBadValues 0 snmpOutReadOnlys 0 snmpOutGenErrs 1 snmpOutGetRequests 0 snmpOutGetNexts 0 snmpOutSetRequests 0 snmpOutGetResponses 150093 snmpOutTraps 4 snmpSilentDrops 0 snmpProxyDrops 0 Table 5 31 SNMP Statistics stats snmp Statistics Description snmpInPkts The total number of Messages delivered to the SNMP entity from the transport service snmpInBadVersions The total number of SNMP Messages which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and were for an
135. ave configuration changes the changes are saved to the active configuration block The configuration being replaced by the save is first copied to the backup configuration block If you do not want the previous configuration block copied to the backup configuration block enter the following instead save n You can decide which configuration you want to run the next time you reset the switch Your options include E The active configuration block E The backup configuration block E Factory default configuration You can view all pending configuration changes that have been applied but not saved to flash memory using the diff flash command It is a global command that can be executed from any menu For instructions on selecting the configuration to run at the next system reset see Selecting a Configuration Block on page 336 174 The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg sys System Configuration System Menu syslog Syslog Menu sshd SSH Server Menu radius RADIUS Authentication Menu tacacs TACACS Authentication Menu ldap LDAP Authentication Menu ntp NTP Server Menu ssnmp System SNMP Menu access System Access Menu dat S system dat tim S system tim timezon Set system timezone daylight savings olddst Set system DST for US idl Set timeout for idle CLI sessions notice Set login notice bannr Set logi
136. ay 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg sys ldap LDAP Server Configuration LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol is an authentication protocol that allows a remote access server to forward a user s logon password to an authentication server to deter mine whether access can be allowed to a given system LDAP Server Menu prisrv Set IP address of primary LDAP server secsrv Set IP address of secondary LDAP server port Set LDAP port number retries Set number of LDAP server retries timeout Set timeout value of LDAP server retries domain Set domain name telnet Enable disable LDAP backdoor for telnet ssh http on Enable LDAP authentication off Disable LDAP authentication cur Display current LDAP settings Table 6 7 LDAP Server Menu Options cfg sys Idap Command Syntax and Usage prisrv lt P address gt Defines the primary LDAP server address secsrv lt IP address gt Defines the secondary LDAP server address port lt LDAP port configure default 389 gt Enter the number of the TCP port to be configured between 1 65000 The default is 389 retries lt LDAP server retries 1 3 gt Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different LDAP server The default is 3 requests timeout lt LDAP server timeout seconds 4 15 gt Sets the amount of time in seconds before a LDAP server authentication attempt is considered to have f
137. ber from 1 to 31 To keep the current day press lt Enter gt 5 Enter the hour of the current system time at the prompt System Time Enter hour in 24 hour format 18 Enter the hour as a number from 00 to 23 To keep the current hour press lt Enter gt 6 Enter the minute of the current time at the prompt Enter minutes 55 Enter the minute as a number from 00 to 59 To keep the current minute press lt Enter gt 7 Enter the seconds of the current time at the prompt Enter seconds 37 Enter the seconds as a number from 00 to 59 To keep the current second press lt Enter gt The system displays the date and time settings System clock set to 8 55 36 Wed Jan 3 2007 43W7774 May 2007 First Time Configuration 35 Alteon OS Command Reference 8 Turn Spanning Tree Protocol on or off at the prompt Spanning Tree Current Spanning Tree Group 1 setting ON Turn Spanning Tree Group 1 OFF y n Enter y to turn off Spanning Tree or enter n to leave Spanning Tree on Setup Part 2 Port Configuration NoTE When configuring port options for your switch some of the prompts and options may be different 1 Select the port to configure or skip port configuration at the prompt Port Config Enter port INT1 14 MGT EXT1 4 NoTE The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the sc
138. ble enable When enabled the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same VLAN A port is considered active if it has a link and is forwarding traffic This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master This command is disabled by default cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router 298 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 vrrp group Virtual Router Group Configuration VRRP Virtual Router Group Menu track Priority Tracking Menu vrid Set virtual router ID if Set interface number prio Set renter priority adver Set advertisement interval preem Enable or disable preemption ena Enable virtual router dis Disable virtual router del Delete virtual router cur Display current VRRP virtual router configuration The Virtual Router Group menu is used for associating all virtual routers into a single logical virtual router which forces all virtual routers on the GbE Switch Module to either be master or backup as a group A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address On each VRRP capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual router ID and IP address NoTE This option is required to be configured only when using at least
139. bution configuration Table 6 77 BGP Redistribution Menu Options cfg I3 bgp peer redist Command Syntax and Usage metric lt metric 1 4294967294 gt none Sets default metric of advertised routes default none import originate redistribute Sets default route action Defaults routes can be configured as import originate redistribute or none None No routes are configured Import Import these routes Originate The switch sends a default route to peers if it does not have any default routes in its routing table Redistribute Default routes are either configured through default gateway or learned through other protocols and redistributed to peer If the routes are learned from default gateway configura tion you have to enable static routes since the routes from default gateway are static routes Simi larly if the routes are learned from a certain routing protocol you have to enable that protocol in this redistribute submenu rip disable enable Enables or disables advertising RIP routes ospf disable enable Enables or disables advertising OSPF routes fixed disable enable Enables or disables advertising fixed routes static disable enable Enables or disables advertising static routes current Displays current redistribution configuration 280 The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 bgp aggr lt aggregation number gt BGP Aggregation
140. cant Supplicant to an initial EAP Request and the response is something other than EAP NAK Indicates that the Supplicant can respond to the Authen ticator s chosen EAP method 128 m The Statistics Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 5 4 802 1x Authenticator Diagnostics of a Port stats port 8021 x Statistics Description backendAuthSuc Total number of times that the state machine receives an Accept message cesses from the Authentication Server Indicates that the Supplicant has success fully authenticated to the Authentication Server backendAuthFails Total number of times that the state machine receives a Reject message from the Authentication Server Indicates that the Supplicant has not authenticated to the Authentication Server stats port lt port alias or number gt brg Bridging Statistics This menu option enables you to display the bridging statistics of the selected port Bridging statistics for port INT1 dot1PortInFrames 63242584 dot1PortOutFrames 63277826 dot1lPortInDiscards 0 dot1TpLearnedEntryDiscards 0 dot1StpPortForwardTransitions 0 Table 5 5 Bridging Statistics of a Port stats port brg Statistics Description dot1PortInFrames The number of frames that have been received by this port from its seg ment A frame received on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protoc
141. cast Router Menu igmpflt IGMP Filtering Menu adv IGMP Advanced Menu on Globally turn IGMP ON off Globally turn IGMP OFF cur Display current IGMP configuration Table 6 79 describes the commands used to configure basic IGMP parameters Table 6 79 IGMP Menu Options cfg l3 igmp Command Syntax and Usage snoop Displays the IGMP Snoop Menu To view menu options see page 283 relay Displays the IGMP Relay Menu To view menu options see page 285 mrouter Displays the Static Multicast Router Menu To view menu options see page 287 igmpflt Displays the IGMP Filtering Menu To view menu options see page 288 adv Displays the IGMP Advanced Menu To view menu options see page 291 on Globally turns IGMP on off Globally turns IGMP off cur Displays the current IGMP configuration parameters 282 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 igmp snoop IGMP Snooping Configuration IGMP Snoop Menu igmpv3 IGMP Version3 Snoop Menu mrto Set multicast router timeout aggr Aggregate IGMP report srcip Set source ip to use when proxying GSQ add Add VLAN s to IGMP Snooping rem Remove VLAN s from IGMP Snooping clear Remove all VLAN s from IGMP Snooping ena Enable IGMP Snooping dis Disable IGMP Snooping cur Display current IGMP Snooping configuration IGMP Snooping allows the switch to fo
142. ccnanstateeenevatss 322 TASH caccs5nicyycess vesedsnenssasnsssseeseuees iiousaevveneenteevaans 236 time SOCUP ics ine A E E EEEE EE E 35 System Ophis isssin siinses esise sriss 176 timeout radius Server ccccccceceeeeesseseeecececeeeeeeeaeeees 180 timeouts idle CONNECTION secsecescccsecescesseecesescesees 29 timers kickoff cccccceeeececcececeeceeeeeeeseesceceeeeeees 157 tnport system option trace buffer traceroute Tracking VRRP aeree r ia E OEE EE ERE Sas 296 transmit flow control cssceeeseseseseeneeeees 36 211 Trunk Group Information eeeeeesseeeeesseeceeeeees 93 trunk hash algorithm eeesesesseeesseeeeeseeeeeaes 236 tx flow control onen a e EE Eai 36 type of area OSPE or a E EE RN E 268 type parametrs v 52 cis svehese wananvenybecinevenn stesascavesurbesye 98 typographic conventions manual esseeeeeeeee 16 AOI al E E E cause cecencecdyadostersnsdessaternsten 187 unknown UNK port state ccccesssceceeseesreeeeeees 71 Unscheduled System Dump eeseceeesteeeeeees 352 upgrade switch software ceesseeseeeeeeseeeeeeeee 331 user access control configuration s s s 205 USET ACCOUNE coc acasicessesessharscienesusssecegnseete vere rerni usrpw system option Uuencode Flash Dump V VELDOSE oii Eae e R E RE E EEES 51 virtual router CESCTIPTION s205cecenueebedevesdsebdatieessaveedneces priority
143. ch Module increments priority by 2 for each E ports Active ports on the same VLAN increments priority by 2 for each E vrs Number of virtual routers in master mode on the switch 43W7774 May 2007 373 Alteon OS Command Reference VIR Virtual Interface Router Virtual Router VRID Virtual Router Identifier VRRP Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol 374 m Glossary A VRRP address that is an IP interface address shared between two or more virtual routers A shared address between two devices utilizing VRRP as defined in RFC 2338 One vir tual router is associated with an IP interface This is one of the IP interfaces that the switch is assigned All IP interfaces on the GbE Switch Module must be in a VLAN If there is more than one VLAN defined on the GbE Switch Module then the VRRP broadcasts will only be sent out on the VLAN of which the associated IP interface is a member In VRRP a value between 1 and 1024 that is used by each virtual router to create its MAC address and identify its peer for which it is sharing this VRRP address The standard VRRP MAC address as defined in the RFC is 00 00 5E 00 01 VRID For virtual rout ers with a VRID greater than 255 the following block of MAC addresses is allocated 00 0F 6A 9A 40 00 00 0F 6A 9A 47 FF If you have a VRRP address shared between two switches then the VRID must be identi cal on both switches so each virtual router on each switch knows with whom to share
144. command l s seses m ETON S A N E A nse flow controlscisencsscoisinseicgsiaeesenissigisensse Gigabit Ethernet esesseeeeeseoereeroseereessseeees IGMP seinieni taseen dues divsevbesesuliscdeoote IP static route saentas LDAP karire e operating mode tes port link speed eee eeeseseeeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeees POLE MITTOTING s veceeveceeseceastecstecsevensestesevenss port trunking s c secsscerenseeasonscdenssssesasenss RIP recipe cone ctanaccsenavesdivd vst tiecacteassueevesaestienss save changes setup setup command SNMP switch IP address eeseceeesseceeeeeeeneeeeees 250 TACACS Forrai E EErEE ES Soe 182 user PASSWOT eeeeeesseeceeeeeeesseeeeeeeesesaees 205 view ChaNges secceeesceeeeseeeees E VLAN default PVID 209 VLAN IP interface eeeeeees wee 250 VLAN tagging n cccecsrcesenisasveceevessssessintess 210 VRRP erae aeaoe SENO ONE AEAEE EEEE 294 configuration block active backup factory selection configuration menu configuring routing information protocol 264 connecting ViA CONSOLE see snascsccenscccdscesesatesveancevcbeveasseeeeees 20 console port COMMECHIL se sxacesseerseeredoensaccesdoasesversseasneeesees 20 COS queue information cc eeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeenes 117 cost STP information ccceseseeesseneeee 87 89 92 STP port options sperte 231 CPU Stati sth CS poid eninge giano ie inis 163 CPU utilization sisisihin inesi 163 cur system option
145. configured on the GbE Switch Mod ule with the following restrictions E Any physical switch port can belong to no more than one trunk group Up to four ports trunks can belong to the same trunk group E Configure all ports in a trunk group with the same link configuration speed duplex flow control E Trunking from non Alteon devices must comply with Cisco EtherChannel technology By default each trunk group is empty and disabled Table 6 42 Trunk Configuration Menu Options cfg l2 trunk Command Syntax and Usage add lt port alias or number gt Adds a physical port to the current trunk group rem lt port alias or number gt Removes a physical port from the current trunk group ena Enables the current trunk group dis Disables the current trunk group del Removes the current trunk group configuration cur Displays current trunk group parameters 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 235 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 12 thash IP Trunk Hash Configuration IP Trunk Hash Menu set IP Trunk Hash Settings Menu cur Display current IP trunk hash configuration Use the following commands to configure IP trunk hash settings for the GDESM Table 6 43 IP Trunk Hash Menu Options cfg l2 thash Command Syntax and Usage set Displays the Trunk Hash Settings menu To view menu options see page 236 cur Display current trunk hash configuration
146. current VLAN configuration NOTE All ports must belong to at least one VLAN Any port which is removed from a VLAN and which is not a member of any other VLAN is automatically added to default VLAN 1 You cannot remove a port from VLAN 1 if the port has no membership in any other VLAN Also you cannot add a port to more than one VLAN unless the port has VLAN tagging turned on see the tag command on page 209 244 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 12 vlan pvlan lt protocol number gt Protocol based VLAN Configuration VLAN 1 Protocol 1 Menu pty Set protocol type prio Set priority to protocol add Add port to PVLAN rem Remove port from PVLAN del Delete protocol ena Enable protocol dis Disable protocol ports Add Remove a list of ports to from PVLAN tagpvl Enable Disable port tagging for PVLAN taglist Enable tagging a port list for PVLAN cur Display current PVLAN configuration Use this menu to configure Protocol based VLAN PVLAN for the selected VLAN Table 6 51 PVLAN Menu Options cfg l2 vlan pvlan Command Syntax and Usage pty lt Ether2 ISNAP LLC gt lt Ethernet type gt Configures the frame type and the Ethernet type for the selected protocol Ethernet type consists of a 4 digit 16 bit hex code such as 0080 IPv4 prio lt 0 7 gt Configures the priority value for this PVLAN add Adds a port to the select
147. d Description Sec Model Displays the security model used which is any one of USM SNMPv1 SNMPv2 and SNMPv3 User Name Displays the name for the group Group Name Displays the access name of the group info sys snmpv3 comm SNMPv3 Community Table Information This command displays the community table information stored in the SNMP engine Index Name User Name Tag trapl public viv2only viv2trap Table 4 8 SNMPv3 Community Table Parameters info sys snmpv3 comm Field Description Index Displays the unique index value of a row in this table Name Displays the community string which represents the configuration User Name Displays the User Security Model USM user name Tag Displays the community tag This tag specifies a set of transport endpoints from which a command responder application accepts management requests and to which a command responder applica tion sends an SNMP trap 64 The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference info sys snmpv3 taddr SNMPVv3 Target Address Table Information This command displays the SNMPv3 target address table information which is stored in the SNMP engine Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params trapl 47 81 25 66 162 viv2trap viv2param Table 4 9 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information Parameters info sys snmpv3 taddr Field Description Name Displays the locally arbitr
148. d to gain access rights The level noAuthNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent without authentication and without using a privacy pro tocol The level aut hNoPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent with authentication but without using a privacy protocol The aut hPriv means that the SNMP message will be sent both with authentication and using a privacy protocol match exact prefix If the value is set to exact then all the rows whose contextName exactly matches the prefix are selected If the value is set to prefix then the all the rows where the starting octets of the con textName exactly match the prefix are selected 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 195 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 13 View based Access Control Model Menu Options cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 access Command Syntax and Usage rview lt 32 character view name gt This is a 32 character long read view name that allows you read access to a particular MIB view If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no access is granted wview lt 32 character view name gt This is a 32 character long write view name that allows you write access to the MIB view If the value is empty or if there is no active MIB view having this value then no access is granted nview lt 32 character view name gt This is a 32 character long notify view name that allows you notify access to the MIB view del Delete
149. delivered to the SNMPv 2 entity which were silently dropped because the size of a reply containing an alternate Response PDU with an empty variable bindings field was greater than either a local constraint or the maximum message size associated with the originator of the request snmpProxyDrops The total number of Get Request PDUs GetNext Request PDUs GetBulkRequest PDUs SetRequest PDUs and InformRe quest PDUs delivered to the SNMP entity which were silently dropped because the transmission of the message to a proxy target failed in a man ner such that no Response PDU could be returned 168 The Statistics Menu 43W7774 May 2007 stats ntp NTP Statistics Alteon OS Command Reference Alteon OS uses NTP Network Timing Protocol version 3 to synchronize the switch s internal clock with an atomic time calibrated NTP server With NTP enabled the switch can accurately update its internal clock to be consistent with other devices on the network and generates accu rate syslogs NTP statistics Primary Server Requests Sent 17 Responses Received 17 Updates 1 Secondary Server Requests Sent 0 Responses Received 0 Updates 0 Last update based on response from primary server Last update time 18 04 16 Tue Jul 13 2006 Current system time 18 55 49 Tue Jul 13 2006 Table 5 32 NTP Statistics Parameters stats ntp Field Description Primary Server Requests Sent The total nu
150. dress of the device tries optional is the number of attempts 1 32 msec delay optional is the number of mil liseconds between attempts By default the d or data option for net work ports is in effect If the management port is used specify the m or mgmt option The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying host names see Domain Name System Configuration on page 292 traceroute Use this command to identify the route used for station to station connectiv ity across the network The format is as follows traceroute lt hostname gt lt IP address gt lt max hops 1 32 gt msec delay m mgmt d data Where IP address is the hostname or IP address of the target station max hops optional is the maximum distance to trace 1 16 devices and delay optional is the number of milliseconds for wait for the response By default the d or data option for network ports is in effect If the management port is used specify the m or mgmt option As with ping the DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames pwd Display the command path used to reach the current menu verbose n Sets the level of information displayed on the screen 0 Quiet Nothing appears except errors not even prompts 1 Normal Prompts and requested output are shown but no menus 2 Verbose Everything is shown When used without a value the current setting is displayed telnet This comm
151. e add acl grp lt ACL number or Group number 1 896 gt Adds the specified ACL or ACL Group to the port You can add multiple ACL Groups to a port but the total number of precedence levels allowed is eight rem lt ACL number 1 896 gt Removes the specified ACL or ACL Group from the port cur Displays current ACL QoS parameters 212 The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 12 Layer 2 Configuration Layer 2 Menu 8021x 802 1x Menu mrst Multiple Spanning Tree Rapid Spanning Tree Menu stg Spanning Tree Menu gvrp GVRP configuration menu trunk Trunk Group Menu thash IP Trunk Hash Menu lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu failovr Failover Menu vian VLAN Menu upfast Enable disable Uplink Fast update UplinkFast station update rate bpdugrd Enable disable BPDU Guard macnotif Enable disable MAC address notification eur Display current layer 2 parameters Table 6 28 Layer 2 Configuration Menu cfg l2 Command Syntax and Usage 8021x Displays the 802 1x Configuration Menu To view menu options see page 215 mrst Displays the Rapid Spanning Tree Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Configuration Menu To view menu options see page 221 stg lt group number 1 128 gt Displays the Spanning Tree Configuration Menu To view menu options see page 227 gvrp Displays the Generic VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP
152. e you can access the command line interface using an SSH connection The default setting for SSH access is disabled To establish an SSH connection with the switch run the SSH program on your workstation by issuing the SSH command followed by the switch IP address gt gt ssh lt switch IP address gt If SecurID authentication is required use the following command gt gt ssh 1 ace lt switch IP address gt You will then be prompted to enter your user name and password 43W7774 May 2007 The Command Line Interface W 25 Alteon OS Command Reference Accessing the Switch To enable better switch management and user accountability three levels or classes of user access have been implemented on the GbE Switch Module Levels of access to CLI Web man agement functions and screens increase as needed to perform various switch management tasks Conceptually access classes are defined as follows E User interaction with the switch is completely passive nothing can be changed on the GbE Switch Module Users may display information that has no security or privacy implica tions such as switch statistics and current operational state information E Operators can make temporary changes on the GbE Switch Module These changes are lost when the switch is rebooted reset Operators have access to the switch management fea tures used for daily switch operations Because any changes an operator makes are und
153. e IP Routing Information IP Routing Menu find Show a single route by destination IP address gw Show routes to a single gateway type Show routes of a single type tag Show routes of a single tag if Show routes on a single interface dump Show all routes Using the commands listed below you can display all or a portion of the IP routes currently held in the switch Table 4 23 Route Information Menu Options info I3 route Command Syntax and Usage find lt IP address such as 192 4 17 101 gt Displays a single route by destination IP address gw lt default gateway address such as 192 4 17 44 gt Displays routes to a single gateway type indirect direct local broadcast martian multicast Displays routes of a single type For a description of IP routing types see Table 4 24 on page 98 tag fixed static addr rip ospf bgp broadcast martian multicast Displays routes of a single tag For a description of IP routing types see Table 4 25 on page 99 if lt interface number 1 128 gt Displays routes on a single interface dump Displays all routes configured in the switch For more information see page 98 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu E 97 Alteon OS Command Reference info 13 route dump Show All IP Route Information Status code best Destination ask Gateway Type Tag Metr If FV 606 0 0 255 0 0 0 11 0 0 1 direct fixed 211 e71
154. e or out of the ACL Metering profile Table 6 107 ACL Re mark Menu Options cfg acl acl x re mark Command Syntax and Usage inprof Displays the Re mark In Profile Menu To view menu options see page 315 outprof Displays the Re mark Out of Profile Menu To view menu options see page 317 reset Reset ACL Re mark parameters to their default values cur Displays current Re mark parameters 314 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg acl acl lt ACL number gt re mark inprof Re Marking In Profile Configuration Re marking In Profile Menu uplp Set Update User Priority Menu updscp Set the update DSCP reset Reset update DSCP settings cur Display current settings Table 6 108 ACL Re Mark In Profile Menu cfg acl acl x re mark inprof Command Syntax and Usage upip Displays the Re Mark In Profile Update User Priority Menu To view menu options see page 316 updscp lt 0 63 gt Sets the DiffServ Code Point DSCP of In Profile packets to the selected value reset Resets the update DSCP parameters to their default values cur Displays current Re Mark In Profile parameters 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 315 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg acl acl lt ACL number gt re mark inprof uplp Update User Priority Configuration Update User Priority Menu valu utosp Set the update user prio
155. e Forward Delay 4 30 secs gt Configures the bridge forward delay parameter The forward delay parameter specifies the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from the listening state to the learning state and from the learning state to the forwarding state The range is 4 to 30 seconds and the default is 15 seconds This command does not apply to MSTP see CIST on page 223 aging lt new bridge Aging Time 1 65535 secs 0 to disable gt Configures the forwarding database aging time The aging time specifies the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the for warding database The range is 1 to 65535 seconds and the default is 300 seconds To disable aging set this parameter to 0 cur Displays the current bridge STG parameters When configuring STG bridge parameters the following formulas must be used E 2 fwd 1 gt mxage E 2 hello 1 lt mxage 230 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 12 stg lt STP Group number gt port lt port alias or number gt Spanning Tree Port Configuration Spanning Tree Port EXT1 Menu prior Set port Priority 0 255 cost Set port Path Cost 1 65535 802 1d 1 200000000 MSTP RSTP 0 for auto link Set port link type auto p2p or shared default auto dg Enable disable edge port on Turn port s Spanning Tree ON off
156. e MT state Corresponding states are displayed as INf LVf and MTf Table 4 17 GVRP Port Registrar States State Description IN The GVRP port s Registrar has registered with the VLAN on this network LV The GVRP port s Registrar has received a Leave message The registrar is timing out the GVRP registration on the VLAN If there is no declaration for this VLAN before the Leave timer expires the Registrar state becomes MT empty MT The GVRP port s Registrar has withdrawn from this VLAN on this network info 12 gvrp ring Show GID Port Ring Information PORT RING port EXT4 enabled connected port EXT3 enabled connected The port ring table shows whether individual ports are participating in GVRP as shown above or if the ports are members of a trunk group as shown below PORT RING trunk 1 enabled connected 82 m The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 info 12 8021x 802 1x Information Alteon OS Command Reference System capability Authenticator System status disabled Protocol version 1 Authenticator Backend Port Auth Mode Auth Status PAE State Auth State INT1 force auth authorized initialize initialize INT2 force auth authorized initialize initialize INT3 force auth authorized initialize initialize INT4 force auth authorized initialize initialize INT5 force auth authorized initialize initialize INT6 force auth authorized ini
157. e Maintenance Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 9 1 Maintenance Menu maint Command Syntax and Usage route Displays the IP Route Manipulation Menu To view menu options see page 346 igmp Displays the IGMP Maintenance Menu To view menu options see page 347 uudmp Displays dump information in uuencoded format For details see page 350 ptdmp hostname filename mgmt data Saves the system dump information via TFTP For details see page 351 cldmp Clears dump information from flash memory For details see page 351 panic Dumps MP information to FLASH and reboots For details see page 352 tsdmp Dumps all GbE Switch Module information statistics and configuration You can log the tsdump output into a file pttsdmp Redirects the technical support dump tsdmp to an external TFTP server 43W7774 May 2007 The Maintenance Menu E 341 Alteon OS Command Reference maint sys System Maintenance This menu is reserved for use by IBM Service Support The options are used to perform system debugging System Maintenance Menu flags Set NVRAM flag word Table 9 2 System Maintenance Menu Options maint sys Command Syntax and Usage flags lt new NVRAM flags word as OxXXXXXXXX gt This command sets the flags that are used for debugging purposes by Tech support group 342 m The Maintenance Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Refere
158. e of the error status is noSuchName snmpOutBadValues The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units PDUs which were gen erated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error status field is badValue snmpOutReadOnlys Not in use snmpOutGenErrs The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units PDUs which were gen erated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error status field is genErr snmpOutGetRequests The total number of SNMP Get Request Protocol Data Units PDUs which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity snmpOutGetNexts The total number of SNMP Get Next Protocol Data Units PDUs which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity snmpOutSetRequests The total number of SNMP Set Request Protocol Data Units PDUs which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity snmpOutGet Responses The total number of SNMP Get Response Protocol Data Units PDUs which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity 43W7774 May 2007 The Statistics Menu 167 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 5 31 SNMP Statistics stats snmp Statistics Description snmpOutTraps The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units PDUs which have been generated by the SNMP protocol entity snmpSilentDrops The total number of Get Request PDUs GetNextRequest PDUs GetBulkRequest PDUs SetRequest PDUs and InformRe quest PDUs
159. e page 225 add lt VLAN numbers gt Adds selected VLANs to the CIST default Resets all CIST parameters to their default values cur Displays the current CIST configuration 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 223 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 12 mrst cist brg CIST Bridge Configuration CIST Bridge Menu prior Set CIST bridge Priority 0 65535 mxage Set CIST bridge Max Age 6 40 secs fwd Set CIST bridge Forward Delay 4 30 secs cur Display current CIST bridge parameters CIST bridge parameters are used only when the switch is in MSTP or RSTP mode CIST parameters do not affect operation of STP PVST Table 6 35 CIST Bridge Configuration Menu Options cfg l2 mrst cist brg Command Syntax and Usage prior lt 0 65535 gt Configures the CIST bridge priority The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network is the MSTP root bridge To make this switch the root bridge configure the bridge priority lower than all other switches and bridges on your network The lower the value the higher the bridge priority The range is 0 to 65535 and the default is 32768 mxage lt 6 40 seconds gt Configures the CIST bridge maximum age The maximum age parameter specifies the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfig ures the MSTP network The range is 6 to 40 seconds and the default is 20 seconds
160. e read SNMP access userbbi enable disable Enables or disables user configuration access through the Browser Based Interface BBI tnet enable disable Enables or disables Telnet access This command is enabled by default You will see this command only if you are connected to the switch through a serial connection tnport lt TCP port number gt Sets an optional telnet server port number for cases where the server listens for telnet sessions on a non standard port 202 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 19 System Access Menu Options cfg sys access Command Syntax and Usage tport lt TFTP port number 1 65535 gt Sets the TFTP port for the switch The default is port 69 cur Displays the current system access parameters 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 203 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg sys access mgmt Management Networks Configuration Management Networks Menu add Add mgmt network definition rem Remove mgmt network definition cur Display current mgmt network definitions This menu is used to define IP address ranges which are allowed to access the switch for man agement purposes Table 6 20 Management Network Menu Options cfg sys access mgmt Command Syntax and Usage add lt mgmt network address gt lt mgmt network mask gt Adds a defined network through which switch access is allowed throug
161. e reverts to its default value when the switch is reset timezone Configures the time zone where the switch resides You are prompted to select your location con tinent country region by the timezone wizard Once a region is selected the switch updates the time to reflect local changes to Daylight Savings Time etc olddst enable disable Enables or disables use of the Daylight Saving Time DST rules in effect prior to the year 2007 The default value is disabled idle lt idle timeout in minutes gt Sets the idle timeout for CLI sessions from 1 to 60 minutes The default is 5 minutes notice lt max 1024 char multi line login notice gt lt to end gt Displays login notice immediately before the Enter password prompt This notice can contain up to 1024 characters and new lines bannr lt string maximum 80 characters gt Configures a login banner of up to 80 characters When a user or administrator logs into the switch the login banner is displayed It is also displayed as part of the output from the info sys com mand hprompt disable enable Enables or disables displaying of the host name system administrator s name in the Command Line Interface CLI reminder disable enable Enables or disables reminder messages in the CLI The default value is enabled cur Displays the current system parameters 176 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference c
162. e setup see Chapter 2 First Time Configuration cfg dump Dump The dump program writes the current switch configuration to the terminal screen To start the dump program at the Configuration prompt enter Configuration dump The configuration is displayed with parameters that have been changed from the default val ues The screen display can be captured edited and placed in a script file which can be used to configure other switches through a Telnet connection When using Telnet to configure a new switch paste the configuration commands from the script file at the command line prompt of the switch The active configuration can also be saved or loaded via TFTP as described on page 322 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 321 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg ptcfg lt TFTP server gt lt filename gt Saving the Active Switch Configuration When the pt cfg command is used the switch s active configuration commands as displayed using cf g dump will be uploaded to the specified script configuration file on the TFTP server To start the switch configuration upload at the Configuration prompt enter Configuration ptcfg lt TFTP server gt lt filename gt Where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname and filename is the name of the target script configuration file NOTE The output file is formatted with line breaks but no carriage returns the file canno
163. e various subnets attached to your switch IP routing between them can be performed entirely within the switch This eliminates the need to send inter subnet communication to an external router device Routing on more complex networks where subnets may not have a direct presence on the GbE Switch Module can be accomplished through configuring static routes or by letting the switch learn routes dynamically This part of the Setup program prompts you to configure the various routing parameters 1 At the prompt enable or disable forwarding for IP Routing Enable IP forwarding y n Enter y to enable IP forwarding To disable IP forwarding enter n To keep the current setting press lt Enter gt Setup Part 5 Final Steps 1 When prompted decide whether to restart Setup or continue Would you like to run from top again y n Enter y to restart the Setup utility from the beginning or n to continue 2 When prompted decide whether you wish to review the configuration changes Review the changes made y n Enter y to review the changes made during this session of the Setup utility Enter n to continue without reviewing the changes We recommend that you review the changes 43W7774 May 2007 First Time Configuration E 41 Alteon OS Command Reference 3 Next decide whether to apply the changes at the prompt Apply the changes y n Enter y to apply the changes or n to con
164. ed PVLAN rem Removes a port from the selected PVLAN del Deletes the selected protocol configuration from the VLAN ena Enables the selected protocol on the VLAN dis Disables the selected protocol on the VLAN ports Defines a list of ports that belong to the selected protocol on this VLAN Enter 0 zero to remove all ports 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 245 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 51 PVLAN Menu Options cfg l2 vlan pvlan Command Syntax and Usage tagpvl enable disable Enables or disables port tagging on this PVLAN taglist Defines a list of ports that will be tagged by the selected protocol on this VLAN Enter empty to disable tagging on all ports by this PVLAN cur Displays current parameters for the selected PVLAN 246 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 12 vlan privlan Private VLAN Configuration privlan Menu type Set Private VLAN type map Associate secondary VLAN with a primary VLAN ena Enable Private VLAN dis Disable Private VLAN cur Display current Private VLAN configuration Use this menu to configure a Private VLAN Table 6 52 Private VLAN Menu Options cfg l2 vlan privian Command Syntax and Usage type primary isolated community Defines the VLAN type as follows m Primary A Private VLAN must have only one primary VLAN The primary VLAN carries
165. ed for weighting the criteria used when modi fying priority levels in the master router election process To view menu options see page 303 294 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 91 VRRP Menu Options cfg l3 vrrp Command Syntax and Usage hotstan disable enable Enables or disables hot standby processing in which two or more switches provide redundancy for each other By default this option is disabled on Globally enables VRRP on this switch off Globally disables VRRP on this switch cur Displays the current VRRP parameters 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 295 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 vrrp vr lt router number gt Virtual Router Configuration VRRP Virtual Router 1 Menu track Priority Tracking Menu vrid Set virtual router ID addr Set IP address if Set interface number prio Set renter priority adver Set advertisement interval preem Enable or disable preemption ena Enable virtual router dis Disable virtual router del Delete virtual router cur Display current VRRP virtual router configuration This menu is used for configuring virtual routers for this switch A virtual router is defined by its virtual router ID and an IP address On each VRRP capable routing device participating in redundancy for this virtual router a virtual router will be configured to share the same virtual rout
166. ed to access the menu option that you want For example the keyboard shortcut to access the Spanning Tree Port Configuration Menu from the Main prompt is as follows Main cfg 12 stg 1 port Command Abbreviation Most commands can be abbreviated by entering the first characters which distinguish the com mand from the others in the same menu or sub menu For example the command shown above could also be entered as follows Main 12 stg 1 po Tab Completion By entering the first letter of a command at any menu prompt and hitting lt Tab gt the CLI will display all commands or options in that menu that begin with that letter Entering additional letters will further refine the list of commands or options displayed If only one command fits the input text when lt Tab gt is pressed that command will be supplied on the command line waiting to be entered If the lt Tab gt key is pressed without any input on the command line the currently active menu will be displayed 54 m Menu Basics 43W7774 May 2007 CHAPTER 4 The Information Menu You can view configuration information for the switch in both the user and administrator command modes This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch infor mation 43W7774 May 2007 55 Alteon OS Command Reference info Information Menu Information Menu sys System Information Menu 12 Layer 2 Information Me
167. ee and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter remove lt VLAN number 1 4094 gt Breaks the association between a VLAN and a spanning tree and requires an external VLAN ID as a parameter clear Removes all VLANs from a spanning tree on Globally enables Spanning Tree Protocol STG is turned on by default off Globally disables Spanning Tree Protocol 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 227 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 37 Spanning Tree Configuration Menu cfg l2 stg Command Syntax and Usage default Restores a spanning tree instance to its default configuration cur Displays current Spanning Tree Protocol parameters 228 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 12 stg lt STP group number gt brg Spanning Tree Bridge Configuration Bridge Spanning Tree Menu prior Set bridge Priority 0 65535 hello Set bridge Hello Time 1 10 secs mxage Set bridge Max Age 6 40 secs fwd Set bridge Forward Delay 4 30 secs aging Set bridge Aging Time 1 65535 secs 0 to disable cur Display current bridge parameters Spanning Tree bridge parameters affect the global STG operation of the switch STG bridge parameters include E Bridge priority Bridge hello time Bridge maximum age Forwarding delay Bridge aging time Table 6 38 Spanning Tree Bridge Menu Options cfg l2 stg brg Command Syntax and Usa
168. ee page 241 vlan on off Globally turns VLAN monitor on or of f When the VLAN Monitor is on the switch automati cally disables only internal ports that belong to the same VLAN as ports in the failover trigger The default value is off on Globally turns Layer 2 failover on off Globally turns Layer 2 failover of f cur Displays current Layer 2 failover parameters 240 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 12 failovr trigger Failover Trigger Configuration Trigger 1 Menu amon Auto Monitor Menu limit Limit of Trigger ena Enable Trigger dis Disable Trigger cur Display current Trigger configuration Table 6 48 Failover Trigger Menu Options cfg l2 failovr trigger Command Syntax and Usage amon Displays the Auto Monitor menu for the selected trigger To view menu options see page 242 limit lt 0 2 gt Configures the minimum number of operational links allowed within each trigger before the trigger initiates a failover event If you enter a value of zero 0 the switch triggers a failover event only when no links in the trigger are operational ena Enables the selected trigger dis Disables the selected trigger cur Displays the current failover trigger settings 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 241 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 12 failovr trigger amon Auto Monitor Configuration
169. eeeeeeeeeeee priority value of the switch interface range NUMBER es oriee eee n a a on SEa redistribution MENU eseseseeeeeeeeersrsesesereser route redistribution configuration spf shortest path first eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeee stub ATCA eerie nnee aE A EER EES summary range configuration ttansit Afeaeisorsnicereenresnkenisrecarueeniss transit delay sicesscncsvascsscseseesssacsesensvessovesescces TYPO seicisvessssesteveleccessueeassancevensieundecuascters ees Wirttial LINK c csccccienssssesiseessvsessoensnerssocsnsnses virtual link configuration ce eeeeeeeee eee virtual neighbor router ID OSPF Database Information 0 OSPF generales erensia i OSPF General Information ceceeeceeeeeeeeeeee OSPF Information ccccsesccceccececeeeeeeeeeeeeenenens OSPF Information Route Codes eseeeeeeee OSPF Statistics s esivicsstecsteeresudadentavevcers secndeeateees P panic command e eieae duce bent E iaai 352 switch and Maintenance Menu option 340 parameters HAS obec sens ct E EEE 99 TYPO AA E E EE TE E 98 Password user access Control ssessesesseereseesssere reeset 205 password administrator ACCOUNL ccssseceesceeeeseeeeeaees 27 GFA es soc 0 20 ical E EE ERE 27 USEF account lt 5 ctsucose ccussudonccespantoss cadsaveesecnesive 26 VRRP authentication cceseceeesesereeeeees 302 PASS WOTGS senenn gesessen oee uie na kanarioa
170. eeeen 57 120 PV LAN ee ie tances henciestnessdeceshaescacstasesencecilees 245 PWG selec e E 51 Q quiet screen display Option esseceeesseeeeeeeees 31 R RADIUS server Menu eeeeeeeesseeeseeeeeneeeeeaes 180 read community string SNMP option 190 6 Index TOCDOOL csesesesssescececeecececescecesceseseseseesnaeees 340 352 receive flow control eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 36 211 reference POTS cceceseecesececeseecessneeceseeeeeesseeeseees 77 referenced port sccisviensucavicestecdenecesvendevecetvenss 101 rematik eraris e ETEO TEE EES 314 restarting switch setup eeeeseeeseeeerrreerrerereereee 34 retries ETONE ME E ETT 180 retry health checks for default gateway 04 251 rip TP route 18 ssviscsnccoctsccseteseceesceserseseeseteecusweces RIP Information RIP information RIP See Routing Information Protocol route StAtiStiCS ceeeeseececeseeeececeeeneceeeeetsaees 145 rotter HOPS sivcisticadvecesvecsevecessenssvecspevensededeenadectevs 279 routing information protocol COMM PUPAL Oies neient Routing Information Protocol RIP OPULONS 6 cscdssesieasccadosnncecensasece ces poisoned reverse se eeeseeeeeeee se Split HOTZON 2 5 cecsepsusteccieneveseseeeesteovensevousece version parameterS sseceesseeeeeees RSTP information eceseeeeeeseseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeees PE flow COMO eesriie errereen biedibensdncesn ee RX TX St
171. efore a TACACS server authentication attempt is consid ered to have failed The default is 5 seconds telnet disable enable Enables or disables the TACACS back door for telnet The telnet command also applies to SSH SCP connections and the Browser Based Interface BBI The default is disabled To obtain the TACACS backdoor password for your GbESM contact your IBM Service and Support line secbd enable disable Enables or disables TACACS secure backdoor access through telnet SSH or HTTP cmap enable disable Enables or disables TACACS privilege level mapping The default value is disabled passch enable disable Enables or disables TACACS password change The default value is disabled chpass_p Configures the password for the primary TACACS server The CLI will prompt you for input chpass_s Configures the password for the secondary TACACS server The CLI will prompt you for input 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 183 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 6 TACACS Server Menu Options cfg sys tacacs Command Syntax and Usage cauth disable enable Enables or disables TACACS command authorization clog disable enable Enables or disables TACACS command logging on Enables the TACACS server This is the default setting off Disables the TACACS server cur Displays current TACACS configuration parameters 184 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 M
172. el User Nam Group Name snmpv1l viv2only viv2grp usm adminsha admingrp snmpCommunity Table Index Name User Name Tag snmpNotify Table Name Tag snmpTargetAddr Table Name Transport Addr Port Taglist Params snmpTargetParams Table Name MP Model User Name Sec Model Sec Level 68 m The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference info sys chassis BladeCenter Chassis Information IBM BladeCenter Chassis Related Information Switch Module Bay 0 Chassis Typ Enterpris POST Results Oxff Management Module Control Default Configuration FALSE Skip Extended Memory Test FALSE Disable External Ports FALSE POST Diagnostics Control Normal Diagnostics Control Register 0x19 Extended Control Register 0x00 Management Module Status Reporting Device PowerUp Complete TRUE Over Current Fault FALSE Fault LED OFF Primary Temperature Warning OK Secondary Temperature Warning OK Status Register 0x40 Extended Status Register 0x01 Chassis information includes details about the BladeCenter chassis and management module settings 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu E 69 Alteon OS Command Reference info sys general General System Information System Information at 0 16 42 Wed Jan 3 2007 Time zone No timezone configured Nortel 10Gb Uplink Ethernet Switch Module Switch is up
173. em Configuration Menu Options cfg sys ntp Command Syntax and Usage prisrv lt NTP Server IP address gt Prompts for the IP addresses of the primary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock secsrv lt NTP Server IP address gt Prompts for the IP addresses of the secondary NTP server to which you want to synchronize the switch clock intrval lt resync interval in minutes gt Specifies the interval that is how often in minutes 1 2880 to re synchronize the switch clock with the NTP server tzone lt time zone offset in HH MM gt Prompts for the NTP time zone offset in hours and minutes of the switch you are synchronizing from Greenwich Mean Time GMT dlight disable enable Disables or enables daylight savings time in the system clock When enabled the switch will add an extra hour to the system clock so that it is consistent with the local clock By default this option is disabled on Enables the NTP synchronization service 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 187 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 8 System Configuration Menu Options cfg sys ntp Command Syntax and Usage off Disables the NTP synchronization service cur Displays the current NTP service settings 188 The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg sys ssnmp System SNMP Configuration System SNMP Menu snmpv3 SNMPv3 Menu n
174. en you perform the save command your new configuration changes are placed in the active configuration block The previous configuration is copied into the backup configuration block There is also a factory configuration block This holds the default configuration set by the factory when your GbE Switch Module was manufactured Under certain circumstances it may be desir able to reset the switch configuration to the default This can be useful when a custom configured GbE Switch Module is moved to a network environment where it will be re configured for a differ ent purpose Use the following procedure to set which configuration block you want the switch to load the next time it is reset 1 Atthe Boot Options prompt enter Boot Options conf 2 Enter the name of the configuration block you want the switch to use The system informs you of which configuration block is currently set to be loaded at the next reset and prompts you to enter a new choice Currently set to use active configuration block on next reset Specify new block to use active backup factory 336 m The Boot Options Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Resetting the Switch You can reset the switch to make your software image file and configuration block changes occur NOTE Resetting the switch causes the Spanning Tree Group to restart This process can be lengthy depending on the topology of your network
175. ent before retransmitting the EAP Request packet from the authentication server The default value is 30 seconds 216 The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 30 802 1x Global Configuration Menu Options cfg l2 8021 x global Command Syntax and Usage svrtmout lt 65535 gt Sets the time in seconds the authenticator waits for a response from the RADIUS server before declaring an authentication timeout The default value is 30 seconds The time interval between transmissions of the RADIUS Access Request packet containing the supplicant s client s EAP Response packet is determined by the current setting of cfg sys radius timeout default is 3 seconds maxreq lt 0 gt Sets the maximum number of times the authenticator retransmits an EAP Request packet to the supplicant client The default value is 2 raperiod lt 604800 gt Sets the time in seconds the authenticator waits before re authenticating a supplicant client when periodic re authentication is enabled The default value is 3600 seconds reauth on off Sets the re authentication status to on or of f The default value is of f default Resets the global 802 1x parameters to their default values cur Displays current global 802 1x parameters 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 217 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 12 8021x global gvlan 802 1x Guest VLAN Configuration 80
176. enu sport Set to filter on TCP UDP source port dport Set to filter on TCP UDP destination port flags Set to filter TCP UDP flags reset Reset all fields cur Display current parameters This menu allows you to define TCP UDP matching criteria for an ACL Table 6 105 TCP UDP Filtering Menu Options cfg acl acl x tcpudp Command Syntax and Usage sport lt source port 1 65535 gt lt mask OxFFFF gt Defines a source port for the ACL If defined traffic with the specified TCP or UDP source port will match this ACL Specify the port number Listed below are some of the well known ports Number Name 20 ftp data 21 ftp 22 ssh 23 telnet 25 smtp 37 time 42 name 43 whois 53 domain 69 tftp 70 gopher 79 finger 80 http dport lt destination port 1 65535 gt lt mask OxFFFF gt Defines a destination port for the ACL If defined traffic with the specified TCP or UDP destina tion port will match this ACL Specify the port number just as with sport above flags lt value 0x0 0x3f gt Defines a TCP UDP flag for the ACL 312 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 105 TCP UDP Filtering Menu Options cfg acl acl x tcpudp Command Syntax and Usage reset Resets the TCP UDP parameters for the ACL to their default values cur Displays the current TCP UDP Filtering parameters cfg acl acl lt ACL number gt meter ACL Metering Configu
177. eon OS Command Reference stats port lt port alias or number gt 8021x 802 1x Authenticator Diagnostics This menu option enables you to display the 802 1x authenticator diagnostics of the selected port Authen authl authl ticator Diagnostics EntersConnecting EapLogoffsWhileConnecting authl auth authl authE EntersAuthenticating authSuccessesWhileAuthenticating authTimeoutsWhileAuthenticating authFailWhileAuthenticating ReauthsWhileAuthenticating FapStartsWhileAuthenticating FapLogoffWhileAuthenticating auth authl ReauthsWhileAuthenticated EapStartsWhileAuthenticated authl RapLogoffWhileAuthenticated backendResponses backendAccessChallenges backendOtherRequestsToSupplicant backendNonNakResponsesFromSupplicant backendAuthSuccesses backendAuthFails 1820 463 458 oOowoo 0 923 460 460 460 5 458 Table 5 4 802 1x Authenticator Diagnostics of a Port stats port 8021x Statistics Description authEntersConnect Total number of times that the state machine transitions to the ing CONNECTING state from any other state authEapLogoffsWhi Total number of times that the state machine transitions from leConnecting CONNECTING to DISCONNECTED as a result of receiving an EAPOL Logoff message authEntersAuthen Total number of times that the state machine transitions from ticating CONNECTING to AUTHENTICATING as a result of an EAP R
178. er ID and IP address Virtual routers are disabled by default Table 6 92 VRRP Virtual Router Menu Options cfg l3 vrrp vr Command Syntax and Usage track Displays the VRRP Priority Tracking Menu for this virtual router Tracking is an Alteon OS pro prietary extension to VRRP used for modifying the standard priority system used for electing the master router To view menu options see page 298 vrid lt virtual router ID 1 1024 gt Defines the virtual router ID This is used in conjunction with addr below to define a virtual router on this switch To create a pool of VRRP enabled routing devices which can provide redun dancy to each other each participating VRRP device must be configured with the same virtual router one that shares the same vrid and addr combination The vrid for standard virtual routers where the virtual router IP address is not the same as any virtual server can be any integer between 1 and 1024 The default value is 1 All vrid values must be unique within the VLAN to which the virtual router s IP interface belongs addr lt I P address such as 192 4 17 101 gt Defines the IP address for this virtual router using dotted decimal notation This is used in conjunc tion with the vrid above to configure the same virtual router on each participating VRRP device The default address is 0 0 0 0 296 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 92
179. er network rather than simply setting a default route from your border router s to your upstream provider s You can configure BGP either within an autonomous system or between different autonomous systems When run within an autonomous system it s called internal BGP IBGP When run between different autonomous systems it s called external BGP eBGP BGP is defined in RFC 1771 The BGP Menu enables you to configure the switch to receive routes and to advertise static routes fixed routes and virtual server IP addresses with other internal and external routers In the current Alteon OS implementation the GbE Switch Module does not advertise BGP routes that are learned from other BGP speakers The BGP menu option is turned off by default NoTE Fixed routes are subnet routes There is one fixed route per IP interface Table 6 75 Border Gateway Protocol Menu cfg l3 ogp Command Syntax and Usage peer lt peer number 1 16 gt Displays the menu used to configure each BGP peer Each border router within an autonomous system exchanges routing information with routers on other external networks To view menu options see page 278 aggr lt aggregate number 1 16 gt Displays the Aggregation Menu To view menu options see page 281 276 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 75 Border Gateway Protocol Menu cfg l3 ogp Command Syntax and Usage as lt
180. er the current administrator password at the prompt Only the administrator can change the user password Entering the administrator password confirms your authority Changing USER password validation required Enter current administrator password 7 Enter the new user password at the prompt Enter new user password 8 Enter the new user password again at the prompt R nter new user password 9 Apply and save your changes System apply System save 46 First Time Configuration 43W7774 May 2007 CHAPTER 3 Menu Basics The GbE Switch Module s Command Line Interface CLI is used for viewing switch informa tion and statistics In addition the administrator can use the CLI for performing all levels of switch configuration To make the CLI easy to use the various commands have been logically grouped into a series of menus and sub menus Each menu displays a list of commands and or sub menus that are available along with a summary of what each command will do Below each menu is a prompt where you can enter any command appropriate to the current menu This chapter describes the Main Menu commands and provides a list of commands and short cuts that are commonly available from all the menus within the CLI 43W7774 May 2007 47 Alteon OS Command Reference The Main Menu The Main Menu appears after a successful connection and login The following table show
181. erface configuration The RIP Menu is used for configuring Routing Information Protocol parameters This option is turned off by default NoTE Do not configure RIP1 parameters if your routing equipment uses RIP version 2 Table 6 66 RIP Interface Menu Options cfg I3 rip if Command Syntax and Usage version 1 2 both Configures the RIP version used by this interface The default value is version 1 supply disable enable This command is disabled by default When enabled the switch supplies routes to other routers listen disable enable This command is disabled by default When enabled the switch learns routes from other routers poison disable enable This command is disabled by default When enabled the switch uses split horizon with poisoned reverse When disabled the switch uses only split horizon split disable enable Enables or disables split horizon 264 The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 66 RIP Interface Menu Options cfg I3 rip if Command Syntax and Usage trigg disable enable Enables or disables Triggered Updates Triggered Updates are used to speed convergence When enabled Triggered Updates force a router to send update messages immediately even if it is not yet time for the update message The default value is disabled mcast disable enable Enables or disables multicast updates of the routing table using addre
182. erhciveassciecnevsngetecpesessets SAMP V3 a rnar a aae E A save tauesceetter sens software MIA SE sisir dances iiei en iker ENE 331 image file and version seeeeesseeeeeeee 58 71 spanning tree configuration eseseeeessssessseereeeeteressrre reeet 227 Spanning Tree Protocol sssseseeeeseeerreeerrerereerenee 93 bridge aging Option cee ceesseeeeeseeeeeeeeees 230 bridge parameters eeseceeesseeeeeseeeeeeeeees 229 bridge priority eeeeceeeeseceeseeeeeseeeeeeees 86 92 port cost OPLION sc eeeseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 231 port priority Option eee eeeseeceeseeeeeeeeees 231 root bridge eceseeceeeeesteececeeeseeeees 86 92 229 Setup Om Off srrorssorrrireieeereseen ietekas 36 switch reset effect sceeeseeecseeeeeseeeeeenees 337 SPHENOTIZON ssiri eessen sri eseuen 264 stacking commands CLI ccceesseseeeceeeeeneees 54 starting switch setup essesessseeseseeserreserrsreeesrenee 33 state STP information cc0seeeeeeee 87 89 92 static IP route Ag naea a oE EiS 99 static route TOM AEA E T 253 statis route BA EE A A EET A 253 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference statistics management PrOCeSSOL eesseeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 160 Statistics Ment cccccssceceeesesececeeeeeneeeeeeesenees 123 stopping switch setup ceeeseeeeeseeeceeeeeeeeeeetenee 34 subnet address maskconfiguration TP subnet address
183. ersion received bad zeros received bad src port received bad src IP received packets from self received OOOO fo 43W7774 May 2007 The Statistics Menu E 159 Alteon OS Command Reference stats mp Management Processor Statistics MP specific Statistics Menu pkt Show Packet stats tcb Show All TCP control blocks in use ucb Show All UDP control blocks in use cpu Show CPU utilization Table 5 26 Management Processor Statistics Menu Options stats mp Command Syntax and Usage pkt Displays packet statistics to check for leads and load To view a sample output and a description of the stats see page 161 tcb Displays all TCP control blocks that are in use To view a sample output and a description of the stats see page 162 ucb Displays all UDP control blocks that are in use To view a sample output see page 163 cpu Displays CPU utilization for periods of up to 1 4 and 64 seconds To view a sample output and a description of the stats see page 163 160 The Statistics Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference stats mp pkt MP Packet Statistics Packet counts allocs 1722684 frees 1722684 mediums 0 mediums hi watermark 4 jumbos 0 jumbos hi watermark 0 smalls 0 smalls hi watermark 8 failures 0 Table 5 27 Packet Statistics stats mp pkt Statistics Description allocs Total number of packet allocations from
184. es the USM user entries cur Displays the USM user entries cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 view SNMPv3 View Configuration SNMPv3 vacmViewTreeFamily 1 Menu name Set view name tree Set MIB subtree OID which defines a family of view subtrees mask Set view mask type Set view type del Delete vacmViewTreeFamily entry cur Display current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration Table 6 12 SNMPv3 View Menu Options cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 view Command Syntax and Usage name lt 32 character name gt This command defines the name for a family of view subtrees up to a maximum of 32 characters tree lt object identifier such as 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 1 0 max 32 characters gt This command defines MIB tree a string of maximum 32 characters which when combined with the corresponding mask defines a family of view subtrees mask lt bitmask max size 32 characters gt This command defines the bit mask which in combination with the corresponding tree defines a family of view subtrees type included excluded This command indicates whether the corresponding instances of vacmViewTreeFamilySub tree and vacmViewTreeFamilyMask define a family of view subtrees which is included in or excluded from the MIB view del Deletes the vacmViewTreeFamily group entry cur Displays the current vacmViewTreeFamily configuration 194 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference
185. eseceeeeseeeeees 328 BPDU See Bridge Protocol Data Unit bridge parameter menu for STP eeesseeeeee 227 bridge Priority niesen eorne Ees 86 92 Bridge Protocol Data Unit BPDU 86 92 STP transmission frequency ceeeeeeeeeee 229 Bridge Spanning Tree parameters eeeee 229 Alteon OS Command Reference broadcast IP route tag nnie 99 IP to t type 5 2ccsecsasetsssesersneersnderseicnsensnsetease 98 Browser Based Interface cscsesesessssecceeceeeeees 19 C capture dump information to a file Cisco Ether Channel cccccceeeeeeeeeees Ls CIST information ccccccceceececeeceesessseeeseeeeeees clear ARP entries ccccccccccececeececeecececeseeesnensaes 345 dump information ceeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeee 351 FDB entty routing table command help s cscsscseissessecsssocessnconsntesscesetetesse Command Line Interface CLI 19 to 29 32 47 commands ADbreViatiONS ccc ceceeececeeeeceeeesesesesetserteeees 54 global commands shortcuts stacking tab Completion ccccccececeeeeceeseeeseeeeeneteneeees 2 Index configuration BOD era E ENTENEN 215 administrator password sseeesseeeereeereeereee 205 apply Changes cccssceceeseceesseecesseeeesseees 174 CST rere rE 223 default gateway interval for health checks 251 default gateway IP address dump
186. esponse Identity message being received from the Supplicant authSuccessesWhi Total number of times that the state machine transitions from leAuthenticating AUTHENTICATING to AUTHENTICATED as a result of the Backend Authentication state machine indicating successful authentication of the Supplicant 43W7774 May 2007 The Statistics Menu 127 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 5 4 802 1x Authenticator Diagnostics of a Port stats port 802 1x Statistics Description authTimeoutsWhile Total number of times that the state machine transitions from Authenticating AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING as a result of the Backend Authen tication state machine indicating authentication timeout authFailWhileAu Total number of times that the state machine transitions from thenticating AUTHENTICATING to HELD as a result of the Backend Authenti cation state machine indicating authentication failure authReauthswWhile Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHEN Authenticating TICATING to ABORTING as a result of a re authentication request authEapStartsWhi Total number of times that the state machine transitions from leAuthenticating AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING as a result of an EAPOL Start message being received from the Supplicant authEapLogof fWhi Total number of times that the state machine transitions from leAuthenticating AUTHENTICATING to ABORTING as a result of an EAPOL Logoff mes
187. esponse packets that have been transmitted dnsBadRequests The total number of DNS request packets received that were dropped stats 13 icmp ICMP Statistics ICMP statistics icmpInMsgs icmpInDestUnreachs icmpInParmProbs icmpiInRedirects icmpInEchoReps icmpInAddrMaskReps icmpOutErrors icmpOutTimeExcds icmpOutSrcQuenchs icmpOutEchos icmpOutTimestamps icmpOutAddrMasks icmpInTimestampReps 245802 41 0 0 244350 25377 D O Sy OO OS icmptIn Frrors icmpIn imeExcds icmpInSrcQuenchs icmptIn icmpIn Echos Timestamps icmpInAddrMasks icmpOu icmpOu icmpOu icmpOu icmpOu icmpOu icmpOu sgs DestUnreachs ParmProbs Redirects tEchoReps t choc ocr oct tAddrMaskReps tTimestampReps 1393 25381 D O 100 G OO OO OO Table 5 19 ICMP Statistics stats I3 icmp Statistics Description icmpInMsgs The total number of ICMP messages which the entity the switch received Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpiInErrors icmpInErrors The number of ICMP messages which the entity the switch received but determined as having ICMP specific errors bad ICMP checksums bad length and so forth 146 The Statistics Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 5 19 ICMP Statistics stats I3 icmp Statistics Description icmpInDestUnreach
188. ess through one of the following methods E Manually through the BladeCenter management module E Automatically through the IBM Director Configuration Wizard available in Director release 4 21 Note If you change the IP address of the GbE Switch Module make sure that the switch module and the management module both reside on the same subnet 22 m The Command Line Interface 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference 5 Enable the following features in the management module E External Ports I O Module Tasks gt Admin Power Restart gt Advance Setup E External management over all ports Configuration gt Advanced Configuration This setting is required if you want to access the management network through the exter nal ports on the GbE Switch Module The default value is Disabled for both features If these features are not already enabled change the value to Enabled then Save Note In Advanced Configuration gt Advanced Setup enable Preserve new IP configura tion on all switch resets to retain the switch s IP interface when you restore factory defaults This setting preserves the management port s IP address in the management module s memory so you maintain connectivity to the management module after a reset You can now start a Telnet session Browser Based Interface Web session a Secure Shell ses sion or a secure HTTPS session to the GbE Switch Module Connecting to the Switch v
189. ete Deletes OSPF interface cur Displays the current settings for OSPF interface 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 271 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 ospf virt lt link number gt OSPF Virtual Link Configuration OSPF Virtual Link 1 Menu aindex Set area index hello Set hello interval in seconds dead Set dead interval in seconds trans Set transit delay in seconds retra Set retransmit interval in seconds nbr Set router ID of virtual neighbor key Set authentication key mdkey Set MD5 key ID nabl Enable interfac disable Disable interface delet Delete interfac cur Display current OSPF interface configuration Table 6 71 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options cfg I3 ospf virt Command Syntax and Usage aindex lt area index 0 2 gt Configures the OSPF area index hello lt value 1 65535 gt Configures the authentication parameters of a hello packet in seconds dead lt value 1 65535 gt Configures the health parameters of a hello packet in seconds Default is 60 seconds trans lt value 1 3600 gt Configures the delay in transit in seconds Default is one second retra lt value 1 3600 gt Configures the retransmit interval in seconds Default is five seconds nbr lt NBR router ID IP address gt Configures the router ID of the virtual neighbor Default is 0 0 0 0 key lt password gt Configures the password up to eigh
190. f 19 19 n 32768 SS gt INT4 off 20 20 n 32768 E LACP dump includes the following information for each external port in the GbESM E lacp Displays the port s LACP mode active passive or off E adminkey Displays the value of the port s adminkey E operkey Shows the value of the port s operational key 78 m The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference E selected Indicates whether the port has been selected to be part of a Link Aggregation Group E prio Shows the value of the port priority E attached ager Displays the aggregator associated with each port E trunk This value represents the LACP trunk group number info 12 gvrp GVRP Information GVRP Information Menu gvr Display GVRP status gvd Display GVD database gid Display GID state machines ring Display GID port ring dump Display all GVRP information Use these commands to display Generic VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP status informa tion for the GbE Switch Module Table 4 15 GVRP Information Menu Options info l2 gvrp Command Syntax and Usage gvr Displays general GVRP status information gvd Displays GVRP VLAN database information For details see page 80 gid Displays GARP Information Declaration GID information For details see page 81 ring Displays information about the GID port ring For details see page 82 dump Displays a summary of GVRP
191. fg sys syslog System Host Log Configuration Syslog Menu host Set IP address of first syslog host host2 Set IP address of second syslog host sever Set the severity of first syslog host sever2 Set the severity of second syslog host facil Set facility of first syslog host facil2 Set facility of second syslog host console Enable disable console output of syslog messages log Enable disable syslogging of features cur Display current syslog settings Table 6 3 Host Log Menu Options cfg sys syslog Command Syntax and Usage host lt new syslog host IP address such as 192 4 17 223 gt Sets the IP address of the first syslog host host2 lt new syslog host IP address such as 192 4 17 223 gt Sets the IP address of the second syslog host sever lt syslog host local severity 0O 7 gt This option sets the severity level of the first syslog host displayed The default is 7 which means log all severity levels sever2 lt syslog host local severity 0 7 gt This option sets the severity level of the second syslog host displayed The default is 7 which means log all severity levels facil lt syslog host local facility 0 7 gt This option sets the facility level of the first syslog host displayed The default is 0 facil2 lt syslog host local facility 0 7 gt This option sets the facility level of the second syslog host displayed The default is 0 console di
192. fied TCP Statistics stats mp tcb Statistics Description 10ad41e8 10ad5790 Memory 0 0 0 0 47 81 27 5 Destination IP address 0 1171 Destination port 0 0 0 0 47 80 23 243 Source IP 80 23 Source port listen established State 162 m The Statistics Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference stats mp ucb UCB Statistics All UDP allocated control blocks 161 listen stats mp cpu CPU Statistics This menu option enables you to display the CPU utilization statistics CPU utilization cpuUtillSecond 53 cpuUtil4Seconds 54 cpuUtil64Seconds 54 Table 5 29 CPU Statistics stats mp cpu Statistics Description cpuUtillSecond The utilization of MP CPU over 1 second It shows the percentage cpuUtil4Seconds The utilization of MP CPU over 4 seconds It shows the percentage cpuUtil64Seconds The utilization of MP CPU over 64 seconds It shows the percentage 43W7774 May 2007 The Statistics Menu E 163 Alteon OS Command Reference stats acl ACL Statistics ACL Menu acl Display ACL stats dump Display all available ACL stats clracl Clear ACL stats ACL statistics are described in the following table Table 5 30 ACL Statistics Menu Options stats acl Command Syntax and Usage acl lt 896 gt Displays the Access Control List Statistics for a specific ACL For details see page 164 dump Displays all ACL st
193. find lt MAC address gt lt VLAN gt Displays a single database entry by its MAC address You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device Enter the MAC address using the format xx xx xx xx xx xx For example 08 00 20 12 34 56 You can also enter the MAC address using the format xxxxxxxxXXXxXx For example 080020123456 port lt port number or alias gt Displays all FDB entries for a particular port vlan lt VLAN number 1 4095 gt Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN 76 m The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 4 13 FDB Information Menu Options info l2 fdb Command Syntax and Usage state unknown ignore forward flood trunk ifmac Displays all FDB entries of a particular state dump Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database For more information see page 77 info 12 fdb dump Show All FDB Information MAC address VLAN Port State 00 04 38 90 54 18 1 EXT4 FWD 00 09 6b 9b 01 5f 1 INT13 FWD 00 09 6b ca 26 ef 4095 GT FWD 00 0f 06 ec 3b 00 4095 GT FWD 00 11 43 c4 79 83 1 EXT4 FWD 00 11 9 36 71 00 4095 GT FWD 00 13 0a 4d 3c 00 4095 MGT FWD An address that is in the forwarding FW D state means that it has been learned by the switch When in the trunking TRK state the port field represents the trunk group number If the state for the port is listed as unknown UNK the MAC address has not yet been learned by the
194. for switch management He or she can view switch status information and statistics but cannot make any configuration changes The user password can have a maximum of 15 characters opw Sets the operator oper password The operator manages all functions of the switch He or she can view all switch information and statistics and can reset ports or the entire switch The operator password can have a maximum of 15 characters admpw Sets the administrator admin password The super user administrator has complete access to all menus information and configuration commands on the GbE Switch Module including the abil ity to change both the user and administrator passwords Access includes oper functions strongpw Displays the Strong User Password Menu To view menu options see page 207 cur Displays the current user status 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 205 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg sys access user uid lt 0 gt System User ID Configuration User ID 1 Menu cos Set class of service nam Set user nam pswd Set user password ena Enable user ID dis Disable user ID del Delete user ID cur Display current user configuration Table 6 22 User ID Configuration Menu Options cfg sys access user uid Command Syntax and Usage cos lt user oper admin gt Sets the Class of Service to define the user s authority level Alteon OS defines these levels
195. fp Fiber Port SFP Status Port Device TX Enable RX Signal TX Fault EXT3 SR XFP enabled LOST N A lt XFP NOT APPROVED EXT4 CU SFP enabled N A none This command displays the status of the Small Form Pluggable SFP module on each Fiber External Port info dump Information Dump Use the dump command to dump all switch information available from the Information Menu 10K or more depending on your configuration This data is useful for tuning and debugging switch performance If you want to capture dump data to a file set your communication software on your worksta tion to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands 122 The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 CHAPTER 5 The Statistics Menu You can view switch performance statistics in both the user and administrator command modes This chapter discusses how to use the command line interface to display switch statistics stats Statistics Menu Statistics Menu port Port Stats Menu 12 Layer 2 Stats Menu 13 Layer 3 Stats Menu mp MP specific Stats Menu acl ACL Stats Menu snmp Show SNMP stats ntp Show NTP stats clrmp Clear all MP related stats dump Dump all stats 43W7774 May 2007 123 Alteon OS Command Reference The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 5 1 with pointers to detailed information Table 5 1 Statistics Men
196. ftware Image to Run 334 Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch 335 Selecting a Configuration Block 336 Resetting the Switch 337 Accessing the ISCLI 337 The Maintenance Menu 339 Maintenance Menu 340 System Maintenance 342 Forwarding Database Maintenance 343 Debugging Options 344 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference ARP Cache Maintenance 345 IP Route Manipulation 346 IGMP Maintenance 347 IGMP Group Maintenance 348 IGMP Multicast Routers Maintenance 349 Uuencode Flash Dump 350 TFTP System Dump Put 351 Clearing Dump Information 351 Panic Command 352 Unscheduled System Dumps 352 Alteon OS Syslog Messages 353 Alteon OS SNMP Agent 365 Working with Switch Images and Configuration Files 368 Loading a new switch image 369 Loading a saved switch configuration 370 Saving the switch configuration 370 Saving a switch dump 371 Glossary 373 Index 1 43W7774 May 2007 Contents 11 Alteon OS Command Reference 12 Contents 43W7774 May 2007 Preface The Alteon OS Command Reference describes how to configure and use the Alteon OS soft ware with your Nortel 10Gb Uplink Ethernet Switch Module GbE Switch Module For documentation on installing the switches physically see the Installation Guide for your GbE Switch Module For details about configuration and operation of your GbE Switch Mod ule see the Alteon OS Application Guide 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Who Should Use This Book
197. fy new image to use on next reset imagel image2 334 m The Boot Options Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Uploading a Software Image from Your Switch You can upload a software image from the switch to a FTP or TFTP server 1 At the Boot Options prompt enter Boot Options ptimg 2 The system prompts you for information Enter the desired image Enter name of switch software image to be uploaded image1l image2 boot lt image gt lt hostname or server IP addr gt lt server file name gt 3 Enter the name or the IP address of the FTP or TFTP server Enter hostname or IP address of FIP TFIP server lt name or IP address gt 4 Enter the name of the file into which the image will be uploaded on the FTP or TFTP server Enter name of file on FTP TFTP server lt filename gt 5 The system then requests confirmation of what you have entered To have the file uploaded enter Y image2 currently contains Software Version 1 0 1 0 Upload will transfer image2 1889411 bytes to file test on TFTP server 192 1 1 1 Confirm upload operation y n y 43W7774 May 2007 The Boot Options Menu 335 Alteon OS Command Reference Selecting a Configuration Block When you make configuration changes to the GbE Switch Module you must save the changes so that they are retained beyond the next time the switch is reset Wh
198. g message has a criticality level associated with it included in text form as a prefix to the log message One of eight different prefixes is used depending on the condition that the administrator is being notified of as shown below EMERG indicates the system is unusable ALERT Indicates action should be taken immediately CRIT Indicates critical conditions ti RR indicates error conditions or errored operations WARNING indicates warning conditions NOTICE indicates a normal but significant condition INFO indicates an information message UJ EBUG indicates a debug level message 72 The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference info sys user User Status Usernames user nabled offline oper disabled offline admin Always Enabled online 1 session Current User ID table 1 name paul dis cos user password valid offline Current strong password settings strong password status disabled This command displays the status of the configured usernames 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu E 73 Alteon OS Command Reference info 12 Layer 2 Information Layer 2 Menu fdb Forwarding Database Information Menu lacp Link Aggregation Control Protocol Menu gvrp GVRP information Menu 8021x Show 802 1x information stg Show STP information cist Show CIST information trunk Show Trunk Group information vian
199. ge aindex lt area index 0 2 gt Configures the OSPF area index prio lt priority value 0 255 gt Configures the priority value for the GbE Switch Module s OSPF interfaces A priority value of 255 is the highest and 1 is the lowest A priority value of 0 specifies that the interface cannot be used as Designated Router DR or Backup Designated Router BDR cost lt cost value 1 65535 gt Configures cost set for the selected path preferred or backup Usually the cost is inversely pro portional to the bandwidth of the interface Low cost indicates high bandwidth 270 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 70 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu Options cfg l3 ospf if Command Syntax and Usage hello lt value 1 65535 gt Configures the interval in seconds between the he11o packets for the interfaces dead lt value 1 65535 gt Configures the health parameters of a he 11o packet which is set for an interval of seconds before declaring a silent router to be down trans lt value 0 3600 gt Configures the transit delay in seconds retra lt value 0 3600 gt Configures the retransmit interval in seconds key lt key gt none Sets the authentication key to clear the password mdkey lt key ID 1 255 gt none Assigns an MDS key to the interface enable Enables OSPF interface disable Disables OSPF interface del
200. ge prior lt new bridge priority 0 65535 gt Configures the bridge priority The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network is the STG root bridge To make this switch the root bridge configure the bridge priority lower than all other switches and bridges on your network The lower the value the higher the bridge pri ority The range is 0 to 65535 and the default is 32768 RSTP MSTP The range is 0 to 61440 in steps of 4096 0 4096 8192 and the default is 32768 hello lt new bridge hello time 1 10 secs gt Configures the bridge hello time The hello time specifies how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit BPDU Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value The range is 1 to 10 seconds and the default is 2 seconds This command does not apply to MSTP see CIST on page 223 mxage lt new bridge max age 6 40 secs gt Configures the bridge maximum age The maximum age parameter specifies the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it re configures the STG network The range is 6 to 40 seconds and the default is 20 seconds This command does not apply to MSTP see CIST on page 223 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 229 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 38 Spanning Tree Bridge Menu Options cfg l2 stg brg Command Syntax and Usage fwd lt new bridg
201. h Telnet SNMP RIP or the Alteon OS browser based interface A range of IP addresses is produced when used with a network mask address Specify an IP address and mask address in dotted decimal notation Note If you configure the management network without including the switch interfaces it will cause the Firewall Load Balancing health checks to fail and will create a Network Down state on the network rem lt mgmt network address gt lt mgmt network mask gt Removes a defined network which consists of a management network address and a management network mask address cur Displays the current configuration 204 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg sys access user User Access Control Configuration User Access Control Menu uid User ID Menu eject Eject user usrpw Set user password user opw Set operator password oper admpw Set administrator password admin strongpw Strong password menu eur Display current user status NOTE User passwords can be a maximum of 15 characters Table 6 21 User Access Control Menu Options cfg sys access user Command Syntax and Usage uid lt User ID 1 10 gt Displays the User ID Menu To view menu options see page 206 eject user oper admin lt user name gt Ejects the specified user from the GbESM usrpw Sets the user user password The user has no direct responsibility
202. hex and MAC address of the Designated Bridge Designated Port The port ID of the port on the Designated Bridge to which this port is con nected Type Type of link connected to the port and whether the port is an edge port Link type values are AUTO P2P or SHARED 90 The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference info 12 cist Common Internal Spanning Tree Information Common Internal Spanning Tree VLANs 2 4094 Current Root Path Cost Port MaxAge FwdDel 8000 00 11 58 ae 39 00 0 0 20 15 Cist Regional Root Path Cost 8000 00 11 58 ae 39 00 0 Parameters Priority MaxAge FwdDel Hops 32768 20 15 20 Port Prio Cost State Role Designated Bridge Des Port Hello Type NT1 0 DSB NT2 0 0 DSB NT3 0 0 FWD NT4 0 0 DSB NT5 0 0 DSB NT6 0 0 DSB NT7 0 0 DSB NT8 0 0 DSB NT9 0 0 DSB NT10 0 0 DSB NT11 0 0 DSB NT12 0 O DSB NT13 0 0 DSB NT14 0 0 DSB MGT 0 0 FWD EXT 128 20000 FWD DESG 8000 00 11 58 ae 39 00 8011 2 P2P EXT2 128 20000 DISC BKUP 8000 00 11 58 ae 39 00 8011 2 P2P EXT3 128 20000 FWD DESG 8000 00 11 58 ae 39 00 8013 2 P2P EXT4 128 20000 DISC BKUP 8000 00 11 58 ae 39 00 8013 2 Shared STP turned off for this port Norte The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens displayed by your system Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you are using and
203. ia Telnet Use the management module to access the GbE Switch Module through Telnet Choose T O Module Tasks gt Configuration from the navigation pane on the left Select a bay number and click Advanced Configuration gt Start Telnet Web Session gt Start Telnet Session A Telnet window opens a connection to the Switch Module requires Java 1 4 Plug in Once that you have configured the GbE Switch Module with an IP address and gateway you can access the switch from any workstation connected to the management network Telnet access provides the same options for user and administrator access as those available through the management module minus certain Telnet and management commands To establish a Telnet connection with the switch run the Telnet program on your workstation and issue the Telnet command followed by the switch IP address telnet lt switch IP address gt Running Telnet Once the IP parameters on the GbE Switch Module are configured you can access the CLI using a Telnet connection From the management module you can establish a Telnet connection with the switch You will then be prompted to enter a password as explained on page 26 43W7774 May 2007 The Command Line Interface 23 Alteon OS Command Reference Establishing an SSH Connection Although a remote network administrator can manage the configuration of a GbE Switch Module via Telnet this method does not provide a secure connection The SSH
204. iate real name or value when using the command Do not type the brackets This also shows book titles special terms or words to be emphasized host telnet lt P address gt Read your User s Guide thoroughly Command items shown inside brackets are optional and can be used or excluded as the situation demands Do not type the brackets host ls a 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference How to Get Help If you need help service or technical assistance see the Getting help and technical assis tance appendix in the Nortel 10Gb Uplink Ethernet Switch Module for IBM BladeCenter Installation Guide 43W7774 May 2007 Preface 17 Alteon OS Command Reference 18 m Preface 43W7774 May 2007 CHAPTER 1 The Command Line Interface Your GbE Switch Module GbESM is ready to perform basic switching functions right out of the box Some of the more advanced features however require some administrative configuration before they can be used effectively The extensive Alteon OS switching software included in your switch provides a variety of options for accessing and configuring the switch E A built in text based command line interface and menu system for access via a Telnet ses sion or serial port connection E SNMP support for access through network management software such as IBM Director or HP OpenView E Alteon OS Browser Based Interface BBI The command line interface is the most d
205. ifies in seconds the amount of time the bridge waits without receiving a packet from a station before removing the station from the Forwarding Database The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports con nected to a single segment the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment Cost The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a segment Generally speaking the faster the port the lower the path cost A setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link speed has been auto negotiated State The State field shows the current state of the port The State field in RSTP or MSTP mode can be one of the following Discarding DISC Learning LRN Forwarding FWD or Disabled DSB 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu E 89 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 4 20 RSTP MSTP Parameter Descriptions Continued Parameter Description Role The Role field shows the current role of this port in the Spanning Tree The port role can be one of the following Designated DESG Root ROOT Alternate ALTN Backup BKUP Disabled DSB Master MAST or Unknown UNK Designated The Designated Bridge shows information about the bridge connected to Bridge each port if applicable Information includes the priority
206. information 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu E 79 Alteon OS Command Reference info 12 gvrp gvd Show GVRP VLAN Database Information GVRP ENABLED VLAN DATABASE VLAN 1 registration state FIXED static ports INT1 INT14 EXT1 EXT4 dynamic ports empty VLAN 10 registration state NORMAL static ports empty dynamic ports INT2 EXT4 The GVRP VLAN Database table provides basic GVRP information for each VLAN as follows E GVRP Registration state O Normal The VLAN responds normally to GVRP registration information Dynamic VLANs have a normal registration state O Fixed The VLAN ignores GVRP registration information Static VLANs have a fixed registration state O Forbidden The VLAN does not participate in GVRP NOTE Management VLAN 4095 is not registered in GVRP The switch declines any Join request received for VLAN 4095 and generates a syslog message E Static port members E Dynamic port members 80 The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference info 12 gvrp gid Show GID State Machine Information GID machines for VLAN 10 index 2 gvrp_state NORMAL in_use TRUE enabled TRUE Static ports empty Dynamic ports INT2 EXT4 Combined ports INT2 EXT4 Port App Reg Port App Reg Port App Reg Port App Reg Port App Reg INTI O INT2 QA INA INT3 INTA o O INTS o o INT6 INT INT8 INTS O INTI
207. inued LOG_INFO 43W7774 May 2007 SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM VRRP VRRP BGP MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT Management Port can only be enabled disabled by the Management Module Cannot change the Management IP Interface VLAN Cannot enable disable the Management IP Interface Cannot enable disable forwarding on Management IP Interface Cannot delete the Management IP Interface Management VLAN can not be disabled Default VLAN can not be deleted Management VLAN can not be deleted Rebooted lt cause and time of reboot gt Management Port cannot be configured as a Monitor Port Virtual router lt ip_address gt is now master Virtual router lt ip_address gt is now backup Session established with lt BGP_peer_ip_address gt New configuration applied New configuration saved Unsaved changes reverted Could not revert unsaved changes lt image1limage2 gt downloaded from host lt ip_address gt file lt file_name gt lt software_version gt Serial EEPROM downloaded from host lt ip_address gt file lt file_name gt lt login_level gt login on Console mies lt login_level gt lt idle timeout l logout gt from Console lt login_level gt login from host lt ip_address gt lt login_level gt lt from Telnet SSH connection closed idle timeout logout gt Alteon OS Syslog Messages 363 Alteon OS
208. ion RESET Synchronization RX connection TIMEOUT Synchronization RX connection UNKNOWN CLOSE Synchronization RX connection UNREACHABLE Synchronization TX Error Synchronization TX connection RESET Synchronization TX connection TIMEOUT Synchronization TX connection UNREACHABLE Synchronization TX connection UNKNOWN CLOSE Synchronization connection RCLOSE by peer Synchronization connection Wait For Close Timeout Synchronization connection Transmit Timeout Synchronization Receive Timeout 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference LOG_ERROR continued 43W7774 May 2007 VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP Synchronization Receive UNKNOWN Timeout Sync receive in progress cannot start Sync Sync already in progress cannot start Sync Config Sync route find error Config Sync tcp_open error Config Synchronization Timeout Resuming Console thread New configuration did not validate rc lt code gt New configuration did not apply rc lt code gt Sync config apply error Attempting to redirect a previously redirected input Sync rx tcp open Error Sync Version Password Failed No Version Password Line Sync Version Failed peer lt host gt config lt version gt Sync Password Failed Bad Password Sync of switches of different hardware types is not supported Synchronization connection RCLOSE before RX Sync transmit a
209. irect method for collecting switch information and performing switch configuration Using a basic terminal you are presented with a hierarchy of menus that enable you to view information and statistics about the switch and to perform any necessary configuration This chapter explains how to access the Command Line Interface CLD for the switch 43W7774 May 2007 19 Alteon OS Command Reference Connecting to the Switch You can access the command line interface in any one of the following ways E Using a Telnet via the management module E Using a Telnet connection over the network E Using a SSH connection to securely log into another computer over a network a Using a serial connection using the serial port on the GOESM Management Module Setup The BladeCenter GbE Switch Module is an integral subsystem within the overall BladeCenter system The BladeCenter chassis includes a management module MM as the central element for overall chassis management and control You can use the 100 Mbps Ethernet port on the management module to configure and manage the GbE Switch Module The GbE Switch Module communicates with the management mod ule s through its internal port 15 MGT which you can access through the Ethernet port on each management module The factory default settings will permit on y management and con trol access to the switch module through the Ethernet port on the management module or the built in serial port You can u
210. is includes both Group and Functional addresses This object is a 64 bit version of ifOutMulticastPkts ifOutDiscards The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space ifOutErrors For packet oriented interfaces the number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors For character oriented or fixed length interfaces the number of outbound transmission units that could not be transmitted because of errors 43W7774 May 2007 The Statistics Menu 135 Alteon OS Command Reference stats port lt port alias or number gt ip Interface Protocol Statistics This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port GEA IP statistics for port INTI ipInReceives 0 ipInHeaderError 0 ipInDiscards 0 Table 5 8 Interface Protocol Statistics stats port ip Statistics Description ipInReceives The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces including those received in error ipInHeaderErrors The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header s destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity the switch ipInDiscards The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encoun tered to
211. iscarded due to errors in their IP head ers including bad checksums version number mismatch other format errors time to live exceeded errors discovered in processing their IP options and so forth ipInAddrErrors The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header s destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity the switch This count includes invalid addresses for example 0 0 0 0 and addresses of unsupported Classes for example Class E For entities which are not IP Gateways and therefore do not forward data grams this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address ipForwDatagrams The number of input datagrams for which this entity the switch was not their final IP destination as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination In entities which do not act as IP Gateways this counter will include only those packets which were Source Routed via this entity the switch and the Source Route option processing was successful ipInUnknownProtos The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but dis carded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol ipInDiscards The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encoun tered to prevent their continued processing but which were discarded for example for lack of buffer space Note that
212. ist lt Ctrl p gt Also the up arrow key Recall the previous command from the history list This can be used multiple times to work backward through the last 64 commands The recalled command can be entered as is or edited using the options below lt Ctrl n gt Also the down arrow key Recall the next command from the history list This can be used multiple times to work forward through the last 64 commands The recalled com mand can be entered as is or edited using the options below lt Ctrl a gt Move the cursor to the beginning of command line lt Ctrl e gt Move cursor to the end of the command line lt Ctrl b gt Also the left arrow key Move the cursor back one position to the left lt Ctrl f gt Also the right arrow key Move the cursor forward one position to the right lt Backspace gt Also the Delete key Erase one character to the left of the cursor position lt Ctrl d gt Delete one character at the cursor position lt Ctrl k gt Kill erase all characters from the cursor position to the end of the command line lt Ctrl l gt Redraw the screen lt Ctrl u gt Clear the entire line Other keys Insert new characters at the cursor position 43W7774 May 2007 Menu Basics E 53 Alteon OS Command Reference Command Line Interface Shortcuts Command Stacking As a shortcut you can type multiple commands on a single line separated by forward slashes You can connect as many commands as requir
213. its GVRP configuration 0 0 0 eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees H health checks default gateway interval retries eee 251 retry number of failed health checks 251 hello STP information cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeee Helper tienes hot standby failover hprompt syst OPON cceseassdcesesvessocdrsecsnconsneeesvers 176 HTTPS asn rn E EEEE AN SN 208 l ICMP Statistics scs dsvissiusencteeveessecueesstencessovenevicees 146 idle timeout OVELVIEW suersciccscecescebspcastoanbereseoeebhgessonensbivase 29 TERE S02 1S rinane aeaa E SEES 88 THEE 802 UW isrener eer E EE aS 88 IEFE standards BOQ E T 802 1s 802 1w 802 1x IGMP Snooping IGMP statist cs eisein casasedtes vedtsvense ves iocesee ses em Index E 3 Alteon OS Command Reference image downloading ee esseeeeeeeeecseeeeeseeeessneeees 331 software Selecting eeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeseeeeees 334 indirect IP route type ceeseeesseeeesseeeeeseeeeteeees 98 Information IGMP Information cceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneeeee IGMP Multicast Router Information Trunk Group Information eeeeeeeeeeeeee information Interface change stats esesesseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees IP address sez iiees cctds a a EE i ARP information ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeee configuring default gateway F IP interface osese oseiro i ee iE IP configuration via setup eseeeesesseseseserererererereee IP forwarding
214. itted Total number of LACP data units transmitted Marker PDUs trans Total number of LACP marker data units transmitted mitted Marker Rsp PDUs Total number of LACP marker response data units transmitted transmitted 138 The Statistics Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference stats 12 gvrp GVRP Statistics GARP GVRP statistics Join Empty received 3194 Join In received 492 Empty received 482 Leave In received 0 eave Empty received 0 Leave All received 138 Join Empty transmitted 1461 Join In transmitted 586 Empty transmitted sisi Ws Leave In transmitted 0 cave Empty transmitted 0 Leave All transmitted 143 Unaccepted Attribute Value 0 Invalid Message Attributes 0 Failure in registration 0 Generic VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP statistics are described in the following table Table 5 13 GVRP Statistics stats gvrp Statistic Description Join Empty received The total number of Join Empty messages received Join In received The total number of Join In messages received Empty received The total number of Empty messages received Leave In received The total number of Leave In messages received eave Empty The total number of Leave Empty messages received received Leave All received The total number of Leave All messages received Join Empty trans The total number of Join Empty messages se
215. ity of Service QoS menus to configure the 802 1p priority value and DiffServ Code Point DSCP value of incoming packets This allows you to differentiate between various types of traffic and provide different priority levels Table 6 98 Quality of Service Menu Options cfg qos Command Syntax and Usage 8021p Displays 802 1p configuration menu To view menu options see page 305 dscp Displays DSCP configuration menu To view menu options see page 306 304 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cf g qos 8021p 802 1p Configuration 802 1p Menu prig Set priority to COS queue mapping qweight Set weight to a COS queue numcos Set number of COS queue cur Display current 802 1lp configuration This feature provides the capability to filter IP packets based on the 802 1p bits in the packet s VLAN header The 802 1p bits specify the priority that you should give to the packets while forwarding them The packets with a higher non zero priority bits are given forwarding pref erence over packets with numerically lower priority bits value Table 6 99 802 1p Menu Options cfg qos 8021p Command Syntax and Usage priq lt 0 7 gt lt 0 1 gt lt 0 7 gt Maps the 802 1p priority of to the Class of Service queue COSq priority Enter the 802 1p prior ity value 0 7 followed by the Class of Service queue that handles the matching traffic qweight lt
216. l 65535 gt Set Autonomous System number pref lt local preference 0 4294967294 gt Sets the local preference The path with the higher value is preferred When multiple peers advertise the same route use the route with the shortest AS path as the preferred route if you are using eBGP or use the local preference if you are using iBGP on Globally turns BGP on off Globally turns BGP off cur Displays the current BGP configuration 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 277 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 bgp peer lt peer number gt BGP Peer Configuration BGP Peer 1 Menu redist Redistribution menu addr Set remote IP address ras Set remote autonomous system number hold Set hold time aliv Set keep alive tim advert Set min time between advertisements retry Set connect retry interval orig Set min time between route originations ttl Set time to live of IP datagrams addi Add rmap into in rmap list addo Add rmap into out rmap list remi Remove rmap from in rmap list remo Remove rmap from out rmap list nabl Enable peer disable Disable peer delet Delete peer cur Display current peer configuration This menu is used to configure BGP peers which are border routers that exchange routing information with routers on internal and external networks The peer option is disabled by default Table 6 76 BGP Peer Configuration Menu Options cfg
217. later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet Five hundred and twelve bit times corresponds to 51 2 microseconds on a 10 Mbit s system A late collision included in a count represented by an instance of this object is also considered as a generic collision for pur poses of other collision related statistics dot 3StatsExcessive Collisions A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions dot3StatsInternal MacTransmitErrors A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to an internal MAC sub layer transmit error A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot 3StatsLateCollisions object the dot 3StatsExcessiveCollisions object or the dot3Stats CarrierSenseErrors object The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation specific In particular an instance of this object may represent a count of transmission errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted dot3StatsFrameToo Longs A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the maxi mum permitted frame size The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the frameTooLong status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC or other MAC user Received frames for which multiple erro
218. lay OFF Display current BOOTP relay configuration The Bootstrap Protocol BOOTP Relay Menu is used to allow hosts to obtain their configura tions from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server The BOOTP configuration enables the switch to forward a client request for an IP address to two DHCP BOOTP servers with IP addresses that have been configured on the GbE Switch Module BOOTP relay is turned off by default Table 6 90 Bootstrap Protocol Relay Configuration Menu Options cfg l3 bootp Command Syntax and Usage addr lt P address such as 192 4 17 101 gt Sets the IP address of the BOOTP server addr2 lt I P address such a 192 4 17 101 gt Sets the IP address of the second BOOTP server on Globally turns on BOOTP relay off Globally turns off BOOTP relay cur Displays the current BOOTP relay configuration 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 293 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 vrrp VRRP Configuration Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu vr VRRP Virtual Router menu group VRRP Virtual Router Group menu if VRRP Interface menu track VRRP Priority Tracking menu hotstan Enable disable hot standby processing on Globally turn VRRP ON off Globally turn VRRP OFF cur Display current VRRP configuration Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP support on GbE Switch Modules provides redun dancy between routers in a LA
219. lays SNMPv3 menu To view menu options see page 191 name lt new string maximum 64 characters gt Configures the name for the system The name can have a maximum of 64 characters locn lt new string maximum 64 characters gt Configures the name of the system location The location can have a maximum of 64 characters cont lt new string maximum 64 characters gt Configures the name of the system contact The contact can have a maximum of 64 characters reomm lt new SNMP read community string maximum 32 characters gt Configures the SNMP read community string The read community string controls SNMP get access to the switch It can have a maximum of 32 characters The default read community string is public weomm lt new SNMP write community string maximum 32 characters gt Configures the SNMP write community string The write community string controls SNMP set and get access to the switch It can have a maximum of 32 characters The default write commu nity string is private trsrce lt 125 gt Configures the source interface for SNMP traps timeout lt 30 gt Set the timeout value for the SNMP state machine in minutes auth disable enable Enables or disables the use of the system authentication trap facility The default setting is dis abled linkt lt port gt disable enable Enables or disables the sending of SNMP link up and link down traps The default setting i
220. lk you through the configuration of System Date and Time Spanning Tree Port Speed Mode VLANs and IP interfaces type Ctrl C to abort Set Up Will you be configuring VLANs y n 1 Enter y if you will be configuring VLANs Otherwise enter n If you decide not to configure VLANs during this session you can configure them later using the configuration menus or by restarting the Setup facility For more information on configur ing VLANs see the Alteon OS 21 0 Application Guide Next the Setup utility prompts you to input basic system information 2 Enter the year of the current date at the prompt Enter year 2007 Enter the last two digits of the year as a number from 00 to 99 00 is considered 2000 To keep the current year press lt Enter gt 34 m First Time Configuration 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Note When the GbE Switch Module is reset the date and time to revert to default values Use cfg sys date and cfg sys time to re enter the current date and time The system displays the date and time settings System clock set to 18 55 36 Wed Jan 3 2007 3 Enter the month of the current system date at the prompt System Date Enter month 1 Enter the month as a number from 1 to 12 To keep the current month press lt Enter gt 4 Enter the day of the current date at the prompt Enter day 3 Enter the date as a num
221. lready in progress cannot start Sync Sync receive in progress cannot start Sync Sync receive already in progress cannot start Sync receive Sync transmit in progress cannot start Sync receive Alteon OS Syslog Messages 359 Alteon OS Command Reference LOG_ERROR continued VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP VRRP CLI CLI CLI CLI CLI LOG_NOTICE SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM SYSTEM MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT 360 m Alteon OS Syslog Messages Multiple static routes have same destination Virtual router lt vr_id gt must have sharing disabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router group must be enabled when hotstandby is enabled At least one virtual router must be enabled when group is enabled Virtual router group must have sharing disabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router group must have pre emption enabled when hotstandby is enabled Virtual router lt vr_id gt must have an IP address Virtual router lt vr_id gt cannot have same VRID and VLAN as lt vlan_id gt Virtual router lt vr_id gt cannot have same IP address as lt ip_address gt Virtual router lt vr_id gt corresponding virtual server lt server_id gt is not enabled Duplicate default entry BGP peer lt bgp_peer_id gt must have an IP address BGP peers lt bgp_peer_id gt and lt bgp_peer_id gt have same address BGP peer lt bgp_peer_id gt have same address as IP interface lt ip_inte
222. lt auto p2p or shared default auto gt Defines the type of link connected to the port as follows auto Configures the port to detect the link type and automatically match its settings p2p Configures the port for Point To Point protocol shared Configures the port to connect to a shared medium usually a hub 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 231 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 39 Spanning Tree Port Menu Options cfg l2 stg port Command Syntax and Usage edge disable enable Enables or disables this port as an edge port An edge port is not connected to a bridge and can begin forwarding traffic as soon as the link is up Configure server ports as edge ports enabled on Enables STG on the port off Disables STG on the port cur Displays the current STG port parameters 232 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 12 gvrp GVRP Configuration GVRP configuration Menu port Port menu jtime Set GARP join time ltime Set GARP leave time latime Set GARP leave all time dynamic Enable disable dynamic VLAN creation on Globally turn GVRP On OLE Globally turn GVRP Off current Display current GVRP parameters Use the following commands to configure Generic VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP Table 6 40 GVRP Menu Options cfg l2 gvrp Command Syntax and Usage port Displays the GVRP port menu To vie
223. mand is executed the current master gives up control and ini tiates a new election by temporarily advertising its own priority level as 0 lowest After the new election the virtual router forced into backup mode by this command will resume master control in the following cases m This switch owns the virtual router the IP addresses of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same m This switch s virtual router has a higher priority and preemption is enabled m There are no other virtual routers available to take master control oper ip Operations Level IP Options IP Operations Menu bgp Operational Border Gateway Protocol Menu Table 7 5 Operations Level IP Menu Options oper ip Command Syntax and Usage bgp Displays the Border Gateway Protocol Operations Menu To view the menu options see page 328 43W7774 May 2007 The Operations Menu E 327 Alteon OS Command Reference oper ip bgp Operations Level BGP Options Border Gateway Protocol Operations Menu start Start peer session stop Stop peer session current Current BGP operational state Table 7 6 Operations Level BGP Menu Options oper ip bgp Command Syntax and Usage start lt peer number 1 16 gt Starts the peer session stop lt peer number 1 16 gt Stops the peer session cur Displays the current BGP operational state 328 m The Operations Menu 43W7774 May 2007 CH
224. mary Range Configuration Menu Options cfg l3 ospf range Command Syntax and Usage addr lt P Address such as 192 4 17 101 gt Configures the base IP address for the range mask lt P address such as 192 4 17 101 gt Configures the IP address mask for the range aindex lt area index 0 2 gt Configures the area index used by the GbE Switch Module hide disable enable Hides the OSPF summary range enable Enables the OSPF summary range 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 269 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 69 OSPF Summary Range Configuration Menu Options cfg I3 ospf range Command Syntax and Usage disable Disables the OSPF summary range delete Deletes the OSPF summary range current Displays the current OSPF summary range cfg 13 ospf if lt interface number gt OSPF Interface Configuration OSPF Interface 1 Menu aindex Set area index prio Set interface router priority cost Set interface cost hello Set hello interval in seconds dead Set dead interval in seconds trans Set transit delay in seconds retra Set retransmit interval in seconds key Set authentication key mdkey Set MD5 key ID nabl Enable interfac disable Disable interface delet Delete interfac cur Display current OSPF interface configuration Table 6 70 OSPF Interface Configuration Menu Options cfg I3 ospf if Command Syntax and Usa
225. mber of NTP requests the switch sent to the primary NTP server to synchronize time Responses Received The total number of NTP responses received from the primary NTP server Updates The total number of times the switch updated its time based on the NTP responses received from the primary NTP server Secondary Server Requests Sent The total number of NTP requests the switch sent to the secondary NTP server to synchronize time Responses Received The total number of NTP responses received from the secondary NTP server Updates The total number of times the switch updated its time based on the NTP responses received from the secondary NTP server Last update based on response from primary server Last update of time on the switch based on either primary or secondary NTP response received 43W7774 May 2007 The Statistics Menu E 169 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 5 32 NTP Statistics Parameters stats ntp Field Description Last update time The time stamp showing the time when the switch was last updated Current system time The switch system time when the command stats ntp was issued NoTE You can issue stats ntp clear command to delete all NTP statistics stats dump Statistics Dump Use the dump command to dump all switch statistics available from the Statistics Menu 40K or more depending on your configuration This data can be used to tune or debug switch performance
226. mes the Neighbor adjacency has been reset across all OPSF areas and interfaces down The total number of Neighboring routers down that is in the initial state of a neighbor conversation across all OSPF areas and interfaces 156 The Statistics Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 5 24 OSPF General Statistics stats I3 ospf general Continued Statistics Description Intf Change Stats hello The sum total number of Hello packets sent on all interfaces and areas down The sum total number of interfaces down in all OSPF areas loop The sum total of interfaces no longer connected to the attached network across all OSPF areas and interfaces unloop The sum total number of interfaces connected to the attached network in all OSPF areas wait timer The sum total number of times the Wait Timer has been fired indicating the end of the waiting period that is required before electing a Backup Designated Router across all OSPF areas and interfaces backup The sum total number of Backup Designated Routers on the attached net work for all OSPF areas and interfaces nbr change The sum total number of changes in the set of bidirectional neighbors associated with any interface across all OSPF areas Timers Kickoff hello The sum total number of times the Hello timer has been fired which trig gers the send of a Hello packet across all OPSF area
227. mmand Reference info sys log Show Recent Syslog Messages Date Time Criticality level Message Jul 8 17 25 41 NOTICE system link up Jul 8 17 25 41 NOTICE system link up Jul 8 17 25 41 NOTICE system link up Jul 8 17 25 41 NOTICE system link up Jul 8 17 25 41 NOTICE system link up Jul 8 17 25 41 OTICE system link up Jul 8 17 25 41 OTICE system link up Jul 8 17 25 41 OTICE system link up Jul 8 17 25 41 OTICE system link up Jul 8 17 25 41 OTICE system link up Jul 8 17 25 41 OTICE system link up Jul 8 17 25 41 NOTICE system link up Jul 8 17 25 41 NOTICE system link up Jul 8 17 25 41 NOTICE system link up Jul 8 17 25 42 NOTICE system link up Jul 8 17 25 42 NOTICE system link up Jul 8 17 25 42 NOTICE system link up Jul 8 17 25 42 OTICE system link up Jul 8 17 25 42 OTICE system link up Jul 8 17 25 42 OTICE system link up Jul 8 17 25 42 OTICE system link up on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on on por por por por por por por por por por por por por por por por por por por por por 222424 HHA ea Or H BMH H H H HHHH H Z i ja E x lt E x Zae a GE GE Gi lt GE Gr ack uch ier och ack SGr Gr oGk Gr Gk Gr Gr ack ck Gk s t jes a J WN WR BUD i NDNrFUDADAW b a d HHHHHHHHE Z J Each syslo
228. mpts Port VLAN tagging config tagged port can be a member of multiple VLANs Current TAG support disabled Enter new TAG support d e Enter d to disable VLAN tagging for the port or enter e to enable VLAN tagging for the port To keep the current setting press lt Enter gt 5 The system prompts you to configure the next port Enter port INT1 14 MGT EXT1 4 When you are through configuring ports press lt Enter gt without specifying any port Other wise repeat the steps in this section 43W7774 May 2007 First Time Configuration 37 Alteon OS Command Reference Setup Part 3 VLANs If you chose to skip VLANs configuration back in Part 1 skip to Setup Part 4 IP Configura tion on page 39 1 Select the VLAN to configure or skip VLAN configuration at the prompt VLAN Config Enter VLAN number from 2 to 4094 NULL at end If you wish to change settings for individual VLANs enter the number of the VLAN you wish to configure To skip VLAN configuration press lt Enter gt without typing a VLAN number and go to Setup Part 4 IP Configuration on page 39 2 Enter the new VLAN name at the prompt Current VLAN name VLAN 2 Enter new VLAN name Entering anew VLAN name is optional To use the pending new VLAN name press lt Enter gt 3 Enter the VLAN port numbers Define Ports in VLAN Current VLAN 2 empty Enter ports one per line
229. munity string uname Set USM user name tag Set community tag del Delete communityTable entry cur Display current communityTable configuration Table 6 15 SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration Menu Options cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 comm Command Syntax and Usage index lt 32 character name gt Allows you to configure the unique index value of a row in this table consisting of 32 characters maximum name lt 32 character name gt Defines the user name as defined in cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 usm name on page 193 uname lt 32 character name gt Defines a readable 32 character long string that represents the corresponding value of an SNMP community name in a security model tag lt list of tag string max 255 characters gt Allows you to configure a tag of up to 255 characters maximum This tag specifies a set of trans port endpoints to which a command responder application sends an SNMP trap del Deletes the community table entry cur Displays the community table configuration 198 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 taddr SNMPVv3 Target Address Table Configuration This command is used to configure the target transport entry The configured entry is stored in the target address table list in the SNMP engine This table of transport addresses is used in the generation of SNMP messages SNMPv3 snmpTargetAddrTable 1 Menu
230. n OS Command Reference stats port lt port alias or number gt Port Statistics This menu displays traffic statistics on a port by port basis Traffic statistics include SNMP Management Information Base MIB objects Port Statistics Menu 8021x Show 802 1x stats brg Show bridging dot1 stats ether Show Ethernet dot3 stats ae Show interface if stats ip Show Internet Protocol IP stats link Show link stats clear Clear all port stats Table 5 2 Port Statistics Menu Options stats port Command Syntax and Usage 8021x Displays IEEE 802 1x statistics for the port See page 127 for sample output brg Displays bridging dot1 statistics for the port See page 129 for sample output ether Displays Ethernet dot3 statistics for the port See page 131 for sample output if Displays interface statistics for the port See page 134 for sample output ip Displays IP statistics for the port See page 136 for sample output link Displays link statistics for the port See page 136 for sample output clear This command clears all the statistics on the port 43W7774 May 2007 The Statistics Menu 125 Alteon OS Command Reference stats port lt port alias or number gt 8021x 802 1x Authenticator Statistics This menu option enables you to display the 802 1x authenticator statistics of the selected port Authen
231. n banner hprompt Enable disable display hostname sysName in CLI prompt reminder Enable disable Reminders cur Display current system wide parameters This menu provides configuration of switch management parameters such as user and adminis trator privilege mode passwords Web based management settings and management access lists Table 6 2 System Configuration Menu Options cfg sys Command Syntax and Usage syslog Displays the Syslog Menu To view menu options see page 177 sshd Displays the SSH Server Menu To view menu options see page 178 radius Displays the RADIUS Authentication Menu To view menu options see page 180 tacacs Displays the TACACS Authentication Menu To view menu options see page 182 ldap Displays the LDAP Authentication Menu To view menu options see page 185 ntp Displays the Network Time Protocol NTP Server Menu To view menu options see page 187 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 175 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 2 System Configuration Menu Options cfg sys Command Syntax and Usage ssnmp Displays the System SNMP Menu To view menu options see page 189 access Displays the System Access Menu To view menu options see page 202 date Prompts the user for the system date The date reverts to its default value when the switch is reset time Configures the system time using a 24 hour clock format The tim
232. n this section use the MIB name but you can also use the OID Table 9 11 lists the MIBS used to perform operations associated with the GDESM Switch Image and Configuration files These MIBS are contained within in the file aosswitch mib Table 9 11 MIBs for Switch Image and Configuration Files MIB Name MIB OID agTftpServer 1 3 6 1 4 1872 2 5 1 1 7 1 0 agTftpImage 1 3 6 1 4 1872 2 5 1 1 7 2 0 agTftpImageFileName 1 3 6 1 4 1872 2 5 1 1 7 3 0 agTftpCfgFileName 1 3 6 1 4 1872 2 5 1 1 7 4 0 agTftpDumpFileName 1 3 6 1 4 1872 2 5 1 1 7 5 0 agTftpAction 1 3 6 1 4 1872 2 5 1 1 7 6 0 agTftpLastActionStatus 1 3 6 1 4 1872 2 5 1 1 7 7 0 agTftpUserName 1 3 6 1 4 1872 2 5 1 1 7 9 0 agTftpPassword 1 3 6 1 4 1 1872 2 5 1 1 7 10 0 agTftpTSDumpFileName 1 3 6 1 4 1 1872 2 5 1 1 7 11 0 The following SNMP actions can be performed using the MIBs listed in Table 9 11 Load a new Switch image boot or running from a FTP TFTP server Load a previously saved switch configuration from a FTP TFTP server Save the switch configuration to a FTP TFTP server Save a switch dump to a FTP TFTP server 368 Alteon OS SNMP Agent 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Loading a new switch image To load a new switch image with the name MyNewImage 1 img into image2 follow the steps below This example assumes you have a FTP TFTP server at 192 168 10 10 1 Set the FTP TFTP server address where the switch image resides Set agTftpServer 0 192
233. n used without the command parameter a summary of the global com mands is displayed or print Display the current menu or up Go up one level in the menu structure If placed at the beginning of a command go to the Main Menu Otherwise this is used to separate multiple commands placed on the same line lines Set the number of lines n that display on the screen at one time The default is 24 lines When used without a value the current setting is displayed Set lines to a value of 0 zero to disable pagination diff Show any pending configuration changes apply Apply pending configuration changes save Write configuration changes to non volatile flash memory 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 3 1 Description of Global Commands Command Action revert Remove pending configuration changes between apply commands Use this command to restore configuration parameters set since last apply revert apply Remove pending or applied configuration changes between save com mands Use this command to remove any configuration changes made since last save exit or quit Exit from the command line interface and log out ping Use this command to verify station to station connectivity across the net work The format is as follows ping lt host name gt lt IP address gt tries 1 32 gt msec delay m mgmt d data Where IP address is the hostname or IP ad
234. nam Set target address nam addr Set target transport address IP port Set target transport address port taglist Set tag list pnam Set targetParams name del Delete targetAddrTable entry cur Display current targetAddrTable configuration Table 6 16 Target Address Table Menu Options cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 taddr Command Syntax and Usage name lt 32 character name gt Allows you to configure the locally arbitrary but unique identifier target address name associated with this entry addr lt transport address ip gt Allows you to configure a transport address IP that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps port lt transport address port gt Allows you to configure a transport address port that can be used in the generation of SNMP traps taglist lt list of tag string max 255 characters gt Allows you to configure a list of tags that are used to select target addresses for a particular opera tion pname lt 32 character name gt Defines the name as defined in cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 tparam name on page 200 del Deletes the Target Address Table entry cur Displays the current Target Address Table configuration 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 199 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 tparam SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Configuration You can configure the target parameters entry and store it in the target parameters table in the SNMP engine This table
235. nce maint fdb Forwarding Database Maintenance FDB Manipulation Menu find Show a single FDB entry by MAC address port Show FDB entries for a single port vlan Show FDB entries for a single VLAN dump Show all FDB entries del Delete an FDB entry clear Clear entire FDB The Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu can be used to view information and to delete a MAC address from the forwarding database or clear the entire forwarding database This is helpful in identifying problems associated with MAC address learning and packet forwarding decisions Table 9 3 FDB Manipulation Menu Options maint fdb Command Syntax and Usage find lt MAC address gt lt VLAN gt Displays a single database entry by its MAC address You are prompted to enter the MAC address of the device Enter the MAC address using the xx xx xx xxX xx xx format such as 08 00 20 12 34 56 or xxxxxxxxxxxx format such as 080020123456 port lt port alias or number gt Displays all FDB entries for a particular port vlan lt VLAN number 1 4095 gt Displays all FDB entries on a single VLAN dump Displays all entries in the Forwarding Database For details see page 77 del lt MAC address gt lt VLAN gt Removes a single FDB entry clear Clears the entire Forwarding Database from switch memory 43W7774 May 2007 The Maintenance Menu E 343 Alteon OS Command Reference maint debug Debugging Option
236. nce Table 5 7 Interface Statistics for Port stats port if Statisti cs Description ifInUnknownProtos For packet oriented interfaces the number of packets received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol For character oriented or fixed length interfaces which support protocol multiplexing the number of transmission units received via the interface which were discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol For any interface which does not support protocol multiplexing this counter will always be 0 ifOutOctets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters ifOutUcastPkts The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested to be transmitted and which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent ifOutBroadcastPkts The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested to be transmitted and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent This object is a 64 bit version of i fOutBroadcastPkts ifOutMulticastPkts The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested to be transmitted and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent For a MAC layer protocol th
237. nd revert Revert pending or applied changes global command exit Exit global command always available Note If you are accessing a user account some menu options will not be available 28 m The Command Line Interface 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Command Line History and Editing For a description of global commands shortcuts and command line editing functions see Menu Basics on page 47 Idle Timeout By default the switch will disconnect your Telnet session after five minutes of inactivity This function is controlled by the idle timeout parameter which can be set from 1 to 60 minutes For information on changing this parameter see System Configuration on page 175 43W7774 May 2007 The Command Line Interface 29 Alteon OS Command Reference 30 m The Command Line Interface 43W7774 May 2007 CHAPTER 2 First Time Configuration To help with the initial process of configuring your switch the Alteon OS software includes a Setup utility The Setup utility prompts you step by step to enter all the necessary information for basic configuration of the switch This chapter describes how to use the Setup utility and how to change system passwords Before you run Setup you must first connect to the switch see Chapter 1 Connecting to the Switch 43W7774 May 2007 31 Alteon OS Command Reference Using the Setup Utility Whenever you log in as the sys
238. nd Line Interface 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 1 2 User Access Levels User Account Description and Tasks Performed Password The superuser Administrator has complete access to all menus admin information and configuration commands on the GbE Switch Module including the ability to change both the user and administrator passwords Administrator NoTE With the exception of the admin user access to each user level can be disabled by setting the password to an empty value 43W7774 May 2007 The Command Line Interface 27 Alteon OS Command Reference Setup Versus CLI Once the administrator password is verified you are given complete access to the switch If the switch is still set to its factory default configuration the system will ask whether you wish to run Setup see Chapter 2 First Time Configuration a utility designed to help you through the first time configuration process If the switch has already been configured the Main Menu of the CLI is displayed instead The following table shows the Main Menu with administrator privileges Main Menu info Information Menu stats Statistics Menu cfg Configuration Menu oper Operations Command Menu boot Boot Options Menu maint Maintenance Menu diff Show pending config changes global command apply Apply pending config changes global command sav Save updated config to FLASH global comma
239. nd Syntax and Usage svrtmout lt 65535 gt Sets the time in seconds the authenticator waits for a response from the RADIUS server before declaring an authentication timeout The default value is 30 seconds The time interval between transmissions of the RADIUS Access Request packet containing the supplicant s client s EAP Response packet is determined by the current setting of cfg sys radius timeout default is 3 seconds maxreq lt 0 gt Sets the maximum number of times the authenticator retransmits an EAP Request packet to the supplicant client The default value is 2 raperiod lt 604800 gt Sets the time in seconds the authenticator waits before re authenticating a supplicant client when periodic re authentication is enabled The default value is 3600 seconds reauth on off Sets the re authentication status to on or of f The default value is of f default Resets the 802 1x port parameters to their default values global Applies current global 802 1x configuration parameters to the port cur Displays current 802 1x port parameters 220 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 12 mrst Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Configuration Multiple Spanning Tree Menu cist Common and Internal Spanning Tree menu name Set MST region name rev Set revision level of this MST region maxhop Se
240. nd options that are installed This information display includes all configured VLANs and all member ports that have an active link state Port membership is represented in slot port format VLAN information includes VLAN Number VLAN Name Status Port membership of the VLAN Protocol based VLAN information Whether the VLAN is a GVRP dynamic VLAN Private VLAN configuration 94 m The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference info 13 Layer 3 Information Layer 3 Menu route IP Routing Information Menu arp ARP Information Menu bgp BGP Information Menu ospf OSPF Routing Information Menu rip RIP Routing Information Menu ip Show IP information igmp Show IGMP Snooping Multicast Group information vrrp Show Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol information dump Dump all layer 3 information The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 4 22 with point ers to detailed information Table 4 22 Layer 3 Menu Options info I3 Command Syntax and Usage route Displays the IP Routing Menu Using the options of this menu the system displays the following for each configured or learned route m Route destination IP address subnet mask and gateway address m Type of route m Tag indicating origin of route m Metric for RIP tagged routes specifying the number of hops to the destination 1 15 hops or 16 for infinite hops m The
241. ndant switches to share the same IP address minimizing the number of unique IP addresses that must be configured 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu E 115 Alteon OS Command Reference info qos Quality of Service Information QoS Menu 8021p Show QOS 802 1p information Table 4 34 QoS Menu Options info qos Command Syntax and Usage 8021p Displays the 802 1p Information Menu For details see page 116 info qos 8021p 802 1p Information Current priority to COS queue information Priority COSq Weight YAO BWNE OO BH H aH HO OO NNNNF FEF j Current port priority information Port Priority COSq Weight INT1 0 0 INT2 0 GT 0 0 EXT1 0 0 EXT2 0 0 EXT3 0 0 EXT4 0 0 116 The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference The following table describes the IEEE 802 1p priority to COS queue information Table 4 35 802 1p Priority to COS Queue Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Priority Displays the 802 1p Priority level CcOosq Displays the Class of Service queue Weight Displays the scheduling weight of the COS queue The following table describes the IEEE 802 1p port priority information Table 4 36 802 1p Port Priority Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Port Displays the port alias Priority Displays the 802 1p Priority level cosq Displays the Class of Service queue
242. network FwdDel The forward delay parameter specifies in seconds the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding state priority port The port priority parameter helps determine which bridge port becomes the designated port In a network topology that has multiple bridge ports con nected to a single segment the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment Cost The port path cost parameter is used to help determine the designated port for a segment Generally speaking the faster the port the lower the path cost A setting of 0 indicates that the cost will be set to the appropriate default after the link speed has been auto negotiated State The state field shows the current state of the port The state field can be either Discarding DISC Learning LRN orForwarding FWD 92 The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 4 21 CIST Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Role The Role field shows the current role of this port in the Spanning Tree The port role can be one of the following Designated DESG Root ROOT Alternate ALTN Backup BKUP Disabled DSB Master MAST or Unknown UNK Designated Bridge The Designated Bridge shows information about the bridge connected to each port if applicable Information includes the priority hex and M
243. nistrator Maintenance Menu sys System Maintenance Menu fdb Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu debug Debugging Menu arp ARP Cache Manipulation Menu route IP Route Manipulation Menu igmp IGMP Multicast Group Menu uudmp Uuencode FLASH dump ptdmp Upload FLASH dump via FTP TFTP cldmp Clear FLASH dump panic Dump state information to FLASH and reboot tsdmp Tech support dump pttsdmp Upload tech support dump via FTP TFTP Dump information contains internal switch state data that is written to flash memory on the GbE Switch Module after any one of the following occurs E The switch administrator forces a switch panic The panic option found in the Mainte nance Menu causes the switch to dump state information to flash memory and then causes the switch to reboot E The watchdog timer forces a switch reset The purpose of the watchdog timer is to reboot the switch if the switch software freezes E The switch detects a hardware or software problem that requires a reboot Table 9 1 Maintenance Menu maint Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays the System Maintenance Menu To view menu options see page 342 fdb Displays the Forwarding Database Manipulation Menu To view menu options see page 343 debug Displays the Debugging Menu To view menu options see page 344 arp Displays the ARP Cache Manipulation Menu To view menu options see page 345 340 m Th
244. ns raperiod Set reauthentication time interval reauth Set reauthentication status to on or off default Restore default 802 1x configuration cur Display current 802 1x configuration The global 802 1x menu allows you to configure parameters that affect all ports in the GDESM Table 6 30 802 1x Global Configuration Menu Options cfg l2 8021x global Command Syntax and Usage gvlan Displays the 802 1x Guest VLAN Configuration Menu To view menu options see page 218 mode force unauth auto force auth Sets the type of access control for all ports m force unauth the port is unauthorized unconditionally m auto the port is unauthorized until it is successfully authorized by the RADIUS server m force auth the port is authorized unconditionally allowing all traffic The default value is force auth qtperiod lt 0 65535 gt Sets the time in seconds the authenticator waits before transmitting an EAP Request Identity frame to the supplicant client after an authentication failure in the previous round of authentica tion The default value is 60 seconds txperiod lt 65535 gt Sets the time in seconds the authenticator waits for an EAP Response Identity frame from the supplicant client before retransmitting an EAP Request Identity frame The default value is 30 seconds suptmout lt 65535 gt Sets the time in seconds the authenticator waits for an EAP Response packet from the supplicant cli
245. nt mitted Join In transmitted The total number of Join In messages sent Empty transmitted The total number of Empty messages sent Leave In transmit The total number of Leave In messages sent ted 43W7774 May 2007 The Statistics Menu 139 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 5 13 GVRP Statistics stats gvrp Statistic Description eave Empty trans The total number of Leave Empty messages sent mitted Leave All transmit The total number of LeaveAll messages sent ted Unaccepted The total number of GPDUs received that had an unacceptable attribute Attribute Value value Invalid Message The total number of invalid messages or attributes received such as the Attributes following Invalid Protocol ID Invalid Attribute Type Invalid Attribute Length Invalid Attribute Event Failure in regis The total number of GVRP registrations that failed To see more detail tration about failed registrations check the syslog 140 The Statistics Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference stats 13 Layer 3 Statistics Layer 3 Statistics Menu geal3 GEA Layer 3 Stats Menu ip Show IP stats route Show route stats arp Show ARP stats dns Show DNS stats icmp Show ICMP stats tcp Show TCP stats udp Show UDP stats igmp Show IGMP stats ospf OSPF stats vrrp Show VRRP stats clrvrrp Clear VRRP stats rip Show RIP stats igmpgrps
246. nt authorization status of the port either authorized or unauthorized Au PA thenticator E State Displays the Authenticator Port Access Entity State The PAE state can be one of the following initialize disconnected connecting authenticating authenticated aborting held forceAuth Backend Auth State Displays the Backend Authorization State The Backend Authorization state can be one of the following initialize request response success fail timeout idle 84 m The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference info 12 stg Spanning Tree Information upfast disabled update 40 Spanning Tree Group 1 On STP PVST Static VLANs 1 10 Dynamic VLANs 30 Current Root Path Cost Port Hello MaxAge FwdDel 8000 00 16 60 9 1e 00 0 null 2 20 15 Parameters Priority Hello MaxAge FwdDel Aging 32768 2 20 1 5 300 Port Priority Cost FastFwd State Designated Bridge Des Port NT1 0 0 n FORWARDING NT2 0 0 n FORWARDING NT3 0 0 n FORWARDING NT4 0 0 n FORWARDING NT5 0 0 n FORWARDING NT6 0 0 n FORWARDING NT7 0 0 n FORWARDING NT8 0 0 n FORWARDING NT9 0 0 n DISABLED NT10 0 0 n FORWARDING NT11 0 0 n FORWARDING NT12 0 0 n FORWARDING NT13 0 0 n FORWARDING NT14 0 0 n FORWARDING EXT 128 2 n DISABLED EXT2 128 2 n DISABLED EXT3 128 2 n FORWARDING 8000 00 16 60 f9 1e 00 8013 EXT4 128 4 n FORWARDING 8000 00 16 60 f9 1e 00
247. nt session cfgtrk Displays a list of configuration changes made since the last apply command Each time the apply command is sent the configuration tracking log is cleared ntpreq Allows the user to send requests to the NTP server 324 m The Operations Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference oper port lt port alias or number gt Operations Level Port Options Operations Port INT1 Menu 8021x 8021 x Menu ena Enable port dis Disable port lena Enable FDB Learning ldis Disable FDB Learning cur Current port state Operations level port options are used for temporarily disabling or enabling a port and for re setting the port Table 7 2 Operations Level Port Menu Options oper port Command Syntax and Usage 8021x Displays the 802 1x Port Menu To view menu options see page 326 ena Temporarily enables the port The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset dis Temporarily disables the port The port will be returned to its configured operation mode when the switch is reset lena Temporarily enables FDB learning on the port ldis Temporarily disables FDB learning on the port cur Displays the current settings for the port 43W7774 May 2007 The Operations Menu E 325 Alteon OS Command Reference oper port lt port alias or number gt 8021x Operations Level Port 802 1x Options 80
248. nu 13 Layer 3 Information Menu qos QoS Menu acl Show ACL information link Show link status port Show port information geaport Show system port and gea port mapping sfp Show External Port SFP XFP status dump Dump all information The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 4 1 with pointers to detailed information Table 4 1 Information Menu Options info Command Syntax and Usage sys Displays the System Information Menu For details see page 58 12 Displays the Layer 2 Information Menu For details see page 74 13 Displays the Layer 3 Information Menu For details see page 95 qos Displays the Quality of Service QoS Information Menu For details see page 116 acl Displays the current configuration profile for each Access Control List ACL and ACL Group For details see page 118 link Displays configuration information about each port including E Port alias m Port speed m Duplex mode half full or auto m Flow control for transmit and receive no yes or auto m Link status up or down For details see page 119 56 The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 4 1 Information Menu Options info Command Syntax and Usage port Displays port status information including Port alias Whether the port uses VLAN Tagging or not Port VLAN ID PVID Port name VLAN membership Por
249. of a defined set of user iden tities displayed in the USM user table The USM user table contains the following information E the user name E asecurity name in the form of a string whose format is independent of the Security Model E an authentication protocol which is an indication that the messages sent on behalf of the user can be authenticated E the privacy protocol usmUser Table User Name Protocol adminmd5 HMAC_MD5 DES PRIVACY adminsha HMAC_SHA DES PRIVACY viv2only NO AUTH NO PRIVACY Table 4 4 USM User Table Information Parameters info sys usm Field Description User Name This is a string that represents the name of the user that you can use to access the switch Protocol This indicates whether messages sent on behalf of this user are protected from disclosure using a privacy protocol Alteon OS 21 0 supports DES algorithm for privacy The software also sup ports two authentication algorithms MD5 and HMAC SHA 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu E 61 Alteon OS Command Reference info sys snmpv3 view SNMPv3 View Table Information The user can control and restrict the access allowed to a group to only a subset of the manage ment information in the management domain that the group can access within each context by specifying the group s rights in terms of a particular MIB view for security reasons View Name Subtree Mask Type iso eS included viv2only 1 3 included
250. ol being processed by the local bridging function including bridge management frames dot1PortOutFrames The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its seg ment Note that a frame transmitted on the interface corresponding to this port is only counted by this object if and only if it is for a protocol being processed by the local bridging function including bridge management frames dot1PortInDiscards Count of valid frames received which were discarded that is filtered by the Forwarding Process 43W7774 May 2007 The Statistics Menu E 129 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 5 5 Bridging Statistics of a Port stats port org Statistics Description dotiTpLearnedEntry The total number of Forwarding Database entries which have been or Discards would have been learnt but have been discarded due to a lack of space to store them in the Forwarding Database If this counter is increasing it indicates that the Forwarding Database is regularly becoming full a con dition which has unpleasant performance effects on the subnetwork If this counter has a significant value but is not presently increasing it indi cates that the problem has been occurring but is not persistent dot1StpPortForward The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning state to Transitions the Forwarding state 130 The Statistics Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference stats po
251. on fixed The address belongs to a host or subnet attached to the switch static The address is a static route which has been configured on the GbE Switch Module addr The address belongs to one of the switch s IP interfaces rip The address was learned by the Routing Information Protocol RIP ospf The address was learned by Open Shortest Path First OSPF bgp The address was learned via Border Gateway Protocol BGP broadcast Indicates a broadcast address martian The address belongs to a filtered group multicast Indicates a multicast address 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu E 99 Alteon OS Command Reference info 13 arp ARP Information Address Resolution Protocol Menu find Show a single ARP entry by IP address port Show ARP entries on a single port vlan Show ARP entries on a single VLAN dump Show all ARP entries addr Show ARP address list The ARP information includes IP address and MAC address of each entry address status flags see Table 4 26 on page 100 VLAN and port for the address and port referencing information Table 4 26 ARP Information Menu Options info 3 arp Command Syntax and Usage find lt I P address suchas 192 4 17 101 gt Displays a single ARP entry by IP address port lt port alias or number gt Displays the ARP entries on a single port vlan lt VLAN number 1 4095
252. one by a reset of the switch operators cannot severely impact switch operation E Administrators are the only ones that may make permanent changes to the switch configu ration changes that are persistent across a reboot reset of the switch Administrators can access switch functions to configure and troubleshoot problems on the GbE Switch Module Because administrators can also make temporary operator level changes as well they must be aware of the interactions between temporary and permanent changes Access to switch functions is controlled through the use of unique surnames and passwords Once you are connected to the switch via local Telnet remote Telnet or SSH you are prompted to enter a password The default user names password for each access level are listed in the following table NOTE It is recommended that you change default switch passwords after initial configuration and as regularly as required under your network security policies For more information see Setting Passwords on page 43 Table 1 2 User Access Levels User Account Description and Tasks Performed Password User The User has no direct responsibility for switch management user He or she can view all switch status information and statistics but cannot make any configuration changes to the switch Operator The Operator manages all functions of the switch The oper Operator can reset ports except the management port 26 m The Comma
253. options info I3 ospf Command Syntax and Usage dump Displays the OSPF information info 13 ospf general OSPF General Information OSPF Version 2 Router ID 10 10 10 1 Started at 1663 and the process uptime is 4626 Area Border Router yes AS Boundary Router no LS types supported are 6 External LSA count 0 External LSA checksum sum 0x0 umber of interfaces in this router is 2 umber of virtual links in this router is 1 16 new lsa received and 34 lsa originated from this router Total number of entries in the LSDB 10 Database checksum sum 0x0 Total neighbors are 1 of which 2 are gt INIT state 2 are gt EXCH state 2 are FULL state Number of areas is 2 of which 3 transit O nssa Area Id 0 0 0 0 Authentication none Import ASExtern yes Number of times SPF ran 8 Area Border Router count 2 AS Boundary Router count 0 LSA count 5 LSA Checksum sum 0x2237B Summary noSummary 106 The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference info 13 ospf if OSPF Interface Information Ip Address 10 10 12 1 Area 0 0 0 1 Admin Status UP Router ID 10 10 10 1 State DR Priority 1 Designated Router ID 10 10 10 1 Ip Address 10 10 12 1 Backup Designated Router ID 10 10 14 1 Ip Address 10 10 12 2 Timer intervals Hello 10 Dead 40 Wait 1663 Retransmit 5 Poll interval 0 Transit delay 1 Neighbor count is 1 If Events 4 Authentication ty
254. ormation dbase Database Menu sumaddr Show summary address list nsumadd Show NSSA summary address list routes Show OSPF routes dump Show OSPF information Table 4 29 OSPF Information Menu options info I3 ospf Command Syntax and Usage general Displays general OSPF information See page 106 for a sample output aindex lt area index 0 2 gt Displays area information for a particular area index If no parameter is supplied it displays area information for all the areas if lt interface number 1 128 gt Displays interface information for a particular interface If no parameter is supplied it displays information for all the interfaces See page 107 for a sample output virtual Displays information about all the configured virtual links nbr lt nbr router id A B C D gt Displays the status of a neighbor with a particular router ID If no router ID is supplied it displays the information about all the current neighbors dbase Displays OSPF database menu To view menu options see page 107 sumaddr lt area index 0 2 gt Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to non NSSA areas nsumadd lt area index 0 2 gt Displays the list of summary ranges belonging to NSSA areas routes Displays OSPF routing table See page 109 for a sample output 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu 105 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 4 29 OSPF Information Menu
255. ort Port Mirroring Configuration Port EXT1 Menu add Add Mirrored port rem Rem Mirrored port delet Delete this Monitor port cur Display current Port based Port Mirroring configuration Table 6 114 Port Mirroring Monitor Port Menu Options cfg pmirr monport Command Syntax and Usage add lt mirrored port port to mirror from gt lt direction in out or both gt Adds the port to be mirrored This command also allows you to enter the direction of the traffic It is necessary to specify the direction because If the source port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is ingress or both ingress and egress the frame is sent to the mirrored port If the destination port of the frame matches the mirrored port and the mirrored direction is egress or both the frame is sent to the monitoring port rem lt mirrored port port to mirror from gt Removes the mirrored port delete Deletes this monitor port cur Displays the current settings of the monitoring port 320 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg setup Setup The setup program steps you through configuring the system date and time BOOTP IP Span ning Tree port speed mode VLAN parameters and IP interfaces To start the setup program at the Configuration prompt enter Configuration setup For a complete description of how to us
256. otation cur Displays the current IP static routes 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 253 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 mroute IP Multicast Route Configuration IPMC Static Route Menu add Add static IP Multicast route rem Remove static IP Multicast route cur Display current static IPMC route configuration The following table describes the IP Multicast Route menu options Table 6 57 IP Static Route Configuration Menu Options cfg l3 mroute Command Syntax and Usage add lt JPMC destination gt lt vlan gt lt port gt primarylbackuplhost lt virtual router idlnone gt Adds a static multicast route You will be prompted to enter a destination IP address in dotted dec imal notation VLAN and member port Indicate whether the route is used for a primary backup or host multicast router rem lt IJPMC destination gt lt vlan gt lt port gt primarylbackuplhost lt virtual router idlInone gt Removes a static multicast route The destination address VLAN and member port of the route to remove must be specified cur Displays the current IP multicast routes 254 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 arp ARP Configuration Address Resolution Protocol ARP is the TCP IP protocol that resides within the Internet layer ARP resolves a physical address from an IP address ARP queries machines on the local network for
257. ou can view RSTP MSTP bridge information for the Spanning Tree Group including the following E Priority H Hello interval E Maximum age value E Forwarding delay E Aging time 88 m The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference You can view port specific RSTP information including the following E Port number and priority E Cost E State The following table describes the STP parameters in RSTP or MSTP mode Table 4 20 RSTP MSTP Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description Current Root The Current Root shows information about the root bridge for the Spanning Tree Information includes the priority hex and MAC address of the root Priority bridge The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the STP root bridge Hello The hello time parameter specifies in seconds how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit BPDU Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value MaxAge The maximum age parameter specifies in seconds the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigures the STP network FwdDel The forward delay parameter specifies in seconds the amount of time that a bridge port has to wait before it changes from learning state to forwarding state Aging Prio port The aging time parameter spec
258. outer IP address VRRP information 1 vrid 2 205 178 18 210 if 1 renter prio 100 master server 2 vrid 1 205 178 118 202 if 1 renter prio 100 backup 3 vrid 3 205 178 18 204 if 1 renter prio 100 master proxy When virtual routers are configured you can view the status of each virtual router using this command VRRP information includes Virtual router number E Virtual router ID and IP address E Interface number Ownership status O owner identifies the preferred master virtual router A virtual router is the owner when the IP address of the virtual router and its IP interface are the same O renter identifies virtual routers which are not owned by this device E Priority value During the election process the virtual router with the highest priority becomes master E Activity status O master identifies the elected master virtual router O backup identifies that the virtual router is in backup mode O init identifies that the virtual router is waiting for a startup event For example once it receives a startup event it transitions to master if its priority is 255 the IP address owner or transitions to backup if it is not the IP address owner E Server status The server state identifies virtual routers E Proxy status The proxy state identifies virtual proxy routers where the virtual router shares the same IP address as a proxy IP address The use of virtual proxy routers enables redu
259. ow all SNMPv3 information Table 4 3 SNMPv3 information Menu Options info sys snmpv3 Command Syntax and Usage usm Displays User Security Model USM table information To view the table see page 61 view Displays information about view sub trees mask and type of view To view a sample see page 62 access Displays View based Access Control information To view a sample see page 63 group Displays information about the group that includes the security model user name and group name To view a sample see page 64 comm Displays information about the community table information To view a sample see page 64 taddr Displays the Target Address table information To view a sample see page 65 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu E 59 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 4 3 SNMPv3 information Menu Options info sys snmpv3 Command Syntax and Usage tparam Displays the Target parameters table information To view a sample see page 66 notify Displays the Notify table information To view a sample see page 67 dump Displays all the SNMPv3 information To view a sample see page 68 60 The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference info sys snmpv3 usm SNMPv3 USM User Table Information The User based Security Model USM in SNMPv3 provides security services such as authen tication and privacy of messages This security model makes use
260. p Clears VRRP statistics rip Displays Routing Information Protocol RIP statistics See page 159 for sample output igmpgrps Displays the total number of IGMP groups that are registered on the switch ipmcgrps Displays the total number of current IP multicast groups that are registered on the switch clrigmp Clears IGMP statistics ipclear Clears IP statistics Use this command with caution as it will delete all the IP statistics dump Dumps all Layer 3 statistics Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch performance If you want to capture dump data to a file set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command 142 m The Statistics Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference stats 13 ip IP Statistics IP statistics ipInReceives 3115873 ipInHdrErrors 1 ipInAddrErrors 35447 ipForwDatagrams 0 ipInUnknownProtos 500504 ipInDiscards 0 ipInDelivers 2334166 ipOutRequests 1010542 ipOutDiscards 4 ipOutNoRoutes 4 ipReasmReqds 0 ipReasmOKs 0 ipReasmFails 0 ipFragOKs 0 ipFragFails 0 ipFragCreates 0 ipRoutingDiscards 0 ipDefaultTTL 255 ipReasmTimeout 5 Table 5 15 IP Statistics stats l3 ip Statistics Description ipInReceives The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces including those received in error ipInHdrErrors The number of input datagrams d
261. packets 0 Total sent packets 0 Received updates 0 Sent updates 0 Keepalive 0 Holdtime 0 MinAdvTime 60 sastErrorCode unknown 0 LastErrorSubcode unspecified 0 Established state transitions 0 info 13 bgp summary BGP Summary information Following is an example of the information that info 13 bgp summary provides BGP Peer Summary Information Peer V AS MsgRcvd MsgSent Up Down State 1 205 178 23 142 4 142 113 121 00 00 28 established 22 205 178 15 148 0 148 0 0 never connect 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu 103 Alteon OS Command Reference info 13 bgp dump Show all BGP Information Following is an example of the information that info 13 bgp dump provides gt gt BGP dump 104 m The Information Menu The 13 0 0 0 is filtered out by rrmap or Status codes valid gt best i internal Origin codes i IGP EGP incomplete Network Next Hop Metr LcPrf Wght Path gt 10 0 0 0 205 178 210 147 1 256 147 148 i 1209 ETG L90 0 0 0 0 Od g 205 178 21 147 1 128 147 i gt 205 178 17 0 205 178 21 147 i 128 147 i 13 0 0 0 205 178 21 147 1 256 147 35 a loop detected 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference info 13 ospf OSPF Information OSPF Information Menu general Show general information aindex Show area s information TE Show interface s information virtual Show details of virtual links nbr Show neighbor s inf
262. packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces Rx ls Requests The sum total of all Link State Request packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces Tx ls Requests The sum total of all Link State Request packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces Rx ls Acks The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces Tx ls Acks The sum total of all Link State Acknowledgement packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces Rx ls Updates The sum total of all Link State Update packets received on all OSPF areas and interfaces Tx ls Updates The sum total of all Link State Update packets transmitted on all OSPF areas and interfaces 43W7774 May 2007 The Statistics Menu E 155 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 5 24 OSPF General Statistics stats I3 ospf general Continued Statistics Description Nbr Change Stats hello The sum total of all Hello packets received from neighbors on all OSPF areas and interfaces Start The sum total number of neighbors in this state that is an indication that Hello packets should now be sent to the neighbor at intervals of He 1 loInterval seconds across all OSPF areas and interfaces n2way The sum total number of bidirectional communication establishment between this router and other neighboring routers adjoint ok The sum total number of decisions to be made again as to whether an adjacency sho
263. page 250 gw lt default gateway number 1 4 gt Displays the IP Default Gateway Menu To view menu options see page 251 route Displays the IP Static Route Menu To view menu options see page 253 mroute Displays the Static IP Multicast Route Menu To view menu options see page 254 arp Displays the Address Resolution Protocol Menu To view menu options see page 255 frwd Displays the IP Forwarding Menu To view menu options see page 257 nwt lt Network filter number 1 256 gt Displays the Network Filter Configuration Menu To view menu options see page 258 248 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 53 Layer 3 Configuration Menu cfg I3 Command Syntax and Usage rmap lt route map number 1 32 gt Displays the Route Map Menu To view menu options see page 259 rip Displays the Routing Interface Protocol Menu To view menu options see page 263 ospf Displays the OSPF Menu To view menu options see page 266 bgp Displays the Border Gateway Protocol Menu To view menu options see page 276 igmp Displays the IGMP Menu To view menu options see page 282 dns Displays the IP Domain Name System Menu To view menu options see page 292 bootp Displays the Bootstrap Protocol Menu To view menu options see page 293 vrrp Displays the Virtual Router Redundancy Configuration Menu To view menu options see page 294 rt
264. pe none info 13 ospf dbase OSPF Database Information OSPF Database Menu advrtr LS Database info for an Advertising Router asbrsum ASBR Summary LS Database info dbsumm LS Database summary ext External LS Database info nw Network LS Database info nssa NSSA External LS Database info ree Router LS Database info self Self Originated LS Database info summ Network Summary LS Database info all All Table 4 30 OSPF Database Information Menu Options info l3 ospf dbase Command Syntax and Usage advrtr lt router id A B C D gt Takes advertising router as a parameter Displays all the Link State Advertisements LSAs in the LS database that have the advertising router with the specified router ID for example 20 1 1 1 asbrsum lt adv rtr A B C D gt lt link_state_id A B C D gt lt self gt Displays ASBR summary LSAs The usage of this command is as follows a asbrsum adv rtr 20 1 1 1 displays ASBR summary LSAs having the advertising router 20 1 1 1 b asbrsum link_state_id 10 1 1 1 displays ASBR summary LSAs having the link state ID 10 1 1 1 c asbrsum self displays the self advertised ASBR summary LSAs d asbrsum with no parameters displays all the ASBR summary LSAs 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu 107 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 4 30 OSPF Database Information Menu Options info l3 ospf dbase Command Syntax and
265. pecifies a certain time span in sec onds that when exhausted would cause the packet to be discarded The TTL is determined by the number of router hops the packet is allowed before it must be discarded This command specifies the number of router hops that the IP packet can make This value is used to restrict the number of hops the advertisement makes It is also used to support multi hops which allow BGP peers to talk across a routed network The default number is set at 1 addi lt route map ID 1 32 gt Adds route map into in route map list addo lt route map ID 1 32 gt Adds route map into out route map list remi lt route map ID 1 32 gt Removes route map from in route map list remo lt route map ID 1 32 gt Removes route map from out route map list ena Enables this peer configuration dis Disables this peer configuration del Deletes this peer configuration cur Displays the current BGP peer configuration 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 279 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 bgp peer redist BGP Redistribution Configuration Redistribution Menu metric Set default metric of advertised routes default Set default route action rip Enable disable advertising RIP routes ospf Enable disable advertising OSPF routes fixed Enable disable advertising fixed routes static Enable disable advertising static routes cur Display current redistri
266. plays the current IGMP version 3 configuration cfg 13 igmp relay IGMP Relay Configuration IGMP Relay Menu mrtr Upstream Multicast Router Menu add Add VLAN s to downstream rem Remove VLAN s from downstream clear Remove all VLAN s from downstream report Set unsolicited report interval ena Enable IGMP Relay dis Disable IGMP Relay eur Display current IGMP Relay configuration Table 6 83 describes the commands used to configure IGMP Relay Table 6 82 IGMP Relay Menu Options cfg I3 igmp relay Command Syntax and Usage mrtr lt multicast router number 1 2 gt Displays the Upstream Multicast Router Menu To view menu options see page 286 add lt VLAN number 1 4094 gt Adds the VLAN to the list of IGMP Relay VLANs rem lt VLAN number 1 4094 gt Removes the VLAN from the list of IGMP Relay VLANs clear Removes all VLANs from the list of IGMP Relay VLANs report lt 0 50 gt Configures the interval between unsolicited Join reports sent by the switch in seconds The default value is 10 ena Enables IGMP Relay 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 285 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 82 IGMP Relay Menu Options cfg I3 igmp relay Command Syntax and Usage dis Disables IGMP Relay cur Displays the current IGMP Relay configuration cfg 13 igmp mrtr lt Mrouter number gt IGMP Relay Multicast Router Configuration
267. plink Ethernet Switch Module 18 44 05 Wed Jan 3 2007 The switch is booted with factory default configuration To ease the configuration of the switch a Set Up facility which will prompt you with those configuration items that are essential to the operation of the switch is provided Would you like to run Set Up to configure the switch y n NOTE If the default admin login is unsuccessful or if the administrator Main Menu appears instead the system configuration has probably been changed from the factory default settings If you are certain that you need to return the switch to its factory default settings see Select ing a Configuration Block on page 336 3 Enter y to begin the initial configuration of the switch or n to bypass the Setup facility 43W7774 May 2007 First Time Configuration 33 Alteon OS Command Reference Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually Stopping Setup To abort the Setup utility press lt Ctrl C gt during any Setup question When you abort Setup the system will prompt Would you like to run from top again y n Enter n to abort Setup or y to restart the Setup program at the beginning Restarting Setup You can restart the Setup utility manually at any time by entering the following command at the administrator prompt cfg setup Setup Part 1 Basic System Configuration When Setup is started the system prompts Set Up will wa
268. previous configuration and stop exporting the routes of the protocol enter none cur Displays the current route map settings 274 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 ospf md5key lt key ID gt OSPF MD5 Key Configuration OSPF MD5 Key 1 Menu key Set authentication key delet Delete key cur Display current MD5 key configuration Table 6 74 OSPF MD5 Key Configuration Menu Options cfg ip ospf md5key Command Syntax and Usage key Sets the authentication key for this OSPF packet delete Deletes the authentication key for this OSPF packet cur Displays the current MDS key configuration 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 275 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 bgp Border Gateway Protocol Configuration Border Gateway Protocol Menu peer Peer menu aggr Aggregation menu as Set Autonomous System AS number pref Set Local Preference on Globally turn BGP ON off Globally turn BGP OFF cur Display current BGP configuration Border Gateway Protocol BGP is an Internet protocol that enables routers on a network to share routing information with each other and advertise information about the segments of the IP address space they can access within their network with routers on external networks BGP allows you to decide what is the best route for a packet to take from your network to a desti nation on anoth
269. ps 443 DNS 53 Port NAT Network Address Any time an IP address is changed from one source IP or destination IP address to another Translation address network address translation can be said to have taken place In general half NAT is when the destination IP or source IP address is changed from one address to another Full NAT is when both addresses are changed from one address to another No NAT is when neither source nor destination IP addresses are translated Preemption In VRRP preemption will cause a Virtual Router that has a lower priority to go into backup should a peer Virtual Router start advertising with a higher priority Priority In VRRP the value given to a Virtual Router to determine its ranking with its peer s Min imum value is 1 and maximum value is 254 Default is 100 A higher number will win out for master designation Proto Protocol The protocol of a frame Can be any value represented by a 8 bit value in the IP header adherent to the IP specification for example TCP UDP OSPF ICMP and so on SIP Source IP Address The source IP address of a frame SPort Source Port The source port application socket for example HTTP 80 HTTPS 443 DNS 53 Tracking In VRRP a method to increase the priority of a virtual router and thus master designation with preemption enabled Tracking can be very valuable in an active active configuration You can track the following m ifs Active IP interfaces on the GbE Swit
270. r condi tions obtained are according to the conventions of IEEE 802 3 Layer Management counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC 132 m The Statistics Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 5 6 Ethernet Statistics for Port stats port ether Statistics Description dot3StatsInternal A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due MacReceiveErrors to an internal MAC sub layer receive error A frame is only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by the corresponding instance of either the dot 3StatsFrameTooLongs object the dot 3Stats AlignmentErrors object or the dot 3StatsFCSErrors object The precise meaning of the count represented by an instance of this object is implementation specific In particular an instance of this object may represent a count of received errors on a particular interface that are not otherwise counted 43W7774 May 2007 The Statistics Menu E 133 Alteon OS Command Reference stats port lt port alias or number gt if Interface Statistics This menu option enables you to display the interface statistics of the selected port Interface statistics for port EXT1 ifHCIn Counters ifHCOut Counters Octets 51697080313 51721056808 UcastPkts 65356399 65385714 BroadcastPkts 0 6516 ulticastPkts 0 0 Discards 0 0 Errors 0 21187 Table 5 7 Interface Statistics for Por
271. ration Metering Menu Cir Set committed rate in KiloBits s mbsize Set maximum burst size in KiloBits nabl Enable disable port metering dpass Set to Drop or Pass out of profile traffic reset Reset meter parameters c r Display current settings This menu defines the metering profile for the selected ACL Table 6 106 ACL Metering Menu Options cfg acl acl x meter Command Syntax and Usage cir lt 64 10000000 gt Configures the committed rate in Kilobits per second The committed rate must be a multiple of 64 mbsize lt 32 4096 gt Configures the maximum burst size in Kilobits Enter one of the following values for mbsize 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048 4096 enable e d Enables or disables metering on the ACL dpass drop pass Configures the ACL Meter to either drop or pass out of profile traffic reset Reset ACL Metering parameters to their default values cur Displays current ACL Metering parameters 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 313 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg acl acl lt ACL number gt re mark Re Mark Configuration Re mark Menu inprof In Profile Menu outprof Out Profile Menu reset Reset re mark settings cur Display current settings You can choose to re mark IP header data for the selected ACL You can configure different re mark values based on whether packets fall within the ACL Metering profil
272. rations For example you can use the Opera tions Menu to immediately disable a port without the need to apply or save the change with the understanding that when the switch is reset the port returns to its normally configured operation 43W7774 May 2007 323 Alteon OS Command Reference oper Operations Menu Operations Menu port Operational Port Menu vrrp Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu ip Operational IP Menu passwd Change current user password clrlog Clear syslog messages conlog Enable Disable Session Console Logging cfgtrk Track last config change made ntpreq Send NTP request The commands of the Operations Menu enable you to alter switch operational characteristics without affecting switch configuration Table 7 1 Operations Menu oper Command Syntax and Usage port lt port alias or number gt Displays the Operational Port Menu To view menu options see page 325 vrrp Displays the Operational Virtual Router Redundancy Menu To view menu options see page 327 ip Displays the IP Operations Menu which has one sub menu option the Operational Border Gate way Protocol Menu To view menu options see page 327 passwd lt 15 char max gt Allows the user to change the password You need to enter the current password in use for valida tion clrlog Clears all Syslog messages conlog enable disable Enables of disables console logging of the curre
273. re parameters that affect the selected port in the GbESM These settings override the global 802 1x parameters Table 6 32 802 1x Port Configuration Menu Options cfg l2 8021 x port Command Syntax and Usage mode force unauth auto force auth Sets the type of access control for the port m force unauth the port is unauthorized unconditionally m auto the port is unauthorized until it is successfully authorized by the RADIUS server m force auth the port is authorized unconditionally allowing all traffic The default value is force auth qtperiod lt 0 65535 gt Sets the time in seconds the authenticator waits before transmitting an EAP Request Identity frame to the supplicant client after an authentication failure in the previous round of authentica tion The default value is 60 seconds txperiod lt 65535 gt Sets the time in seconds the authenticator waits for an EAP Response Identity frame from the supplicant client before retransmitting an EAP Request Identity frame The default value is 30 seconds suptmout lt 65535 gt Sets the time in seconds the authenticator waits for an EAP Response packet from the supplicant client before retransmitting the EAP Request packet from the authentication server The default value is 30 seconds 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 219 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 32 802 1x Port Configuration Menu Options cfg l2 8021 x port Comma
274. reens displayed by your system Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed If you wish to change settings for individual ports enter the number of the port you wish to configure To skip port configuration press lt Enter gt without specifying any port and go to Setup Part 3 VLANs on page 38 2 Configure Gigabit Ethernet port flow parameters If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector the system prompts Gig Link Configuration Port Flow Control Current Port EXT1 flow control setting both Enter new value rx tx both none Enter rx to enable receive flow control tx for transmit flow control both to enable both or none to turn flow control off for the port To keep the current setting press lt Enter gt 36 First Time Configuration 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference 3 Configure Gigabit Ethernet port autonegotiation mode If you selected a port that has a Gigabit Ethernet connector the system prompts Port Auto Negotiation Current Port EXT1 autonegotiation on Enter new value on off Enter on to enable port autonegotiation off to disable it or press lt Enter gt to keep the current setting 4 Ifconfiguring VLANs enable or disable VLAN tagging for the port If you have selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1 the system pro
275. ress vian Show groups on a single vlan port Show groups on a single port trunk Show groups on a single trunk detail Show detail of a single group by IP address dump Show all groups clear Clear group tables Table 9 7 describes the IGMP Maintenance commands Table 9 8 IGMP Multicast Group Maintenance Menu Options maint igmp group Command Syntax and Usage find lt IP address gt Displays a single IGMP multicast group by its IP address vlan lt VLAN number gt Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single VLAN port lt Port number or alias gt Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single port trunk lt Trunk Group number gt Displays all IGMP multicast groups on a single trunk group detail lt P address gt Displays detailed information about a single IGMP multicast group dump Displays information for all multicast groups clear Clears the IGMP group tables 348 m The Maintenance Menu 43W7774 May 2007 maint igmp mrouter IGMP Multicast Routers Maintenance Alteon OS Command Reference IGMP Multicast Routers Menu vian Show all multicast router ports on a single vlan dump Show all multicast router ports clear Clear multicast router port table Table 9 7 describes the IGMP multicast router Mrouter maintenance commands Table 9 9 IGMP Mrouter Maintenance Menu Options maint igmp mrouter Command Syntax and Usage vlan lt VL
276. revesrtosdnacesvetnseasststessntee sucess 137 Final Steps cc cssccecsesertcdovecnssoceevs stavelvanvensmuaysveneeecs 41 first time configuration eeeeeeeeeeee 28 31 to 46 fixed TP route tag cccccccseesssssccecesssseececeesseeeseeeses 99 flag field flow control va lt sscdsscecsacseeecedaxcescssxeedeeseeeseeese 56 119 CONFIQUTING sececessecesseeecesececeeeeeeeneeeees 211 SOCUP oes E E E eas eens T 36 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference forwarding configuration IP forwarding configuration ceeeeeeeee 257 forwarding database FDB ccccceeseeeeeeeees 339 delete entry sco esas eek ieee 343 Forwarding Database Information Menu 76 Forwarding Database Menu eeseeeeeeeeeeeeee 343 forwarding state FWD 2 0000 77 86 92 93 fwd STP bridge option ce eeeeeeesseeeeeneeeeeeeeee 230 FwdDel forward delay bridge port 86 89 92 G GEA Port mapping see eeeeeeeeseeeceseeeeceneeeneeees 121 gig Port Menu option es eeeeeeeessreeeesneeeeeeees 209 Gigabit Ethernet COMPIPULALION c5cc ccrieonessonndeoseseseesnecesecese see 209 Gigabit Ethernet Physical Link eesseeeeeeee 209 global commands ssceesseceesececeseeeceeeeesseeeees 50 GTEEN WICH siesccfassevescsseeesenccessects cites conensesshceeeanstes 187 Greenwich Mean Time GMT cceeseeeseeees 187 gtcfg TFTP load command s
277. rface Enter interface number 1 128 Repeat the steps in this section until all IP interfaces have been configured When all interfaces have been configured press lt Enter gt without specifying any interface number Default Gateways 1 Atthe prompt select a default gateway for configuration or skip default gateway config uration IP default gateways Enter default gateway number 1 4 Enter the number for the default gateway to be configured To skip default gateway configura tion press lt Enter gt without typing a gateway number and go to IP Routing on page 41 2 At the prompt enter the IP address for the selected default gateway Current IP address O0 00 Enter new IP address Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or press lt Enter gt without specifying an address to accept the current setting 40 m First Time Configuration 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference 3 At the prompt enter y to enable the default gateway or n to leave it disabled Enable default gateway y n 4 Thesystem prompts you to configure another default gateway Enter default gateway number 1 132 Repeat the steps in this section until all default gateways have been configured When all default gateways have been configured press lt Enter gt without specifying any number IP Routing When IP interfaces are configured for th
278. rface_id gt BGP peer lt bgp_peer_id gt IP interface lt ip_interface_id gt is not enabled Rebooted lt last_reset_information gt Rebooted lt last_reset_information gt administrator logged in Enable auto negotiation for copper GIG port lt port gt Change fiber GIG port lt port gt mode to full duplex Change fiber GIG port lt port gt speed to 1000 Boot config block changed Boot image changed Switch reset from CLI Syslog host changed to lt ip_address gt Syslog host changed to this host 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference LOG_NOTICE continued 43W7774 May 2007 MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT MGMT Second syslog host changed to lt ip_address gt Second syslog host changed to this host Next boot will use active config block User password changed Operator password changed Administrator password changed RADIUS server timeouts Failed login attempt via TELNET from host s Failed login attempt via the CONSOLE PASSWORD FIX UP MODE IN USE lt login_level gt login on Console lt login_level gt lt idle timeout logout gt from Console mn lt login_level gt lt from connection closed idle timeout logout gt Administrator logout from BBI lt login_level gt login from host lt ip_address gt System clock set to lt time gt PANIC command from CLI Switch reset scheduled
279. rid lt IP address such as 192 4 17 101 gt Sets the router ID cur Displays the current IP configuration 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 249 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 if lt interface number gt IP Interface Configuration IP Interface 1 Menu addr Set IP address mask Set subnet mask vian Set VLAN number relay Enable or disable BOOTP relay ena Enable interfac dis Disable interface del Delete interfac cur Display current interface configuration The GbE Switch Module can be configured with up to 128 IP interfaces Each IP interface repre sents the GbE Switch Module on an IP subnet on your network The Interface option is disabled by default NoTE To maintain connectivity between the management module and the GbE Switch Mod ule use the management module interface to change the IP address of the switch Table 6 54 IP Interface Menu Options cfg I3 if Command Syntax and Usage addr lt P address such as 192 4 17 101 gt Configures the IP address of the switch interface using dotted decimal notation mask lt P subnet mask such as 255 255 255 0 gt Configures the IP subnet address mask for the interface using dotted decimal notation vlan lt VLAN number 1 4095 gt Configures the VLAN number for this interface Each interface can belong to one VLAN though any VLAN can have multiple IP interfaces in it relay disable enable
280. rity reset Reset all fields cur Display current parameters This menu allows you to define Ethernet matching criteria for an ACL Table 6 103 Ethernet Filtering Menu Options cfg acl acl x ethernet Command Syntax and Usage smac lt MAC address such as 00 60 cf 40 56 00 gt lt mask FF FF FF FF FF FF gt Defines the source MAC address for this ACL dmac lt MAC address such as 00 60 cf 40 56 00 gt lt mask FF FF FF FF FF FF gt Defines the destination MAC address for this ACL vlan lt 1 4095 gt lt VLAN mask Oxfff gt Defines a VLAN number and mask for this ACL etype ARP IP IPv6 MPLS RARP any OxXXXX Defines the Ethernet type for this ACL pri lt 0 7 gt Defines the Ethernet priority value for the ACL 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 309 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 103 Ethernet Filtering Menu Options cfg acl acl x ethernet Command Syntax and Usage reset Resets Ethernet parameters for the ACL to their default values cur Displays the current Ethernet parameters for the ACL cfg acl acl lt ACL number gt ipv4 IP version 4 Filtering Configuration filter filter filter filter on on on on Reset all fields Display current parameters Filtering IPv4 Menu sip Set to dip Set to proto Set to tos Set to reset cur source IP address destination IP address prototype TOS This menu allows
281. rity Enable Disable use of TOS precedence reset cur Reset in profile uplp settings Display current settings Table 6 109 ACL Re Mark User Priority Menu cfg acl acl x re mark inprof up1p Command Syntax and Usage value lt 0 7 gt Defines 802 1p value The value is the priority bits information in the packet structure utosp enable disable Enable or disable mapping of TOS Type of Service priority to 802 1p priority for In Profile packets When enabled the TOS value is used to set the 802 1p value reset Resets UP1P settings to their default values cur Displays current Re Mark In Profile User Priority parameters 316 The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg acl acl lt ACL number gt re mark outprof Re Marking Out of Profile Configuration Re marking Out Of Profile Menu updscp Set the update DSCP reset reset update DSCP setting cur Display current settings Table 6 110 ACL Re Mark Out of Profile Menu cfg acl acl x re mark outprof Command Syntax and Usage updscp lt 0 63 gt Sets the DiffServ Code Point DSCP of Out of Profile packets to the selected value The switch sets the DSCP value on Out of Profile packets reset Resets the update DSCP parameters for Out of Profile packets to their default values cur Displays current Re Mark Out of Profile parameters cfg acl acl lt ACL number gt
282. roring and enabling or disabling Server Load Balancing func tions It is also used for activating or deactivating optional software packages Boot Options Menu This menu is used for upgrading switch software selecting configuration blocks and for resetting the switch when necessary Maintenance Menu This menu is used for debugging purposes enabling you to generate a dump of the critical state information in the switch and to clear entries in the forwarding database and the ARP and routing tables Menu Basics E 49 Alteon OS Command Reference 50 Menu Basics Global Commands Some basic commands are recognized throughout the menu hierarchy These commands are useful for obtaining online help navigating through menus and for applying and saving con figuration changes For help on a specific command type help You will see the following screen Global Commands help lines diff revert apply ping pushd chpass_s The following are used to navigate the menu structure Print current menu ove up one menu level can be issued from any menu up print pwd verbose exit quit apply save revert traceroute telnet history popd who chpass_p Top menu if first or command separator Execute command from history Table 3 1 Description of Global Commands Command Action command Provides more information about a specific command on the current menu or help Whe
283. rough IGMP Snooping Table 4 33 IGMP Mrouter Information Menu Options info igmp mrouter Command Syntax and Usage vlan lt VLAN number gt Displays the multicast router ports configured or learned on the selected VLAN dump Displays information for all multicast groups learned by the switch 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu E 113 Alteon OS Command Reference info 13 igmp mrouter dump IGMP Mrouter Information VLAN Port Version Expires Max Query Resp Time QRV QQIC 1 EXT1 v3 4 09 128 2 125 2 EXT3 V2 4 09 125 3 EXT4 v2 static unknown IGMP Mrouter information includes E VLAN and port where the Mrouter is connected IGMP version Mrouter expiration Maximum query response time Querier s Robustness Variable QRV Querier s Query Interval Code QQIC 114 The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference info 13 vrrp VRRP Information Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP support on GbE Switch Module provides redun dancy between routers in a LAN This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP capable routing device One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master based on a number of priority criteria and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address If the master fails one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual r
284. rough the VRRP Tracking Menu see page 303 Criteria are tracked dynamically continuously updating virtual router priority levels when enabled If the virtual router preemption option see preem in Table 6 92 on page 296 is enabled this virtual router can assume master routing authority when its priority level rises above that of the current master Some tracking criteria vrs ifs and ports below apply to standard virtual routers other wise called virtual interface routers A virtual server router is defined as any virtual router whose IP address addr is the same as any configured virtual server IP address Table 6 93 Virtual Router Priority Tracking Menu Options cfg l3 vrrp vr track Command Syntax and Usage vrs disable enable When enabled the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each virtual router in master mode on this switch This is useful for making sure that traffic for any particular client server pair ing are handled by the same switch increasing routing and load balancing efficiency This com mand is disabled by default ifs disable enable When enabled the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each other IP interface active on this switch An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master This command is disabled by default ports disa
285. rrent administrator password Note If you forget your administrator password call your technical support representative for help using the password fix up mode 7 Enter the new administrator password at the prompt Enter new administrator password 8 Enter the new administrator password again at the prompt Re enter new administrator password 9 Apply and save your change by entering the following commands System apply System save Changing the Default User Password The user login has limited control of the switch Through a user account you can view switch information and statistics but you can t make configuration changes The default password for the user account is user This password can be changed from the user account The administrator can change all passwords as shown in the following proce dure 1 Connect to the switch and log in using the admin password 2 From the Main Menu use the following command to access the Configuration Menu Main cfg 3 From the Configuration Menu use the following command to select the System Menu gt gt Configuration sys 43W7774 May 2007 First Time Configuration 45 Alteon OS Command Reference 4 From the System Menu use the following command to select the System Access Menu gt gt System access 5 Select the user password System user usrpw 6 Ent
286. rt lt port alias or number gt ether Ethernet Statistics This menu option enables you to display the ethernet statistics of the selected port Fl ft dot3StatsFCSErrors dot 3StatsSingleCollisionFrames dot 3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames dot 3StatsLateCollisions dot 3StatsExcessiveCollisions dot 3StatsInternalMacTransmitErrors NA dot3StatsFrameTooLongs dot 3StatsInternalMacReceiveErrors 0 hernet statistics for port INT1 dot3StatsAlignmentErrors OOOO oO Table 5 6 Ethernet Statistics for Port stats port ether Statistics Description dot 3StatsAlignment Errors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are not an inte gral number of octets in length and do not pass the Frame Check Sequence FCS check The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the alignmentError status is returned by the MAC service to the Logical Link Control LLC or other MAC user Received frames for which multiple error conditions obtained are according to the conven tions of IEEE 802 3 Layer Management counted exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC dot 3StatsFCSErrors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the Frame Check Sequence FCS check The count represented by an instance of this object is incremented when the fr
287. rvice snmpInBadTypes The total number of SNMP Messages which failed ASN parsing snmpInTooBigs The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units PDUs which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error status field is too big snmpInNoSuchNames The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units PDUs which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error status field is noSuchName snmpInBadValues The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units PDUs which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error status field is badValue snmpInReadOnlys The total number of valid SNMP Protocol Data Units PDUs which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error status field is read Only It should be noted that it is a protocol error to generate an SNMP PDU which contains the value read Only in the error status field As such this object is provided as a means of detecting incorrect implementations of the SNMP snmpInGenErrs The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units PDUs which were delivered to the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error status field is genErr snmpInTotalReqVars The total number of MIB objects which have been retrieved successfully by the SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP Get Request and Get Next Protocol Data Units PDU
288. rward multicast traffic only to those ports that request it IGMP snooping prevents multicast traffic from being flooded to all ports The switch learns which server hosts are interested in receiving multicast traffic and forwards it only to ports connected to those servers Table 6 80 describes the commands used to configure IGMP Snooping Table 6 80 IGMP Snoop Menu Options cfg l3 igmp snoop Command Syntax and Usage igmpv3 Displays the IGMP version 3 Menu To view menu options see page 284 mrto lt J 600 seconds gt Configures the timeout value for IGMP Membership Queries mrouter Once the timeout value is reached the switch removes the multicast router from its IGMP table if the proper conditions are met The range is from 1 to 600 seconds The default is 255 seconds aggr enable disable Enables or disables IGMP Membership Report aggregation srcip lt IJP address such as 192 4 17 101 gt Configures the source IP address used as a proxy for IGMP Group Specific Queries add lt VLAN number 1 4094 gt Adds the selected VLAN s to IGMP Snooping rem lt VLAN number 1 4094 gt Removes the selected VLAN s from IGMP Snooping clear Removes all VLANs from IGMP Snooping 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 283 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 80 IGMP Snoop Menu Options cfg I3 igmp snoop Command Syntax and Usage ena Enables IGMP Snooping dis Disables IG
289. s 166 The Statistics Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 5 31 SNMP Statistics stats snmp Statistics Description snmpInTotalSetVars The total number of MIB objects which have been altered successfully by the SNMP protocol entity as a result of receiving valid SNMP Set Request Protocol Data Units PDUs snmpInGetRequests The total number of SNMP Get Request Protocol Data Units PDUs which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity snmpInGetNexts The total number of SNMP Get Next Protocol Data Units PDUs which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity snmpInSetRequests The total number of SNMP Set Request Protocol Data Units PDUs which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity snmpInGetResponses The total number of SNMP Get Response Protocol Data Units PDUs which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity snmpinTraps The total number of SNMP Trap Protocol Data Units PDUs which have been accepted and processed by the SNMP protocol entity snmpOut TooBigs The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units PDUs which were gen erated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the value of the error status field is too big snmpOutNoSuchNames The total number of SNMP Protocol Data Units PDUs which were gen erated by the SNMP protocol entity and for which the valu
290. s Miscellaneous Debug Menu touf Show MP trace buffer snap Show MP snap or post mortem trace buffer clrcfg Clear all flash configs The Miscellaneous Debug Menu displays trace buffer information about events that can be helpful in understanding switch operation You can view the following information using the debug menu E Events traced by the Management Processor MP E Events traced to a buffer area when a reset occurs If the switch resets for any reason the MP trace buffer is saved into the snap trace buffer area The output from these commands can be interpreted by IBM Service Support Table 9 4 Miscellaneous Debug Menu Options maint debug Command Syntax and Usage tbuf Displays the Management Processor trace buffer Header information similar to the following is shown MP trace buffer at 13 28 15 Fri May 25 2001 mask Ox2ffdf748 The buffer information is displayed after the header snap Displays the Management Processor snap or post mortem trace buffer This buffer contains infor mation traced at the time that a reset occurred clrcfg Deletes all flash configuration blocks 344 m The Maintenance Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference maint arp ARP Cache Maintenance Address Resolution Protocol Menu find Show a single ARP entry by IP address port Show ARP entries on a single port vlan Show ARP entries on a single VLAN addr Show ARP en
291. s secret lt 32 character secret gt This is the shared secret between the switch and the RADIUS server s secret2 lt 32 character secret gt This is the secondary shared secret between the switch and the RADIUS server s port lt RADIUS port configure default 1645 gt Enter the number of the UDP port to be configured between 1500 3000 The default is 1645 retries lt RADIUS server retries 1 3 gt Sets the number of failed authentication requests before switching to a different RADIUS server The default is 3 requests timeout lt RADIUS server timeout seconds 1 10 gt Sets the amount of time in seconds before a RADIUS server authentication attempt is considered to have failed The default is 3 seconds telnet disablelenable Enables or disables the RADIUS backdoor for telnet The telnet command also applies to SSH SCP connections and the Browser Based Interface BBI The default is disabled To obtain the RADIUS backdoor password for your GbESM contact your IBM Service and Support line on Enables the RADIUS server 180 The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 5 System Configuration Menu Options cfg sys radius Command Syntax and Usage off Disables the RADIUS server cur Displays the current RADIUS server parameters 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu 181 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg sys tacacs TACA
292. s The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received icmpInTimeExcds The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received icmpInParmP robs The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received icmpInSrcQuenchs The number of ICMP Source Quench buffer almost full stop send ing data messages received icmpInRedirects icmpInEchos The number of ICMP Redirect messages received The number of ICMP Echo request messages received icmpInEchoReps The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received icmpInTimestamps The number of ICMP Timestamp request messages received icmpInTimestampReps The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages received icmpInAddrMasks The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages received icmpInAddrMaskReps The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages received icmpOutMsgs The total number of ICMP messages which this entity the switch attempted to send Note that this counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors icmpOutErro rs The number of ICMP messages which this entity the switch did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffer This value should not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant data gram In some implementations there may be no types of errors that contribute to this counter s value icmpOutDes
293. s 1 120 gt Sets the number of failed health check attempts required before declaring this default gateway inoperative The range is from 1 to 120 attempts The default is 8 attempts arp disable enable Enables or disables Address Resolution Protocol ARP health checks This command is disabled by default 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 251 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 55 Default Gateway Menu Options cfg I3 gw Command Syntax and Usage ena Enables the gateway for use dis Disables the gateway del Deletes the gateway from the configuration cur Displays the current gateway settings 252 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 route IP Static Route Configuration IP Static Route Menu add Add static route rem Remove static route cur Display current static routes Up to 128 static routes can be configured Table 6 56 IP Static Route Configuration Menu Options cfg I3 route Command Syntax and Usage add lt destination gt lt mask gt lt gateway gt lt interface number gt Adds a static route You will be prompted to enter a destination IP address destination subnet mask and gateway address Enter all addresses using dotted decimal notation rem lt destination gt lt mask gt Removes a static route The destination address of the route to remove must be specified using dot ted decimal n
294. s enabled cur Displays the current SNMP configuration 190 The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 SNMPv3 Configuration SNMP version 3 SNMPvV3 is an extensible SNMP Framework that supplements the SNMPv2 Framework by supporting the following a new SNMP message format security for messages access control remote configuration of SNMP parameters For more details on the SNMPv3 architecture please refer to RFC2271 to RFC2276 SNMPv3 Menu usm view access group comm taddr tparam notify viv2 cur usmUser Table menu vacmViewTreeFamily Table menu vacmAccess Table menu vacmSecurityToGroup Table menu community Table menu targetAddr Table menu targetParams Table menu notify Table menu Enable disable V1 V2 access Display current SNMPv3 configuration Table 6 10 SNMPv3 Configuration Menu Options cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 Command Syntax and Usage usm lt usmUser number 1 16 gt This command allows you to create a user security model USM entry for an authorized user You can also configure this entry through SNMP To view menu options see page 193 view lt vacmViewTreeFamily number 1 128 gt This command allows you to create different MIB views To view menu options see page 194 access lt vacmAccess number 1 32 gt This command allows you to specify access rights The View based Access Control
295. s the Main Menu for the administrator login Some features are not available under the user login Main Menu info Information Menu stats Statistics Menu cfg Configuration Menu oper Operations Command Menu boot Boot Options Menu maint Maintenance Menu diff Show pending config changes global command apply Apply pending config changes global command sav Save updated config to FLASH global command revert Revert pending or applied changes global command exit Exit global command always available 48 m Menu Basics 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Menu Summary 43W7774 May 2007 Information Menu Provides sub menus for displaying information about the current status of the switch from basic system settings to VLANs and more Statistics Menu Provides sub menus for displaying switch performance statistics Included are port IF IP ICMP TCP UDP SNMP routing ARP DNS and VRRP statistics Configuration Menu This menu is available only from an administrator login It includes sub menus for config uring every aspect of the switch Changes to configuration are not active until explicitly applied Changes can be saved to non volatile memory Operations Command Menu Operations level commands are used for making immediate and temporary changes to switch configuration This menu is used for bringing ports temporarily in and out of ser vice performing port mir
296. s Menu describes the use of the primary and alternate switch images how to load a new software image and how to reset the software to factory defaults Chapter 9 The Maintenance Menu shows how to generate and access a dump of critical switch state information how to clear it and how to clear part or all of the forwarding database Appendix A Alteon OS Syslog Messages shows a listing of syslog messages Appendix B Alteon OS SNMP Agent lists the Management Interface Bases MIBs sup ported in the switch software Glossary includes definitions of terminology used throughout the book Index includes pointers to the description of the key words used throughout the book 43W7774 May 2007 Preface 15 Alteon OS Command Reference 16 Preface Typographic Conventions The following table describes the typographic styles used in this book Table 1 Typographic Conventions Typeface or Meaning Example Symbol AaBbCc123 This type is used for names of commands View the readme txt file files and directories used within the text It also depicts on screen computer output and Main prompts AaBbCc123 This bold type appears in command exam Main sys ples It shows text that must be typed in exactly as shown lt AaBbCc123 gt _ This italicized type appears in command To establish a Telnet session enter examples as a parameter placeholder Replace the indicated text with the appropr
297. s Total number of valid IGMP packets received rxIgmpInvalidPkts Total number of invalid packets received rxIgmpGenQueries Total number of General Membership Query packets received rxIgmpGrpSpecificQueries Total number of Membership Query packets received from specific groups rxIgmpGroupSrcSpecificQueries Total number of Group Source Specific Queries GSSQ received rxIgmpLeaves Total number of Leave requests received rxIgmpReports Total number of Membership Reports received txIgmpReports Total number of Membership reports transmitted txIgmpGrpSpecificQueries Total number of Membership Query packets transmitted to specific groups txIgmpLeaves Total number of Leave messages transmitted rxIgmpV3CurrentStateRecords Total number of Current State records received rxIgmpV3SourceListChangeRecords Total number of Source List Change records received rxIgmpV3FilterChangeRecords Total number of Filter Change records received 152 The Statistics Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference stats 13 ospf OSPF Statistics OSPF stats Menu general Show global stats aindex Show area s stats if Show interface s stats Table 5 23 OSPF Statistics Menu stats I3 ospf Command Syntax and Usage general Displays global statistics See page 154 for sample output aindex Displays area statistics if Displays interface statistics
298. s and interfaces retransmit The sum total number of times the Retransmit timer has been fired across all OPSF areas and interfaces lsa lock The sum total number of times the Link State Advertisement LSA lock timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces lsa ack The sum total number of times the LSA Ack timer has been fired across all OSPF areas and interfaces dbage The total number of times the data base age Dbage has been fired summary The total number of times the Summary timer has been fired ase export The total number of times the Autonomous System Export ASE timer has been fired 43W7774 May 2007 The Statistics Menu E 157 Alteon OS Command Reference stats 13 vrrp VRRP Statistics Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol VRRP support on the GbE Switch Module provides redundancy between routers in a LAN This is accomplished by configuring the same virtual router IP address and ID number on each participating VRRP capable routing device One of the virtual routers is then elected as the master based on a number of priority criteria and assumes control of the shared virtual router IP address If the master fails one of the backup virtual routers will assume routing authority and take control of the virtual router IP address When virtual routers are configured you can display protocol statistics for VRRP The statistics for the VRRP LAN are displayed vrrpInAdvers vrrpOutAdvers vrrp
299. s the View based Access Control entry cur Displays the View based Access Control configuration 196 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 group SNMPv3 Group Configuration SNMPv3 vacmSecurityToGroup 1 Menu model Set security model uname Set USM user name gname Set group gname del Delete vacmSecurityToGroup entry cur Display current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration Table 6 14 SNMPv3 Group Menu Options cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 group Command Syntax and Usage model usm snmpv1 snmpv2 Defines the security model uname lt 32 character name gt Sets the user name as defined in cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 usm name on page 193 gname lt 32 character name gt The name for the access group as defined in cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 access name on page 195 del Deletes the vacmSecurityToGroup entry cur Displays the current vacmSecurityToGroup configuration 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 197 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 comm SNMPv3 Community Table Configuration This command is used for configuring the community table entry The configured entry is stored in the community table list in the SNMP engine This table is used to configure commu nity strings in the Local Configuration Datastore LCD of SNMP engine SNMPv3 snmpCommunityTable 1 Menu index Set community index name Set com
300. sable enable Enables or disables delivering syslog messages to the console When necessary disabling con sole ensures the switch is not affected by syslog messages It is enabled by default log lt feature all gt lt enable disable gt Displays a list of features for which syslog messages can be generated You can choose to enable disable specific features such as vlans stg or servers or enable disable syslog on all available features cur Displays the current syslog settings 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 177 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg sys sshd SSH Server Configuration SSHD Menu intrval Set Interval for generating th scpadm Set SCP only admin password hkeygen Generate the RSA host key skeygen Generate the RSA server key sshport Set SSH server port number ena Enable the SCP apply and save dis Disable the SCP apply and save on Turn SSH server ON off Turn SSH server OFF cur Display current SSH server configuration RSA server key For the GbE Switch Module this menu enables Secure Shell access from any SSH client SSH scripts can be viewed by using the cf g dump command see page 321 NoTE Except for cur the commands of this menu are only accessible through a serial con nection Table 6 4 System Configuration Menu Options cfg sys sshd Command Syntax and Usage intrval lt 0 24 gt Set the interval for auto generation of the
301. sage mode off active passive Set the LACP mode for this port as follows off Turn LACP off for this port You can use this port to manually configure a static trunk The default value is off m active Turn LACP on and set this port to active Active ports initiate LACPDUs E passive Turn LACP on and set this port to passive Passive ports do not initiate LACPDUs but respond to LACPDUs from active ports prio lt 1 65535 gt Sets the priority value for the selected port Lower numbers provide higher priority Default is 32768 adminkey lt 65535 gt Set the admin key for this port Only ports with the same admin key and oper key operational state generated internally can form a LACP trunk group cur Displays the current LACP configuration for this port 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 239 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 12 failovr Layer 2 Failover Configuration Failover Menu trigger Trigger Menu vlan Globally turn VLAN Monitor ON OFF on Globally turn Failover ON off Globally turn Failover OFF cur Display current Failover configuration Use this menu to configure Layer 2 Failover For more information about Layer 2 Failover see High Availability in the Alteon OS Application Guide Table 6 47 Layer 2 Failover Menu Options cfg l2 failovr Command Syntax and Usage trigger lt l 8 gt Displays the Failover Trigger menu To view menu options s
302. sage being received from the Supplicant authReauthswWhile Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHEN Authenticated TICATED to CONNECTING as a result of a re authentication request authEapStartsWhi Total number of times that the state machine transitions from leAuthenticated AUTHENTICATED to CONNECTING as a result of an EAPOL Start message being received from the Supplicant authEapLogoffWhi leAuthenticated backendResponses Total number of times that the state machine transitions from AUTHENTICATED to DISCONNECTED as a result of an EAPOL Logoff message being received from the Supplicant Total number of times that the state machine sends an initial Access Request packet to the Authentication server Indicates that the Authenti cator attempted communication with the Authentication Server backendAccessChal lenges Total number of times that the state machine receives an initial Access Challenge packet from the Authentication server Indicates that the Authentication Server has communication with the Authenticator backendOtherRe Total number of times that the state machine sends an EAP Request questsToSupplicant packet other than an Identity Notification Failure or Success message to the Supplicant Indicates that the Authenticator chose an EAP method backendNonNakRe Total number of times that the state machine receives a response from the sponsesFromSuppli
303. se the four external Ethernet ports on the switch module for man agement and control of the switch by selecting this mode as an option through the management module configuration utility program see the applicable BladeCenter Installation and User s Guide publications for more information NOTE Support for both management modules is included within the single management port MGT The MGT port dynamically connects to the active management module Factory Default vs MM assigned IP Addresses Each GbE Switch Module must be assigned its own Internet Protocol address which is used for communication with an SNMP network manager or other transmission control protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP applications for example BootP or TFTP The factory default IP address is 10 90 90 9x where x corresponds to the number of the bay into which the GbE 20 m The Command Line Interface 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Switch Module is installed For additional information see the Installation Guide The man agement module assigns an IP address of 192 168 70 1xx where xx corresponds to the number of the bay into which each GbE Switch Module is installed as shown in the following table Table 1 1 GbESM IP addresses based on switch module bay numbers Bay number Factory default IP address IP address assigned by MM Bay 1 10 90 90 91 192 168 70 127 Bay 2 10 90 90 92 192 168 70 128 Bay 3 10 90 90 94 192 168 70 129
304. server 1 1 0 8_05 img Get Image Put Image Image Filename on HTTP Browse Download via Browser Client 3 If you are loading software from your computer HTTP client go to step 4 If you are loading software from a FTP TFTP server enter the server s information in the FTP TFTP Settings section 4 Inthe Image Settings section select the image version you want to replace Image for Transfer E Ifyou are loading software from a FTP TFTP server enter the file name and click Get Image E If you are loading software from your computer click Browse In the File Upload Dialog select the file and click OK Click Download via Browser Once the image has loaded the page refreshes to show the new software 332 m The Boot Options Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Using the CLI To load a new software image to your switch you need the following E The image or boot software loaded on a FTP TFTP server on your network E The hostname or IP address of the FTP TFTP server E The name of the new software image or boot file NoTE The DNS parameters must be configured if specifying hostnames See Domain Name System Configuration on page 292 When the above requirements are met use the following procedure to download the new soft ware to your switch 1 Atthe Boot Options prompt enter Boot Options gtimg 2
305. server address where the configuration file is saved Set agTftpServer 0 192 168 10 10 2 Set the name of the configuration file Set agTftpCfgFileName 0 MyRunningConfig cfg 3 Initiate the transfer To save a running configuration file enter 4 Set agTftpAction 0 4 4 If you are using an FTP server enter a username Set agTftpUserName 0 MyName 5 If you are using an FTP server enter a password Set agTftpPassword 0 MyPassword 370 m Alteon OS SNMP Agent 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Saving a switch dump To save a switch dump to a FTP TFTP server follow the steps below This example assumes you have a FTP TFTP server at 192 168 10 10 1 Set the FTP TFTP server address where the configuration will be saved Set agTftpServer 0 192 168 10 10 2 Set the name of dump file Set agTftpDumpFileName 0 MyDumpFile dmp 3 Initiate the transfer To save a dump file enter 5 Set agTftpAction 0 5 4 Ifyou are using an FTP server enter a username Set agTftpUserName 0 MyName 5 If you are using an FTP server enter a password Set agTftpPassword 0 MyPassword 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS SNMP Agent m 371 Alteon OS Command Reference 372 m Alteon OS SNMP Agent 43W7774 May 2007 Glossary DIP Destination IP The destination IP address of a frame Address Dport Destination The destination port application socket for example http 80 htt
306. splay current static ARP configuration Table 6 59 ARP Static Configuration Menu Options cfg I3 arp static Command Syntax and Usage add lt I P address gt lt MAC address gt lt VLAN number gt lt port number gt Adds a permanent ARP entry del lt I P address such as 192 4 17 101 gt Deletes a permanent ARP entry clear lt interface number gt lt VLAN number gt lt port number gt lall lt ARP entry number gt Clears static ARP entries cur Displays current static ARP configuration 256 The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 frwd IP Forwarding Configuration IP Forwarding Menu dirbr Enable or disable forwarding directed broadcasts noicmprd Enable disable No ICMP Redirects on Globally turn IP Forwarding ON off Globally turn IP Forwarding OFF eur Display current IP Forwarding configuration Table 6 60 IP Forwarding Configuration Menu Options cfg I3 frwd Command Syntax and Usage dirbr disable enable Enables or disables forwarding directed broadcasts This command is disabled by default noicmprd disable enable Enables or disables ICMP re directs This command is disabled by default on Enables IP forwarding routing on the GbE Switch Module off Disables IP forwarding routing on the GbE Switch Module Forwarding is turned off by default cur Displays the current IP forwarding settings
307. ss 224 0 0 9 The default value is disabled default none listen supply both Configures the default route action metric lt 5 gt Configures the route metric which indicates the relative distance to the destination The default value is 1 auth none password Configures the authentication type The default is none key Configures the authentication key password enable Enables this RIP interface disable Disables this RIP interface current Displays the current RIP configuration 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 265 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 ospf Open Shortest Path First Configuration Open Shortest Path First Menu aindex OSPF Area index menu range OSPF Summary Range menu if OSPF Interface menu virt OSPF Virtual Links menu md5Skey OSPF MD5 Key Menu host OSPF Host Entry menu redist OSPF Route Redistribute menu lsdb Set the LSDB limit default Originate default route information on Globally turn OSPF ON off Globally turn OSPF OFF cur Display current OSPF configuration Table 6 67 OSPF Configuration Menu cfg I3 ospf Command Syntax and Usage aindex lt area index 0 2 gt Displays the area index menu This area index does not represent the actual OSPF area number See page 268 to view menu options range lt range number 1 16 gt Displays summary routes menu for up to 16 IP addresses See page 26
308. support Sec Level Displays the level of security used when generating SNMP mes sages using this entry 66 The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference info sys snmpv3 notify SNMPv3 Notify Table Information Name Tag viv2trap viv2trap Table 4 11 SNMPv3 Notify Table Information info sys snmpv3 notify Field Description Name The locally arbitrary but unique identifier associated with this snmpNotifyEntry Tag This represents a single tag value which is used to select entries in the snmpTargetAddrTable Any entry in the snmpTar getAddrTable that contains a tag value equal to the value of this entry is selected If this entry contains a value of zero length no entries are selected 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu E 67 Alteon OS Command Reference SNMPv3 Dump Information info sys snmpv3 dump usmUser Table User Name Protocol adminmd5 HMAC_MD5 DES PRIVACY adminsha HMAC_SHA DES PRIVACY viv2only NO AUTH NO PRIVACY vacmAccess Table Group Name Prefix Model Level Match Readv WriteV NotifyV viv2grp snmpvl noAuthNoPriv exact iso iso viv2only admingrp usm authPriv exact iso iso iso vacmViewTreeFamily Table View Name Subtree Mask Type iso 1 3 included viv2only 1 3 included viv2only 133681 Ged a Eo excluded viv2only T3336 6603516 excluded viv2only 1 63 641 663 18 excluded vacmSecurityToGroup Table Sec Mod
309. t Unreachs The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent icmpOutTimeExcds The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent icmpOutParm Probs The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent icmpOutSrcQuenchs The number of ICMP Source Quench buffer almost full stop send ing data messages sent icmpOutRedi rects The number of ICMP Redirect messages sent For a host this object will always be zero since hosts do not send redirects icmpOutEcho S The number of ICMP Echo request messages sent icmpOutEchoReps The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent 43W7774 May 2007 The Statistics Menu 147 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 5 19 ICMP Statistics stats I3 icmp Statistics Description icmpOutTimestamps The number of ICMP Timestamp request messages sent icmpOutTimestampReps The number of ICMP Timestamp Reply messages sent icmpOutAddrMasks The number of ICMP Address Mask Request messages sent icmpOutAddrMaskReps The number of ICMP Address Mask Reply messages sent 148 The Statistics Menu 43W7774 May 2007 stats 13 tcp TCP Statistics Alteon OS Command Reference TCP statistics tcpRtoAlgorithm tcpRtoMax tcpActiveOpens tcpAttemptFails tcpInSegs tcpRetransSegs tcpCurBuff tcpOutRsts 4 tcpRtoMin 0 240000 tcpMaxConn 512 252214 tcpPassiveOpens 7 528 tcpEstabResets 4 756401
310. t stats port if Statistics Description ifInOctets The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters ifInUcastPkts The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer which were not addressed to a multicast or broadcast address at this sub layer ifInBroadcastPkts The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer ifInMulticastPkts The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested to be transmitted and which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent For a MAC layer protocol this includes both Group and Functional addresses ifInDiscards The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being delivered to a higher layer protocol One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space ifInErrors For packet oriented interfaces the number of inbound packets that con tained errors preventing them from being delivered to a higher layer pro tocol For character oriented or fixed length interfaces the number of inbound transmission units that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher layer protocol 134 m The Statistics Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Refere
311. t Fast Fowarding status FDB Learning status For details see page 120 geaport Displays the GbESM port mapping between the two Gigabit Ethernet Aggregators GEA For details see page 121 sfp Displays the status of the Small Form Pluggable SFP module on each Fiber External Port For details see page 122 dump Dumps all switch information available from the Information Menu 10K or more depending on your configuration If you want to capture dump data to a file set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu E 57 Alteon OS Command Reference info sys System Information System Menu snmpv3 chassis general log user dump SNMPv3 Information Menu Show Show Show Show Dump BladeCenter Chassis related information general system information last 100 syslog messages current user status all system information The information provided by each menu option is briefly described in Table 4 2 with pointers to where detailed information can be found Table 4 2 System Menu Options info sys Command Syntax and Usage snmpv3 Displays SNMPv3 Information Menu To view the menu options see page 59 chassis Displays information about the BladeCenter chassis For details see page 69 general Displays system information including System date and time
312. t Maximum Hop Count for MST 4 60 mode Spanning Tree Mode on Globally turn Multiple Spanning Tree MSTP RSTP ON off Globally turn Multiple Spanning Tree MSTP RSTP OFF cur Display current MST parameters Alteon OS supports the IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP and IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP MSTP allows you to map many VLANs to a small number of spanning tree groups each with its own topology Up to 32 Spanning Tree Groups can be configured in mstp mode MRST is turned off by default NoTE When Multiple Spanning Tree is turned on VLAN 4095 is moved from Spanning Tree Group 128 to the Common Internal Spanning Tree CIST When Multiple Spanning Tree is turned off VLAN 4095 is moved back to Spanning Tree Group 128 Table 6 33 MSTP RSTP Configuration Menu Options cfg l2 mrst Command Syntax and Usage cist Displays the Common Internal Spanning Tree CIST Menu To view menu options see page 223 name lt 32 characters gt Configures a name for the MSTP region All devices within a MSTP region must have the same region name rev lt I1 65535 gt Configures a version number for the MSTP region The version is used as a numerical identifier for the region All devices within a MSTP region must have the same version number maxhop lt 4 60 gt Configures the maximum number of bridge hops a packet may to traverse before it is dropped The range is from 4 to
313. t be viewed with editors that require carriage returns such as Microsoft Notepad Note If the TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system the specified ptcfg file must exist prior to executing the pt cfg command and must be writable set with proper permission and not locked by any application The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current configuration data cfg gtcfg lt TFTP server gt lt filename gt Restoring the Active Switch Configuration When the gt cfg command is used the active configuration will be replaced with the com mands found in the specified configuration file The file can contain a full switch configuration or a partial switch configuration The configuration loaded using gt cfg is not activated until the apply command is used If the apply command is found in the configuration script file loaded using this command the apply action will be performed automatically To start the switch configuration download at the Configuration prompt enter Configuration gtcfg lt TFTP server gt lt filename gt Where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname and filename is the name of the target script configuration file 322 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 CHAPTER 7 The Operations Menu The Operations Menu is generally used for commands that affect switch performance immedi ately but do not alter permanent switch configu
314. t characters for each virtual link Default is none mdkey lt key ID 1 255 gt none Sets MDS key ID for each virtual link Default is none enable Enables OSPF virtual link 272 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 71 OSPF Virtual Link Configuration Menu Options cfg I3 ospf virt Command Syntax and Usage disable Disables OSPF virtual link delete Deletes OSPF virtual link cur Displays the current OSPF virtual link settings cfg 13 ospf host lt host number gt OSPF Host Entry Configuration OSPF Host Entry 1 Menu addr Set host entry IP address aindex Set area index cost Set cost of this host entry nabl Enable host entry disable Disable host entry delet Delete host entry cur Display current OSPF host entry configuration Table 6 72 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu Options cfg l3 ospf host Command Syntax and Usage addr lt I P address such as 192 4 17 101 gt Configures the base IP address for the host entry aindex lt area index 0 2 gt Configures the area index of the host cost lt cost value 1 65535 gt Configures the cost value of the host enable Enables OSPF host entry disable Disables OSPF host entry 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 273 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 72 OSPF Host Entry Configuration Menu Options cfg I3 ospf
315. t number aspath AS Filter Menu ap Set as path prepend of the matched route lp Set local preference of the matched rout metric Set metric of the matched rout type Set OSPF metric type of the matched rout prec Set the precedence of this route map weight Set weight of the matched rout nabl Enable route map disable Disable route map delet Delete route map cur Display current route map configuration Routing maps control and modify routing information Table 6 62 Routing Map Menu Options cfg l3 rmap Command Syntax and Usage alist lt number 1 8 gt Displays the Access List menu For more information see page 261 aspath lt number 1 8 gt Displays the Autonomous System AS Filter menu For more information see page 262 ap lt ASnumber gt lt AS number gt lt AS number gt none Sets the AS path preference of the matched rout e One to three path preferences can be configured lp lt 0 4294967294 gt none Sets the local preference of the matched route which affects both inbound and outbound direc tions The path with the higher preference is preferred metric lt 1l 4294967294 gt none Sets the metric of the matched route type lt value 112 gt none Assigns the type of OSPF metric The default is type 1 m Type 1 External routes are calculated using both internal and external metrics m Type 2 External routes are calculated using only the external me
316. tcpOutSegs 756655 0 tcpiInErrs 0 0 tcpCurConn 3 417 Table 5 20 TCP Statistics stats l3 tcp Statistics tcpRtoAlgorithm Description The algorithm used to determine the t imeout value used for retransmit ting unacknowledged octets tcpRtoMin The minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retrans mission timeout measured in milliseconds More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission t imeout In particular when the t imeout algorithm is rsre 3 an object of this type has the semantics of the LBOUND quantity described in RFC 793 tcpRtoMax The maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retrans mission timeout measured in milliseconds More refined semantics for objects of this type depend upon the algorithm used to determine the retransmission timeout In particular when the timeout algorithm is rsre 3 an object of this type has the semantics of the UBOUND quantity described in RFC 793 tcpMaxConn The limit on the total number of TCP connections the entity the switch can support In entities where the maximum number of connections is dynamic this object should contain the value 1 tcpActiveOpens The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the SYN SENT state from the CLOSED state tcpPassiveOpens The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition
317. te Route Statistics Alteon OS Command Reference Route statistics ipRoutesCur ipRoutesMax 11 ipRoutesHighWater 11 2048 Table 5 16 Route Statistics stats l3 route Statistics Description ipRoutesCur The total number of outstanding routes in the route table ipRoutesHighWater The highest number of routes ever recorded in the route table ipRoutesMax The maximum number of routes that are supported stats 13 arp ARP statistics This menu option enables you to display Address Resolution Protocol statistics ARP statistics arpl arpl EntriesCur EntriesMax 3 arpEntriesHighWater 4 4095 Table 5 17 ARP Statistics stats I3 arp Statistics Description arpEntriesCur The total number of outstanding ARP entries in the ARP table arpEntriesHighWater The highest number of ARP entries ever recorded in the ARP table arpEntriesMax The maximum number of ARP entries that are supported 43W7774 May 2007 The Statistics Menu 145 Alteon OS Command Reference stats 13 dns DNS Statistics This menu option enables you to display Domain Name System statistics DNS statistics dnsInRequests dnsBadRequests O dnsOutRequests 0 Table 5 18 DNS Statistics stats dns Statistics Description dnsInRequests The total number of DNS request packets that have been received dnsOutRequests The total number of DNS r
318. tem administrator under the factory default configuration you are asked whether you wish to run the Setup utility Setup can also be activated manually from the command line interface any time after login Information Needed For Setup Setup requests the following information E Basic system information O Date amp time O Whether to use Spanning Tree Group or not E Optional configuration for each port Oo Oo Speed duplex flow control and negotiation mode as appropriate Whether to use VLAN tagging or not as appropriate H Optional configuration for each VLAN Oo Oo Name of VLAN Which ports are included in the VLAN H Optional configuration of IP parameters Oo O OF Qa o IP address subnet mask and VLAN for each IP interface IP addresses for default gateway Destination subnet mask and gateway IP address for each IP static route Whether IP forwarding is enabled or not Whether the RIP supply is enabled or not 32 m First Time Configuration 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Starting Setup When You Log In The Setup prompt appears automatically whenever you login as the system administrator under the factory default settings 1 Connect to the switch After connecting the login prompt will appear as shown below Enter Password 2 Enter admin as the default administrator password If the factory default configuration is detected the system prompts 10Gb U
319. the firmware versions and options that are installed In addition to seeing if Common Internal Spanning Tree CIST is enabled or disabled you can view CIST bridge information including the following E Priority E Maximum age value E Forwarding delay 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu 91 Alteon OS Command Reference You can view port specific CIST information including the following E Port number and priority E Cost E Link type and Port type The following table describes the CIST parameters Table 4 21 CIST Parameter Descriptions Parameter Description CIST Root The CIST Root shows information about the root bridge for the Common Internal Spanning Tree CIST Values on this row of information refer to the CIST root CIST Regional Root The CIST Regional Root shows information about the root bridge for this MSTP region Values on this row of information refer to the regional root Priority bridge The bridge priority parameter controls which bridge on the network will become the STP root bridge Hello The hello time parameter specifies in seconds how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit BPDU Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge hello value MaxAge The maximum age parameter specifies in seconds the maximum time the bridge waits without receiving a configuration bridge protocol data unit before it reconfigure the STP
320. the selected ACL to the ACL Group rem acl lt 896 gt Removes the selected ACL from the ACL Group cur Displays the current ACL group parameters 318 The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg pmirr Port Mirroring Configuration Port Mirroring Menu mirror Enable Disable Mirroring monport Monitoring Port based PM Menu cur Display All Mirrored and Monitoring Ports Port mirroring is disabled by default For more information about port mirroring on the GbE Switch Module see Appendix A Troubleshooting in the Alteon OS Application Guide NoTE Traffic on VLAN 4095 is not mirrored to the external ports The Port Mirroring Menu is used to configure enable and disable the monitored port When enabled network packets being sent and or received on a target port are duplicated and sent to a monitor port By attaching a network analyzer to the monitor port you can collect detailed information about your network performance and usage Table 6 113 Port Mirroring Menu Options cfg pmirr Command Syntax and Usage mirror disable enable Enables or disables port mirroring monport lt port alias or number gt Displays port mirroring menu To view menu options see page 320 cur Displays current settings of the mirrored and monitoring ports 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 319 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg pmirr monp
321. tialize initialize INT7 force auth authorized initialize initialize INT8 force auth authorized initialize initialize INT9 force auth authorized initialize initialize INT10 force auth authorized initialize initialize INT11 force auth authorized initialize initialize INT12 force auth authorized initialize initialize INT13 force auth authorized initialize initialize INT14 force auth authorized initialize initialize MGT force auth authorized initialize initialize EXT1 force auth authorized initialize initialize EXT2 force auth authorized initialize initialize EXT3 force auth authorized initialize initialize EXT4 force auth authorized initialize initialize Port down or disabled NoTE The sample screens that appear in this document might differ slightly from the screens displayed by your system Screen content varies based on the type of BladeCenter unit that you are using and the firmware versions and options that are installed 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu E 83 Alteon OS Command Reference The following table describes the IEEE 802 1x parameters Table 4 18 802 1x Parameter Descriptions info l2 802 1x Parameter Description Port Displays each port s alias Auth Mode Displays the Access Control authorization mode for the port The Authoriza tion mode can be one of the following force unauth auto force auth Au th Status Displays the curre
322. ticator Statistics eapolFramesRx 925 eapolFramesTx 3201 eapolStartFramesRx 2 eapolLogoffFramesRx 0 eapolRespIdFramesRx 463 apolRespFramesRx 460 eapolReqidFramesTx 1820 eapolReqFramesTx 1381 invalidEapolFramesRx 0 eapLengthErrorFramesRx 0 lastEapolFrameVersion 1 lastEapolFrameSource 00 01 02 45 ac 51 Table 5 3 802 1x Authenticator Statistics of a Port stats port 8021 x Statis tics Description eapolFramesRx Total number of EAPOL frames received eapolFramesTx Total number of EAPOL frames transmitted eapolStartFramesRx Total number of EAPOL Start frames received eapolLogoff FramesRx eapolRespId FramesRx Total number of EAPOL Logoff frames received Total number of EAPOL Response Identity frames received apo lRespFramesRx Total number of Response frames received eapolReqidFramesTx Total number of Request Identity frames transmitted eapolRegqFramesTx Total number of Request frames transmitted invalidEapol FramesRx Total number of invalid EAPOL frames received eapLengthError Total number of EAP length error frames received FramesRx lastEapolFrameVer The protocol version number carried in the most recently received sion EAPOL frame lastEapolFrame The source MAC address carried in the most recently received Source EAPOL frame 126 The Statistics Men u 43W7774 May 2007 Alt
323. tics scccscecccecececeeeeceeeeseeenens network management HOLICE ssrt iiias NTP server MENUsssssscssrrersssssissossssosssresesvossereesers NTP synchronization seeeeeeeeeeeeeeerreereeerreerrreee NTP time ZoNe sissioni iernare nas na O Online helpers anea sea cgi 50 operating mode Configuring cccccceeseeeeeees 211 Operations MENU eeeeecesseeecsseecesseeeeeneeeeeeeees 323 operations level BGP options eeeseeeeeeeees 328 operations level IP Options eeseeeeeseeeeeeeeees 327 Operations Level Port Options 0 325 326 operations level VRRP options eeseeeeeeeees 327 ospf ACA INGEX onas 266 268 authentication Key cccccccsssecesesseeesseeeees 271 Configuration 5 seccssnvoosexacssvsaperseseverasneosens 266 cost of the selected path eeeeeeeseeeeeees 270 cost value of the hoSt esseeeeeeseeeseeeeeees 273 dead declaring a silent router to be down 271 dead health parameter of a hello packet 272 hello authentication parameter of a hello packet 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference 272 host entry configuration eeeeesseeee eee HOSUTOULES cic sciccncteedessnsidensevsbstonesbevacteanseces ANCETLACE sons sicetapiceevens leteesveedevsnetnecbe ceed ia tks interface configuration sssseeeeeeeeees link state database ceeeeeeeee seen Not So Stubby Area e
324. tinue without applying Changes are normally applied 4 Atthe prompt decide whether to make the changes permanent Save changes to flash y n Enter y to save the changes to flash Enter n to continue without saving the changes Changes are normally saved at this point 5 If you do not apply or save the changes the system prompts whether to abort them Abort all changes y n Enter y to discard the changes Enter n to return to the Apply the changes prompt Note After initial configuration is complete it is recommended that you change the default passwords as shown in Setting Passwords on page 43 Optional Setup for Telnet Support NoTE This step is optional Perform this procedure only if you are planning on connecting to the GbE Switch Module through a remote Telnet connection 1 Telnet is enabled by default To change the setting use the following command gt gt cfg sys access tnet 2 Apply and save SNMP and or telnet configuration s gt gt System apply gt gt System save 42 First Time Configuration 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Setting Passwords It is recommended that you change the user and administrator passwords after initial configu ration and as regularly as required under your network security policies To change the administrator password you must login using the administrator password
325. tion Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu ifs Enable disable tracking other interfaces ports Enable disable tracking VLAN switch ports cur Display current VRRP Group Tracking configuration Note If Virtual Router Group Tracking is enabled then the tracking option will be available only under group option The tracking setting for the other individual virtual routers will be ignored Table 6 95 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Menu cfg l3 vr group track Command Syntax and Usage ifs disablelenable When enabled the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each other IP interface active on this switch An IP interface is considered active when there is at least one active port on the same VLAN This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available routes as the master This command is disabled by default ports disablelenable When enabled the priority for this virtual router will be increased for each active port on the same VLAN A port is considered active if it has a link and is forwarding traffic This helps elect the virtual routers with the most available ports as the master This command is disabled by default cur Displays the current configuration for priority tracking for this virtual router 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 301 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 vrrp if lt interface number gt VRRP Interface Configuration
326. tion 296 Virtual Router Priority Tracking Configuration 298 Virtual Router Group Configuration 299 Virtual Router Group Priority Tracking Configuration 301 VRRP Interface Configuration 302 VRRP Tracking Configuration 303 Quality of Service Configuration 304 802 1p Configuration 305 DSCP Configuration 306 Access Control List Configuration 307 43W7774 May 2007 ACL Configuration 308 Ethernet Filtering Configuration 309 IP version 4 Filtering Configuration 310 TCP UDP Filtering Configuration 312 ACL Metering Configuration 313 Contents E 9 Alteon OS Command Reference 10 Contents Re Mark Configuration 314 Re Marking In Profile Configuration 315 Update User Priority Configuration 316 Re Marking Out of Profile Configuration 317 Packet Format Filtering Configuration 317 ACL Group Configuration 318 Port Mirroring Configuration 319 Port Mirroring Configuration 320 Setup 321 Dump 321 Saving the Active Switch Configuration 322 Restoring the Active Switch Configuration 322 The Operations Menu 323 Operations Menu 324 Operations Level Port Options 325 Operations Level Port 802 1x Options 326 Operations Level VRRP Options 327 Operations Level IP Options 327 Operations Level BGP Options 328 The Boot Options Menu 329 Boot Menu 330 Scheduled Reboot of the Switch 330 Scheduled Reboot Menu 330 Updating the Switch Software Image 331 Loading New Software to Your Switch 331 Using the BBI 331 Using the CLI 333 Selecting a So
327. tion Menu E 267 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 ospf aindex lt area index gt Area Index Configuration OSPF Area index 1 Menu areaid Set area ID typ Set area typ metric Set stub area metric auth Set authentication type spf Set time interval between two SPF calculations nabl Enable area disable Disable area delet Delete area cur Display current OSPF area configuration Table 6 68 Area Index Configuration Menu Options cfg l3 ospf aindex Command Syntax and Usage areaid lt P address such as 192 4 17 101 gt Defines the IP address of the OSPF area number type transit stub nssa Defines the type of area For example when a virtual link has to be established with the backbone the area type must be defined as transit Transit area allows area summary information to be exchanged between routing devices Any area that is not a stub area or NSSA is considered to be transit area Stub area is an area where external routing information is not distributed Typically a stub area is connected to only one other area NSSA Not So Stubby Area NSSA is similar to stub area with additional capabilities For exam ple routes originating from within the NSSA can be propagated to adjacent transit and backbone areas External routes from outside the Autonomous System AS can be advertised within the NSSA but are not distributed into other areas metric lt metric value 1 65535
328. to the SYN RCVD state from the LISTEN state tcpAttemptFails The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the SYN SENT state or the SYN RCVD state plus the number of times TCP connections have made a direct tran sition to the LISTEN state from the SYN RCVD state 43W7774 May 2007 The Statistics Menu E 149 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 5 20 TCP Statistics stats 3 tcp Statistics Description tcpEstabResets The number of times TCP connections have made a direct transition to the CLOSED state from either the ESTABLISHED state or the CLOSE WAIT state tcpInSegs The total number of segments received including those received in error This count includes segments received on currently established connec tions tcpOutSegs The total number of segments sent including those on current connec tions but excluding those containing only retransmitted octets tcpRetransSegs The total number of segments retransmitted that is the number of TCP segments transmitted containing one or more previously transmitted octets tcpiInErrs The total number of segments received in error for example bad TCP checksums tcpCurBuff The total number of outstanding memory allocations from heap by TCP protocol stack tcpCurConn The total number of outstanding TCP sessions that are currently opened tcpOutRsts The number of TCP segments sent containing
329. to a single seg ment the port with the lowest port priority becomes the designated port for the segment The range is 0 to 240 in steps of 16 0 16 32 and the default is 128 cost lt 0 200000000 gt Configures the CIST port path cost The port path cost is used to help determine the designated port for a segment Generally speaking the faster the port the lower the path cost The default is 2000 for 10 Gigabit ports 20000 for Gigabit ports hello lt 10 seconds gt Configures the CIST port Hello time The Hello time specifies how often the root bridge transmits a configuration bridge protocol data unit BPDU Any bridge that is not the root bridge uses the root bridge Hello value The range is 1 to 10 seconds and the default is 2 seconds link lt auto p2p or shared default auto gt Defines the type of link connected to the port as follows auto Configures the port to detect the link type and automatically match its settings p2p Configures the port for Point To Point protocol shared Configures the port to connect to a shared medium usually a hub The default link type is auto 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 225 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 36 CIST Port Configuration Menu Options cfg l2 mrst cist port Command Syntax and Usage edge disable enable Enables or disables this port as an edge port An edge port is not connected to a bridge and can begin forwarding traffic
330. trics Type 1 routes have more cost than Type 2 E none Removes the OSPF metric 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 259 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 62 Routing Map Menu Options cfg l3 rmap Continued Command Syntax and Usage prec lt value 1 256 gt Sets the precedence of the route map The smaller the value the higher the precedence Default value is 10 weight lt value 0 65534 gt none Sets the weight of the route map enable Enables the route map disable Disables the route map delete Deletes the route map cur Displays the current route configuration 260 m The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 rmap lt route map number gt alist lt access list number gt IP Access List Configuration NoTE The route map number 1 32 and the access list number 1 8 represent the IP access list you wish to configure IP Access List 1 Menu nwf Network Filter number metric Metric action Set Network Filter action nabl Enable Access List disable Disable Access List delet Delete Access List cur Display current Access List configuration Table 6 63 IP Access List Menu Options cfg 3 rmap alist Command Syntax and Usage nwf lt network filter number 1 256 gt Sets the network filter number See cfg 13 nwf on page 258 for details metric lt 1 42949672
331. trict 200 1 1 vlan any up BOOTP relay settings OFF 0 0 0 0 0 IP forwarding settings ON dirbr disabled noicmprd dis network filter settings route map settings IP information includes E IP interface information Interface number IP address subnet mask broadcast address VLAN number and operational status E Default gateway information Metric for selecting which configured gateway to use gate way number IP address and health status E BootP relay settings E P forwarding settings including the forwarding status of directed broadcasts and the status of ICMP re directs E Network filter settings E Route map settings 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu E 111 Alteon OS Command Reference info 13 igmp IGMP Multicast Group Information IGMP Multicast Menu mrouter Show IGMP Snooping Multicast Router Port information find Show a single group by IP group address vian Show groups on a single vlan port Show groups on a single port trunk Show groups on a single trunk detail Show detail of a single group by IP group address dump Show all groups Table 4 32 describes the commands used to display information about IGMP groups learned by the switch Table 4 32 IGMP Multicast Group Information Menu Options info l3 igmp Command Syntax and Usage mrouter Displays IGMP Multicast Router menu To view menu options see page 113 find lt IP address gt
332. tries for switch s interfaces dump Show all ARP entries clear Clear ARP cache Table 9 5 ARP Maintenance Menu Options maint arp Command Syntax and Usage find lt IP address such as 192 4 17 101 gt Shows a single ARP entry by IP address port lt port alias or number gt Shows ARP entries on a single port vlan lt VLAN number gt Shows ARP entries on a single VLAN addr Shows the list of IP addresses which the switch will respond to for ARP requests dump Shows all ARP entries clear Clears the entire ARP list from switch memory NoTE To display all ARP entries currently held in the switch or a portion according to one of the options listed on the menu above find port vlan dump you can also refer to ARP Information on page 100 43W7774 May 2007 The Maintenance Menu E 345 Alteon OS Command Reference maint route IP Route Manipulation IP Routing Menu find Show a single route by destination IP address gw Show routes to a single gateway type Show routes of a single type tag Show routes of a single tag if Show routes on a single interface dump Show all routes clear Clear route table Table 9 6 IP Route Manipulation Menu Options maint route Command Syntax and Usage find lt I P address such as 192 4 17 101 gt Shows a single route by destination IP address gw lt default gateway address such as 192 4
333. ty the following appears No FLASH dump available 350 The Maintenance Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference maint ptdmp lt server gt lt filename gt TFTP System Dump Put Use this command to put save the system dump to a TFTP server Note If the TFTP server is running SunOS or the Solaris operating system the specified ptdmp file must exist prior to executing the pt dmp command and must be writable set with proper permission and not locked by any application The contents of the specified file will be replaced with the current dump data To save dump information via TFTP at the Maintenance prompt enter Maintenance ptdmp lt server gt lt filename gt Where server is the TFTP server IP address or hostname and filename is the target dump file maint cldmp Clearing Dump Information To clear dump information from flash memory at the Maintenance prompt enter Maintenance cldmp The switch clears the dump region of flash memory and displays the following message FLASH dump region cleared If the flash dump region is already clear the switch displays the following message FLASH dump region is already clear 43W7774 May 2007 The Maintenance Menu E 351 Alteon OS Command Reference maint panic Panic Command The panic command causes the switch to immediately dump state information to flash mem ory
334. ty model security level and security name information There may be multiple trans port endpoints associated with a particular set of SNMP parameters or a particular transport end point may be associated with several sets of SNMP parameters To view menu options see page 200 notify lt notify index 1 16 gt A notification application typically monitors a system for particular events or conditions and gen erates Notification Class messages based on these events or conditions To view menu options see page 201 viv2 disable enable This command allows you to enable or disable the access to SNMP version 1 and version 2 This command is enabled by default cur Displays the current SNMPv3 configuration 192 The Configuration Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg sys ssnmp snmpv3 usm User Security Model Configuration You can make use of a defined set of user identities using this Security Model An SNMP engine must have the knowledge of applicable attributes of a user This menu helps you create a user security model entry for an authorized user You need to pro vide a security name to create the USM entry SNMPv3 usmUser 1 Menu name Set USM user name auth Set authentication protocol authpw Set authentication password priv Set privacy protocol privpw Set privacy password del Delete usmUser entry cur Display current usmUser configuration Table 6 11
335. u radius RADIUS Authentication Menu tacacs TACACS Authentication Menu ldap LDAP Authentication Menu ntp NTP Server Menu ssnmp System SNMP Menu access System Access Menu dat Set system dat tim Set system tim timezon Set system timezone daylight savings olddst Set system DST for US idle Set timeout for idle CLI sessions notice Set login notice bannr Set login banner hprompt Enable disable display hostname sysName in CLI prompt reminders Enable disable Reminders cur Display current system wide parameters 4 From the System Menu use the following command to select the System Access Menu gt gt System access The System Access Menu is displayed System Access Menu mgmt anagement Network Definition Menu user User Access Control Menu passwords http Enable disable HTTP Web access https HTTPS Web Access Menu wport Set HTTP Web server port number snmp Set SNMP access control userbbi Enable disable user configuration from BBI tnport Set Telnet server port number tport Set the TFTP Port for the system cur Display current system access configuration 5 Select the administrator password System Access user admpw 44 m First Time Configuration 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference 6 Enter the current administrator password at the prompt Changing ADMINISTRATOR password validation required Enter cu
336. u Options stats Command Syntax and Usage port lt port alias or number gt Displays the Port Statistics Menu for the specified port Use this command to display traffic statis tics on a port by port basis Traffic statistics are included in SNMP Management Information Base MIB objects To view menu options see page 125 12 Displays the Layer 2 Stats Menu To view menu options see page 137 13 Displays the Layer 3 Stats Menu To view menu options see page 141 mp Displays the Management Processor Statistics Menu Use this command to view information on how switch management processes and resources are currently being allocated To view menu options see page 160 acl Displays ACL Statistics menu To view menu options see page 164 snmp Displays SNMP statistics See page 165 for sample output ntp lt clear gt Displays Network Time Protocol NTP Statistics See page 169 for a sample output and a descrip tion of NTP Statistics You can execute the clear command option to delete all statistics clrmp Clears all management processor statistics dump Dumps all switch statistics Use this command to gather data for tuning and debugging switch per formance If you want to capture dump data to a file set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump command For details see page 170 124 The Statistics Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteo
337. uld be established maintained with the neighbor across all OSPF areas and interfaces negotiation done The sum total number of neighbors in this state wherein the Master slave relationship has been negotiated and sequence numbers have been exchanged across all OSPF areas and interfaces exchange done The sum total number of neighbors in this state that is in an adjacency s final state having transmitted a full sequence of Database Description packets across all OSPF areas and interfaces bad requests The sum total number of Link State Requests which have been received for a link state advertisement not contained in the database across all interfaces and OSPF areas bad sequence The sum total number of Database Description packets which have been received that either a Has an unexpected DD sequence number b Unexpectedly has the init bit set c Has an options field differing from the last Options field received in a Database Description packet Any of these conditions indicate that some error has occurred during adjacency establishment for all OSPF areas and interfaces loading done The sum total number of link state updates received for all out of date portions of the database across all OSPF areas and interfaces nlway The sum total number of Hello packets received from neighbors in which this router is not mentioned across all OSPF interfaces and areas rst_ad The sum total number of ti
338. unidirectional traffic to ports on the isolated VLAN or to community VLAN m Isolated The isolated VLAN carries unidirectional traffic from host ports A Private VLAN may have only one isolated VLAN Community Community VLANs carry upstream traffic from host ports A Private VLAN may have multiple community VLANs map lt 2 4094 gt Configures Private VLAN mapping between a secondary VLAN isolated or community and a primary VLAN Enter the primary VLAN ID ena Enables the Private VLAN dis Disables the Private VLAN cur Displays current parameters for the selected Private VLAN 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 247 Alteon OS Command Reference cfg 13 Layer 3 Configuration Layer 3 Menu EE Interface Menu gw Default Gateway Menu route Static Route Menu mroute Static IP Multicast Route Menu arp ARP Menu frwd Forwarding Menu nwf Network Filters Menu rmap Route Map Menu rip Routing Information Protocol Menu ospf Open Shortest Path First OSPF Menu bgp Border Gateway Protocol Menu igmp IGMP Menu dns Domain Name System Menu bootp Bootstrap Protocol Relay Menu vrrp Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol Menu rtrid Set router ID cur Display current IP configuration Table 6 53 Layer 3 Configuration Menu cfg I3 Command Syntax and Usage if lt interface number 1 128 gt Displays the IP Interface Menu To view menu options see
339. unsupported SNMP version snmpInBadC tyNames The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP entity which used an SNMP community name not known to the said entity the switch snmpInBadC tyUses The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP protocol entity which represented an SNMP operation which was not allowed by the SNMP community named in the Message 43W7774 May 2007 The Statistics Menu 165 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 5 31 SNMP Statistics stats snmp Statistics Description snmpInASNParseErrs The total number of ASN 1 or BER errors encountered by the SNMP pro tocol entity when decoding SNMP Messages received Note OSI s method of specifying abstract objects is called ASN 1 Abstract Syntax Notation One defined in X 208 and one set of rules for representing such objects as strings of ones and zeros is called the BER Basic Encoding Rules defined in X 209 ASN 1 is a flexible nota tion that allows one to define a variety of data types from simple types such as integers and bit strings to structured types such as sets and sequences BER describes how to represent or encode values of each ASN 1 type as a string of eight bit octets snmpEnableAuth An object to enable or disable the authentication traps generated by this Traps entity the switch snmpOutPkts The total number of SNMP Messages which were passed from the SNMP protocol entity to the transport se
340. uration 31 Using the Setup Utility 32 Information Needed For Setup 32 Starting Setup When You LogIn 33 Stopping and Restarting Setup Manually 34 Stopping Setup 34 Restarting Setup 34 Setup Part 1 Basic System Configuration 34 Setup Part 2 Port Configuration 36 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Setup Part 3 VLANs 38 Setup Part 4 IP Configuration 39 IP Interfaces 39 Default Gateways 40 IP Routing 41 Setup Part 5 Final Steps 41 Optional Setup for Telnet Support 42 Setting Passwords 43 Changing the Default Administrator Password 43 Changing the Default User Password 45 Menu Basics 47 The Main Menu 48 Menu Summary 49 Global Commands 50 Command Line History and Editing 53 Command Line Interface Shortcuts 54 Command Stacking 54 Command Abbreviation 54 Tab Completion 54 The Information Menu 55 Information Menu 56 System Information 58 SNMPv3 System Information Menu 59 SNMPv3 USM User Table Information 61 SNMPVv3 View Table Information 62 SNMPv3 Access Table Information 63 SNMPv3 Group Table Information 64 SNMPv3 Community Table Information 64 SNMPv3 Target Address Table Information 65 SNMPv3 Target Parameters Table Information 66 SNMPv3 Notify Table Information 67 SNMPv3 Dump Information 68 BladeCenter Chassis Information 69 General System Information 70 Show Recent Syslog Messages 72 User Status 73 Layer 2 Information 74 4 Contents 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference FDB Information 7
341. ve but not in service The newMaster trap indicates that the sending agent has tran sitioned to Master state The newBackup trap indicates that the sending agent has transitioned to Backup state A vrrpAuthFailure trap signifies that a packet has been received from a router whose authentication key or authenti cation type conflicts with this router s authentication key or authentication type Implementation of this trap is optional A altSwLoginFailure trap signifies that someone failed to enter a valid username password combination 366 m Alteon OS SNMP Agent 43W7774 May 2007 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 9 10 Alteon OS Supported Enterprise SNMP Traps Trap Name Description altSwTcpHoldDown altSwTempExceedThreshold A altSwTcpHoldDown trap signifies that new TCP connec tion requests from a particular client will be blocked for a pre determined amount of time since the rate of new TCP connections from that client has reached a pre determined threshold A altSwTempExceedThreshold trap signifies that the switch temperature has exceeded maximum safety limits Alteon OS SNMP Agent m 367 Alteon OS Command Reference Working with Switch Images and Configuration Files This section describes how to use MIB calls to work with switch images and configuration files You can use a standard SNMP tool to perform the actions using the MIBs listed in Table 9 11 The examples i
342. viv2only 133601 623415 excluded viv2only 1 346 16 35 16 excluded viv2only 13 3464 lepsa L8 excluded Table 4 5 SNMPv3 View Table Information Parameters info sys snmpv3 view Field Description View Name Displays the name of the view Subtree Displays the MIB subtree as an OID string A view subtree is the set of all MIB object instances which have a common Object Identifier prefix to their names Mask Displays the bit mask Type Displays whether a family of view subtrees is included or excluded from the MIB view 62 The Information Menu 43W7774 May 2007 Alteon OS Command Reference info sys snmpv3 access SNMPv3 Access Table Information The access control sub system provides authorization services The vacmAccessTable maps a group name security information a context and a message type which could be the read or write type of operation or notification into a MIB view The View based Access Control Model defines a set of services that an application can use for checking access rights of a group This group s access rights are determined by a read view a write view and a notify view The read view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group while reading the objects The write view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group when writing objects The notify view represents the set of object instances authorized for the group when sending a notification
343. w menu options see page 234 jtime lt 00 65535 gt Configures the time interval between GARP Join messages in milliseconds The default value is 200 ltime lt J 00 65535 gt Configures the GARP Leave time value in milliseconds The Leave time is the interval the switch waits before removing the port from a VLAN on which it received the Leave message The default value is 600 latime lt 00 65535 gt Configures the time interval for GARP Leave All messages in milliseconds The default value is 10000 dynamic enable disable Enables or disables dynamic VLAN creation If you disable dynamic VLAN creation existing dynamic VLANs persist in the switch but no new dynamic VLANs are created To remove all existing dynamic VLANs turn GVRP off on Globally turns GVRP on With GVRP on the GbESM processes GPDUs 43W7774 May 2007 The Configuration Menu E 233 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 6 40 GVRP Menu Options cfg l2 gvrp Command Syntax and Usage off Globally turns GVRP off With GVRP off the switch does not process GPDUs When you turn GVRP off existing dynamic VLANs are deleted cur Display current GVRP configuration cfg 12 gvrp port GVRP Port Configuration GVRP Port EXT2 Menu setreg Set learning GPDU for registrar of this port setapp Set sending GPDU from applicant of this port ena Enable GVRP support for this port dis Disable GVRP support for this
344. you can view the state of each port in the various trunk groups For details see page 93 vlan Displays VLAN configuration information including m VLAN Number m VLAN Name E Status m Port membership of the VLAN For details see page 94 gen Displays general Layer 2 information 43W7774 May 2007 The Information Menu 75 Alteon OS Command Reference Table 4 12 Layer 2 Menu Options info I2 Command Syntax and Usage dump Dumps all switch information available from the Layer 2 menu 10K or more depending on your configuration If you want to capture dump data to a file set your communication software on your workstation to capture session data prior to issuing the dump commands info 12 db FDB Information Forwarding Database Menu find Show a single FDB entry by MAC address port Show FDB entries on a single port vlan Show FDB entries on a single VLAN state Show FDB entries by state dump Show all FDB entries The forwarding database FDB contains information that maps the media access control MAC address of each known device to the switch port where the device address was learned The FDB also shows which other ports have seen frames destined for a particular MAC address NoTE The master forwarding database supports up to 16K MAC address entries on the MP per switch Table 4 13 FDB Information Menu Options info l2 fdb Command Syntax and Usage
345. you wish to configure individual IP interfaces enter the number of the IP interface you with to configure To skip IP interface configuration press lt Enter gt without typing an interface number and go to Default Gateways on page 40 NOTE Interface 128 is reserved for switch management If you change the IP address of IF 128 you can lose the connection to the management module Use the management module to change the IP address of the GbE Switch Module 2 For the specified IP interface enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation Current IP address 0 0 00 Enter new IP address To keep the current setting press lt Enter gt 3 At the prompt enter the IP subnet mask in dotted decimal notation Current subnet mask 0 0 0 0 Enter new subnet mask 43W7774 May 2007 First Time Configuration 39 Alteon OS Command Reference To keep the current setting press lt Enter gt 4 If configuring VLANs specify a VLAN for the interface This prompt appears if you selected to configure VLANs back in Part 1 Current VLAN 1 Enter new VLAN 1 4094 Enter the number for the VLAN to which the interface belongs or press lt Enter gt without spec ifying a VLAN number to accept the current setting 5 At the prompt enter y to enable the IP interface or n to leave it disabled Enable IP interface y n 6 The system prompts you to configure another inte

Nortel Networks 43W7774 Switch User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents